第1章巴利
1. Paṭhamo paricchedo
欲界善法注释巴利
Kāmāvacarakusalavaṇṇanā
8 8. 这样先说明了礼敬三宝等内容之后,现在为了简要地宣说这部已经开始撰作的论典的核心义理——阿毗达摩,而说出“心、心所”等话。其中,对于“心”这个词的词义,论主自己紧接着就详细解释了。而在“心所”等词中,因为与心不相离,所以是系属于心、存在于心中的;又因为依心而运作,所以叫心所,这是受蕴等三蕴的别名。“色”是指变坏,或者被变坏,也就是遇到冷热等而发生变化、被影响的意思,这是四大种以及二十四种所造色合起来共二十八种色蕴的别名。因为编织有与无,或者因为连结,所以渴爱被称为“织”;没有这个渴爱,或者从它出离,所以叫涅槃,即不死、无为的事物。“iti”这个词是用来举例的。没有比这更高的,所以叫无上。或者,因为安住于四种无畏,所以没有能反驳它的更高说法,因此叫无上。因为在智、断、障、出离这些方面,在包括天界的世间中,没有任何人能依正法说出比世尊更高的说法。在这里,世尊因为没有怖畏,所以就是无畏的。这确实是世尊所说——巴利
8. Evaṃ tāva ratanattayappaṇāmādikaṃ dassetvā idāni yathāraddhappakaraṇassa atthasarīrabhūtamabhidhammaṃ saṅkhepato uddisanto āha ‘‘cittaṃ cetasika’’ntiādi. Tattha cittasaddassa tāva vacanatthaṃ sayameva anantaraṃ vipañceti. ‘‘Cetasika’’ntiādīsu pana avippayogībhāvena cetasi citte niyuttaṃ, tattha vā bhavaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti cetasikaṃ, vedanādikkhandhattayassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ruppati, rūpīyatīti vā rūpaṃ, sītuṇhādīhi vikāramāpajjati, āpādīyatīti attho, catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ, catuvīsatiupādārūpānañca vasena aṭṭhavīsatividhassa rūpakkhandhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhavābhavaṃ vinanato saṃsibbanato vānaṃ vuccati taṇhā, na vijjati sā ettha, tato vā nikkhantaṃ etanti nibbānaṃ, amataṃ asaṅkhataṃ vatthu. Iti-saddo nidassane. Natthi etassa uttaritaroti niruttaro. Atha vā catuvesārajjavihārattā natthi etassa uttaraṃ paccanīkavacananti niruttaro. Ñāṇappahānaantarāyaniyyānikesu hi sadevake loke na koci satthu sahadhammikaṃ uttaraṃ vacanaṃ kathetuṃ samattho atthīti. Tatra bhagavā utrāsābhāvato visāradova hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
舍利弗,假如有人这样指责我:“你自称是正自觉者,但这些法你并没有真正证悟。”对于这种指责,我在世间看不到任何沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔罗、梵天或任何人能依法来驳倒我。舍利弗,我确实看不到这样的迹象,所以我安住在安稳中,安住在无畏中,获得了自信。巴利
‘‘‘Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ime dhammā anabhisambuddhāti tatra vata maṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṃ sahadhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṃ, sāriputta, na samanupassāmi, etamahaṃ, sāriputta, nimittaṃ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi.
你自称诸漏已尽,但这些漏并没有完全灭尽——面对这种指责……我依然安住。巴利
‘‘Khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ime āsavā aparikkhīṇāti tatra vata maṃ…pe… viharāmi.
那些被你称为障碍法的事物,对于实践它们的人来说,根本不足以构成障碍——面对这种指责,我就这样……(中略)……安住。巴利
‘‘Ye ca kho pana te antarāyikā dhammā vuttā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyāti tatra vata maṃ…pe… viharāmi.
然而,为你宣说法的那个目的,并不能让沉思它的人正确地灭尽苦。对于这一点,我确实……(中略)……安住。巴利
‘‘Yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desito, so na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti tatra vata maṃ…pe… viharāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.150).
开示四圣谛,就是宣说四圣谛。因为从苦、苦集、苦灭、趣向苦灭之道这四方面来说,确实有四种圣谛。正如经中所说:“比丘们,有这四种圣谛。哪四种呢?苦圣谛、苦集圣谛、苦灭圣谛、趣向苦灭之道的圣谛。”(《相应部》5.1083)
其中,三界的一切法,因为是一切灾患的依处,又因为没有恒常、清净等性质,再加上可厌弃、空无的意义,所以称为苦。渴爱在业等各种缘和合时,成为苦生起的原因,所以称为集,也就是说“由于汇集而生起,苦从这而生”。因为能令苦不再生起、灭尽的缘,所以苦灭就是涅槃。而那个苦灭,由于以它为所缘而趣向、到达,又因为为了证得它而成为行道,所以被称为“趣向苦灭之道”,也就是出世间道。至于“谛”的含义,应当理解为真实、不颠倒、如实。正如经中广说:“比丘们,‘这是苦’,这是真实的、不虚妄的、不异于此的。”(《相应部》5.1090)
在这里,四种圣果以及与圣道相应之法,虽然已经超越了谛的范畴,但此处仅以开示道与涅槃的说法,也就已经显示了开示它们的意义。应当这样理解:因为无漏性具有同一特相,又因为它们是各自之因与所缘。巴利
Cattāri ariyasaccāni pakāsetīti catusaccappakāsano. Dukkhasamudayanirodhamaggavasena hi cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha, ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, ariyasaccāni. Katamāni cattāri? Dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhasamudayaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasacca’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1083). Tattha tebhūmakā dhammā anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānatāya dhuvasubhādivirahena, kucchitatucchaṭṭhena ca dukkhaṃ nāma. Kammādivisesapaccayasamavāye dukkhuppattikāraṇabhāvena taṇhā samudayo nāma ‘‘samecca udeti dukkhaṃ imasmā’’ti katvā. Dukkhassa anuppādanirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodho nibbānaṃ. Taṃ pana dukkhanirodhaṃ ālambaṇakaraṇavasena gamanato pāpuṇanato, tadadhigamāya paṭipadābhāvato cāti ‘‘dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti lokuttaramaggo vuccati. Saccaṭṭho pana tesaṃ tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvato veditabbo. Vuttañhi ‘‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Ettha pana catunnaṃ ariyaphalānaṃ, ariyamaggasampayuttānañca saccavinissaṭabhāvepi idha magganibbānappakāsanatāvacaneneva tappakāsanatthampi vuttaṃ hoti, anāsavabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā taṃtaṃhetukavisayabhāvato cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在这里,用“无上”和“开示四圣谛者”这些词,是在显示世尊与心等四种法的教导相契合的殊胜功德,因为不具备这种功德的人,不可能有这种教导能力。或者,用“无上”这个词,是在表明四种法的不变异性。而用“开示四圣谛者”这个词,则是在显示:那些世尊为了成熟所教化众生而宣说的法,并不是这里所指的;只有那些已成熟众生应当现证的苦等四种法,才是以应当指示的意义而在此处所指的。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘niruttaro catusaccappakāsano’’ti imehi bhagavato cittādicatubbidhadhammadesanānukūlaguṇavisesaṃ dasseti atathāvidhassa taṃdesanāsāmatthiyāyogato. Atha vā ‘‘niruttaro’’ti vacanena catubbidhadhammassa anaññathattaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Catusaccappakāsano’’ti pana iminā ye te dhammā bhagavatā vineyyaparipācanatthaṃ desitā, na te idha adhippetā. Ye pana paripācitehi tehi abhisametabbavasena dukkhādayo catubbidhā vuttā, teyeva uddisitabbatthena adhippetāti dasseti.
像这样把四种法简要地指示出来之后,现在为了详细解释,就开始了“其中,心”等解说。“其中”就是指心等这些法当中。对对象的认知就是心——也就是对被称为对象的所缘的认知、了知,这就是心。通过这个,说明了心是依所缘而活动的、是无常的、不是造作者。因为用“认知对象”来界定心,就显示了它依那个所缘而活动;而说明它只在对向所缘时才生起,就显示了无常性。通过状态说明,则因为只显示认知本身,就显示了非造作者性。因为这只是依缘而运转,也就是所谓的自性法。这样一来,一切心和心所法,从直接的角度来说,都只是状态的形成。至于“思考所以是心,以这个心游走所以是伺”等,以作者和工具的方式所作的词源解释,应当知道那是迂回的说法。因为在各自的作用中,把法的自主性赋予它而成为作者,随顺它而把相应法的集合赋予作者性而成为工具,这只是迂回地成立。举这个譬喻,应当知道是为了说明:除了法自性之外,并没有别的作者等。巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhepato cattāro dhamme uddisitvā idāni uddeso nāma niddesatthāya hotīti yathāuddiṭṭhadhamme niddisituṃ ‘‘tattha citta’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu cittādīsu dhammesu. Visayavijānanaṃ cittanti yaṃ visayasaṅkhātassa ārammaṇassa vijānanaṃ upaladdhi, taṃ cittanti attho. Iminā pana cittassa ārammaṇapaṭibaddhavuttitaṃ, aniccataṃ, akārakatañca dīpeti. ‘‘Visayavijānana’’nti hi ārammaṇena cittaṃ upalakkhento tassa tadāyattavuttitaṃ, taṃdīpanena ca tadabhimukhakāleyeva uppattidīpanato aniccabhāvañca dīpeti. Bhāvaniddesena pana vijānanamattadīpanato akārakabhāvaṃ. Yathāpaccayañhi pavattimattamevetaṃ, yadidaṃ sabhāvadhammo nāmāti. Evañca katvā sabbesampi cittacetasikadhammānaṃ bhāvasādhanameva nippariyāyato labbhati. Yaṃ pana ‘‘cintetīti cittaṃ, tena cittaṃ vicaratīti vicāro’’tiādinā kattukaraṇavasena nibbacanaṃ vuccati, taṃ pariyāyakathananti veditabbaṃ. Sakasakakiccesu hi dhammānaṃ attappadhānatāsamāropanena kattubhāvo, tadanukūlabhāvena taṃsampayuttadhammasamūhe kattubhāvasamāropanena karaṇattañca pariyāyatova labbhatīti. Tathā nidassanaṃ pana dhammasabhāvato aññassa kattādino abhāvaparidīpanatthanti veditabbaṃ.
“了知境”这一说法,已经用来说明心的特相是获取所缘。现在要讲它的作用等。心以“先行”为作用,以“连接”为现起,以名色为近因。当心到达根门,让那个所缘变得明显时,心就是先行者、前导者。因为透过眼门应当看到的色所缘,正是由心了知……乃至透过意门应当认知的法所缘,也正是由心了知。就像守城人坐在城中央的十字路口,观察来来往往的人:“这是本地人,这是外来人。”应当这样理解这个譬喻。因此,到达根门后,以令彼所缘明显的作用而走在前头,这就是“先行作用”。后后生起的心,让前前的心无间隔地相续,像连接起来一样现起,进入执取的状态,这就是“连接现起”。在五蕴有中,它的近因确定是名色;在四蕴有中,只有名是近因,所以也是“名色近因”。至于特相等之间的差别,应按下文将要讲述的方式来了知。因为在“色分别”处将会说:巴利
‘‘Visayavijānana’’nti ca etena cittassa ārammaṇūpaladdhilakkhaṇatā vuttāti idānissa rasādīni vuccanti. Pubbaṅgamarasañhi cittaṃ sandhānapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ nāmarūpapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Dvāraṃ patvā tadārammaṇañhi vibhāvanaṭṭhena cittaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ purecārikaṃ. Tathā hi cakkhudvārena daṭṭhabbaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ citteneva jānāti…pe… manodvārena viññātabbaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ citteneva jānāti. Yathā hi nagaraguttiko nagaramajjhe siṅghāṭake nisīditvā ‘‘ayaṃ nevāsiko, ayaṃ āgantuko’’ti āgatāgataṃ janaṃ upadhāreti, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmā dvāraṃ patvā tadārammaṇaṃ vibhāvanaṭṭhena purecārikanti pubbaṅgamarasaṃ. Pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ uppajjamānaṃ purimaṃ purimaṃ nirantaraṃ katvā sandahamānamiva upaṭṭhāti, gahaṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti sandhānapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Pañcavokāre panassa niyamato nāmarūpaṃ, catuvokārabhave nāmameva padaṭṭhānanti nāmarūpapadaṭṭhānañca hoti. Nānattaṃ pana lakkhaṇādīnaṃ upari vakkhamānanayena veditabbaṃ. Vakkhati hi rūpaparicchede –
共相或自性,被认为是诸法的相。
它的作用或它的成就,被解释为“味”。
果报,或者现起,又或者是现起的方式;
不过,凡是近因,它就叫做足处。巴利
‘‘Sāmaññaṃ vā sabhāvo vā, dhammānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ mataṃ; Kiccaṃ vā tassa sampatti, rasoti paridīpito. ‘‘Phalaṃ vā paccupaṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhānanayopi vā; Āsannakāraṇaṃ yaṃ tu, taṃ padaṭṭhānasaññita’’nti. (abhidha. 633-634);
无论在哪里说到特相等,那里就应该用同样的方法来了知它们的多样性。巴利
Yattha yattha pana lakkhaṇādīni vuccanti, tattha tattha imināva nayena tesaṃ nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
通过了解词义而已经清楚心的一般特征之后,再进一步解说心的分类,就会更加清楚。所以,首先从了解词义入手最为合适。于是,出于想要宣说的意愿,他问道:“那么,它的词义是什么?”
因为提问有五种:未见阐明问、已见对证问、断疑问、同意问、欲说问。
其中,对于未知、未见的事,为了知道它、看见它而提问,这叫未见阐明问。对于已经知道、已经看见的事,为了和其他智者对证而提问,这叫已见对证问。本性就容易陷入疑惑的人,为了断除自己的疑惑而提问,这叫断疑问。比如“比丘们,你们认为色是常还是无常?”“是无常,尊者。”“那么,无常的东西是苦还是乐?”像这样,为了获得认同而提问,这叫同意问。再比如“比丘们,有四种念处。是哪四种?”像这样,为了宣说各种法而提问,这叫欲说问。巴利
Vacanatthavijānanena viditacittasāmaññassa uttari cittavibhāgo vuccamāno sobheyyāti vacanatthavijānanameva tāva ādimhi yuttataranti taṃ tāva kathetukamyatāya pucchati ‘‘tassa pana ko vacanattho’’ti. Pañcavidhā hi pucchā – (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.449; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.1; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170) adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā vimaticchedanāpucchā anumatipucchā kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tattha yaṃ aññātaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya pañhākaraṇaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā nāma. Yaṃ pana ñātaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, tassa aññehi paṇḍitehi saṃsandanatthāya pañhākaraṇaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā nāma. Pakatiyā pana saṃsayapakkhandanassa attano saṃsayasamugghāṭanatthaṃ pañhākaraṇaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā nāma. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vāti? Aniccaṃ, bhante. Yaṃ panāniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.79; mahāva. 21) anumatiggahaṇatthaṃ pañhākaraṇaṃ anumatipucchā nāma. ‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.373; saṃ. ni. 5.402-404) pana taṃtaṃdhammānaṃ desanādhippāyena pañhākaraṇaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā nāma.
在这五种问里,前三种对老师们来说并不成立。因为他们并非为了造论而着手之后,现在才阐明未见之义、对证已见之义,或者陷入疑惑;因为他们在造论时,必定是先澄清了那些之后才投入的。后两种则成立。在这两者当中,这里是“想说而问”。另外,老师们在提出责难时,会设想另一位责难者,然后依他的话语来提出。因此,从这个角度说,这里也可以有“阐明未见问”和“断疑问”,应当这样理解。“它的”:是指“心”这个词的。因为心被理解时,表达它的词也由于伴随关系而一并被理解,所以这里用“它”来指代。不过,有些人把它解释为“那个心的”,这与“它的语义是什么”这句话不相符,因为对心不可能提出“它的语义是什么”这样的问题。巴利
Tāsu purimā tisso ācariyānaṃ na sambhavanti. Na hi te ganthakaraṇatthāya ārabhitvā idāni adiṭṭhaṃ jotenti, diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandenti, saṃsayaṃ vā pakkhandanti tabbisodhanapubbakameva ganthakaraṇe abhinivesanato. Itarā pana dve sambhavanti. Tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Apica codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpentā ācariyā aññaṃ codakaṃ parikappetvā tassa vacanavasena samuṭṭhāpentīti taṃvasenettha adiṭṭhajotanāvimaticchedanāpucchāpi labbhantevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassāti tassa citta-saddassa. Citte hi adhigate tassa vācako saddopi sahacariyato adhigatova hotīti tassa idha ta-saddena pariggaho. Keci pana ‘‘tassa cittassā’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, taṃ ‘‘tassa ko vacanattho’’ti iminā na sameti. Na hi cittassa ‘‘ko vacanattho’’ti pucchā sambhavatīti.
现在,为了回答前面所问的问题,先作出“将说”的承诺,然后以“以总摄一切的方式”等语句开始回答。其中,“以总摄一切的方式”意思是:从最低层的眼识等开始,因为这一切都具有了知所缘的自性,所以是以总摄它们全部的方式来说的,而不是像后面将要解释的词源说明那样,按各自获得的方式来处理。“思惟”就是了知。或者,因为依它而思惟、以它为行境,所以叫“心”。由于把作者的身份归属于与心相应的诸法,心才获得了工具格的意义。先以总摄一切的方式显示了含义之后,现在为了也按各自获得的方式来说明,所以说了“或者,它积累自己的相续”等话。因为“心”这个词通用于一切心,所以无论在什么情况下、以什么方式能得到它的含义,就应在那里、以那种方式去理解。然而,对于某种心,如果得不到上面所说的那种特殊含义,就应当知道它是依惯例而称为“心”。就像用竹篾等做成的东西,因为和棕榈叶做成的相似,依惯例用语就只被称为“棕榈扇”一样。“自己的相续”就是自身的相续,意思是速行心的相续。因为“自己”这个词是相对于他人而言的,所以以相似方式生起的速行心相续,就叫作“自己的相续”。它积累这个,也就是把它堆聚起来,这个意思应当依数数修习的速行心来理解。因为那些先前生起的速行心,对后来生起的速行心成为习行缘,使自己的速行心相续变得熟练有力,所以说它们“积累”。“或者”这个词,是用来表示另一种不是总摄一切的解释。“也”这个词,是用来把动作合并在一起。或者,“以总摄一切的方式”这个说法在这里也有关联,因此如果认为“这也是以总摄一切的方式说的”,那么“自己的相续”中,“自己”这个词是对“识”这个词而说的,由于它是在说自己的含义,所以依它而指心的相续。因为依无间缘等诸缘,心的相续得以不间断地生起,所以一切心生起都叫作积累心的相续。在这个解释中,“或者”这个词是用来表示动作的另一种可能,“也”这个词则是为了把“心”这个词拉进来理解。而在前一种解释中,“心”这个词应当从上下文主题中直接理解。巴利
Idāni yathāpucchitamatthaṃ vissajjetuṃ ‘‘vuccate’’ti tāva paṭiññaṃ katvā ‘‘sabbasaṅgāhakavasenā’’tiādinā vissajjanamāraddhaṃ. Tattha sabbasaṅgāhakavasenāti heṭṭhimantato cakkhuviññāṇādayo upādāya sabbesaṃ ārammaṇavijānanasabhāvattā tesaṃ sabbesameva saṅgāhakavasena, na pana vakkhamānanibbacanesu viya yathālābhavasenāti attho. Cintetīti vijānāti. Cintenti tena gocaranti vā cittaṃ. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ kattutāsamāropanena hissa karaṇabhāvo labbhati. Sabbasaṅgāhakavasena tāva atthaṃ dassetvā idāni yathālābhavasenapi dassetuṃ ‘‘attasantānaṃ vā cinotītipī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbacittasādhāraṇattā hi citta-saddassa yattha yattha yathā yathā attho labbhati, tattha tattha tathā tathā gahetabbo. Yassa pana cittassa yathāvuttaatthaviseso na labbhati, taṃ ruḷhīvasena cittanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā kilañjādīhi katampi tālapaṇṇehi katasarikkhakatāya ruḷhīsaddena ‘‘tālavaṇṭa’’ntveva vuccatīti. Attasantānanti sakasantānaṃ, javanasantānanti attho. Atta-saddassa hi parapaccanīkavacanattā attano santānoti sadisavasena uppajjamāno javanasantāno vuccati. Taṃ cinoti rāsiṃ karotīti ayamattho sāsevanakānaṃ javanacittānaṃ vasena daṭṭhabbo. Tāni hi purejātāni pacchājātānaṃ āsevanapaccayā hutvā attano javanasantānassa paguṇabalavabhāvakaraṇena taṃ cinanti nāma. Vā-saddo asabbasaṅgāhakatthavikappane. Pi-saddo kiriyāsampiṇḍanatthe. Atha vā ‘‘sabbasaṅgāhakavasenā’’ti imassa idhāpi sambandho hotīti idampi sabbasaṅgāhakavasena vuttanti gayhamāne attasantānanti viññāṇavacanassa atta-saddassa sakatthavuttittāyeva taṃvasena cittasantānanti attho. Anantarādipaccayavasena hi cittasantānassa abbocchinnappavattikaraṇato sabbameva cittajātaṃ cittasantānaṃ cinoti nāma. Imasmiṃ panatthe vā-saddo kiriyāvikappanattho. Pi-saddo ‘‘citta’’nti imassa ākaḍḍhanatthoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimapakkhe pana cittanti adhikāratova gahetabbaṃ.
9 它使事物变得多样,或者它是多样造作的工具,所以叫“种种造作”;由此称为“种种造作”,意思是:它是种种心业等的造作工具。因为在世间中,任何属于心业等类别的变异技艺,这一切都是先以心思惟之后才造作的。因此,世尊说:“诸比丘,你们见过名为‘杂彩’的画作吗?”“是的,尊者。”“诸比丘,那个名为‘杂彩’的画作,也是以心所思惟的。”(相应部·3.100)这个含义可以在具有表色的三十二种心中得到。或者,有漏的善或不善心,由于造作种种趣等,所以以种种造作的意义而称为“心”。难道种种趣等不是依业而成就的吗?正如所说——巴利
9. Vicittaṃ karoti, vicittassa vā karaṇanti vicittakaraṇaṃ, tato vicittakaraṇā, vicittacittakammādīnaṃ karaṇatoti attho. Lokasmiñhi yaṃ kiñci cittakammādibhedaṃ vicittaṃ sippajātaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ citteneva cintetvā karīyatīti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ vo, bhikkhave , caraṇaṃ nāma cittanti? Evaṃ, bhante. Tampi kho, bhikkhave, caraṇaṃ nāma cittaṃ citteneva cintita’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.100). Svāyamattho saviññattikānaṃ bāttiṃsacittānamupalabbhati. Sāsavakusalākusalaṃ vā vicittagatiādikaraṇato vā vicittakaraṇaṭṭhena cittaṃ. Nanu ca vicittagatiādayo kammavasena nipphajjanti. Yathāha –
众生因为业的差别,才显现出趣向的差别:无足、两足、四足、多足,有色、无色,有想、无想、非想非非想。众生因为业的差别,才显现出受生的差别:高下、优劣、善趣恶趣。众生因为业的差别,才显现出自体的差别:美丑、善生恶生、相貌端正不端正。众生因为业的差别,才显现出世间法的差别:得与失、称与讥、誉与毁、乐与苦。巴利
‘‘Kammanānākaraṇaṃ paṭicca sattānaṃ gatiyā nānākaraṇaṃ paññāyati apadā dvipadā catuppadā bahuppadā rūpino arūpino saññino asaññino nevasaññīnāsaññino, kammanānākaraṇaṃ paṭicca sattānaṃ upapattiyā nānākaraṇaṃ paññāyati uccanīcatā hīnapaṇītatā sugataduggatatā, kammanānākaraṇaṃ paṭicca sattānaṃ attabhāve nānākaraṇaṃ paññāyati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇatā sujātadujjātatā susaṇṭhitadussaṇṭhitatā, kammanānākaraṇaṃ paṭicca sattānaṃ lokadhamme nānākaraṇaṃ paññāyati lābhālābhe yasāyase nindāpasaṃsāyaṃ sukhadukkhe’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1).
因此,由于种种趣等是由业的差别所产生的,所以它们是心。这里所说的“业”,是指作为心所法的思,以及贪等,而不是指心本身。那么,怎么能说心是种种趣等的造作者呢?回答说:因为业依赖于心,所以即使是由业所产生的结果,也可以说是由心所做的。就像被国王的士兵打败,就说是被敌国国王打败一样。或者说,“种种造作”就是它有着各种各样的造作。因为除了处于同一位置的情况之外,每一颗心都各自有结生等不同的作用;或者说,一切心都因为转向等作用而彼此不同,所以称为“种种造作”是合理的。在所有这些解释中,都应该像“色有”说成“色”那样,理解为省略了后面的词;或者以“心”的同义词和“种种”一词构成复合词;或者理解为省略了“vi”这个前缀。另外,“种种造作”是指能够让人知道心具有种种状态的因。因此,正因为它就是这“种种造作”,所以应当知道:它既是那种种状态的成就者,其自身也同样具有种种性。这样,由于造作的种种性而具有种种性,所以称为“心”。为了显示除了以造作的种种性而具有种种性之外,还以其自身的种种性而称为“心”,所以说“或者以自身的种种性”。在这里,因为善是一种,不善是另一种,无记又是一种;欲界是一种,色界等是另一种;有贪是一种,离贪是另一种;有嗔是一种,离嗔是另一种;有痴是一种,离痴是另一种;以色为所缘是一种,以声等为所缘是另一种;在以色为所缘中,以蓝色为所缘是一种,以黄色等为所缘是另一种。以声等为所缘的情况也依此类推。在所有这些当中,又有一种是低劣的,一种是中等的,一种是殊胜的;在低劣等当中,又有一种是以欲为主导的,一种是以心为主导的,一种是以精进为主导的,一种是以观照为主导的。如此,由于种类、地、相应、所缘、低劣、中等、殊胜、主导等种种差别,心具有种种不同的形态,因此,由于这种自身的种种性,它被称为“心”。巴利
Tasmā kammabhedanibbattattā gatiādīnaṃ cittatā. Kammanti ca cetasikadhammabhūtā cetanā, abhijjhādayo ca vuccanti, na cittanti. Kathaṃ cittassa vicittagatiādikaraṇanti? Vuccate – kammassa cittasannissitattā tannipphāditampi citteneva kataṃ hoti, yathā rājayodhena parājito satturaññā jitoti vuccati. Vicittaṃ karaṇamassāti vā vicittakaraṇaṃ. Tato ekaṭṭhānikavajjitañhi cittaṃ paccekaṃ paṭisandhādivicittakiriyavantatāya, sabbameva vā cittaṃ āvajjanādiaññamaññavisadisakiriyavantatāya vicittakaraṇaṃ yuttanti. Sabbavikappesupi ‘‘rūpabhavo rūpa’’ntiādīsu viya uttarapadalopo cittapariyāyena ca vicitta-saddena vā viggaho vi-saddalopo vā daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā ‘‘vicittakaraṇā’’ti idaṃ cittavicittabhāvassa ñāpakahetunidassanaṃ. Tena yasmā idaṃ vicittakaraṇaṃ, tasmā tassa vicittassa nipphādakaṃ sayampi tatheva vicittanti viññātabbanti evaṃ karaṇavicittatāya vicittattā cittanti attho. Ṭhapetvā taṃ karaṇavicittatāya vicittabhāvaṃ attano eva jātibhūmisampayogādivasena vicittatāya cittanti dassento āha ‘‘attano cittatāya vā’’ti. Tattha yasmā aññadeva kusalaṃ, aññaṃ akusalaṃ, aññaṃ abyākataṃ, aññaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ, aññaṃ rūpāvacarādibhedaṃ, aññaṃ sarāgaṃ, aññaṃ vītarāgaṃ, aññaṃ sadosaṃ, aññaṃ vītadosaṃ, aññaṃ samohaṃ, aññaṃ vītamohaṃ, aññaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ, aññaṃ saddādiārammaṇaṃ, rūpārammaṇesu ca aññaṃ nīlārammaṇaṃ, aññaṃ pītādiārammaṇaṃ. Evaṃ saddārammaṇādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ. Sabbesu ceva tesu aññaṃ hīnaṃ, aññaṃ majjhimaṃ, aññaṃ paṇītaṃ, hīnādīsu ca aññaṃ chandādhipateyyaṃ, aññaṃ cittādhipateyyaṃ, aññaṃ vīriyādhipateyyaṃ, aññaṃ vīmaṃsādhipateyyanti evamādinā jātibhūmisampayuttaārammaṇahīnamajjhimapaṇītaadhipatiādīnaṃ vasena vicittamanekappakāraṃ, tasmā imāya attavicittatāya vā cittanti vuccatīti.
当然,这里单一的心并不能说就是“种种心”;不过,因为它包含在种种心之中,所以对其中任何一个心,都可以按整体的习惯说法而说它是“心”,就像看见山、河、海的一部分,就说“看见了山”“看见了河”“看见了海”一样;也像与每一个心相应的受等法,按聚集的意义,以“蕴”的施设而说“受蕴”“想蕴”等一样。再者,这里的异熟识,因为被业和烦恼所积集,所以称为“心”。它是由伴随烦恼的业作为果报而生起的,被那些业和烦恼所积集,因此名为“心”。姑且说这是就世间异熟而言,那么到了出世间又怎么说呢?回答说:就像“哪些法是善?当出世间善心生起时……那时,无明缘行”等等所说的那样,因为这也表明圣道思惟依止于无明,所以出世间善法也有随眠和依止,因此由它所产生的异熟,也可以有“被业和烦恼所积集”这种说法。或者,心就是“保护所积集者”的意思。因为由业等所积集的自体,在识灭去时,就说它死了。正如所说:巴利
Kāmañcettha ekameva cittaṃ evaṃ vicittaṃ nāma na hoti, vicittānaṃ pana antogadhattā etesu yaṃ kiñci ekampi vicittatāya cittanti vattuṃ vaṭṭati samudāyavohārena avayavassāpi vohariyamānattā yathā pabbatanadīsamuddādīnamekadesā diṭṭhā pabbatādayo diṭṭhāti, yathā ca ekekacittasampayuttāpi vedanādayo rāsaṭṭhena khandhavohārena ‘‘vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho’’tiādinā vuccanti. Apicettha vipākaviññāṇaṃ kammakilesehi citanti cittaṃ, taṃ kilesasahāyena kammunā phalabhāvena nibbattitaṃ tehi citaṃ nāma hoti. Hotu tāvidaṃ lokiyavipākaṃ sandhāya, lokuttaraṃ pana patvā kathanti? Vuccate – ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā, yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti…pe… tasmiṃ samaye avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā ariyamaggacetanāyapi avijjūpanissayabhāvassa pakāsitattā lokuttarakusalassāpi anusayā upanissayā hontīti tannibbattitassa vipākassa kammakilesasañcitatāpariyāyo labbhatīti. Citaṃ tāyatīti vā cittaṃ. Kammādisañcitopi hi attabhāvo viññāṇūparame matoti vuccati. Yathāha –
寿命、暖热和识,当它们舍弃这个身体的时候;
被丢弃后,那时它就躺着,像一块无用的朽木。巴利
‘‘Āyu usmā ca viññāṇaṃ, yadā kāyaṃ jahantimaṃ; Appaviddho tadā seti, niratthaṃva kaliṅgara’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 3.95);
不过,这个“心”这个词虽然出现在多种含义中。比如在“质多居士”这类说法里,它是名称施设,也就是“心的称呼”。在“一切世间以他心为无心”这类说法里,它指识。在“诸比丘,我不见有其他一类法像这样心……”这类说法里,它指种种,也就是种种差别。在“行名为心”这类说法里,它指心所作。但在这里,因为是在说明四种法,按照论典的脉络,应当看作与前面所说文义相符的“识”这个词同义;这里是指在此四法指示之处。为了显示这个意思,所以说“在施设中亦”等。“被了知,因此是施设”,即那名称施设之义。“心”是一个居士的名字。“亦”一词有统摄下文之义。在“识”中,即在有异熟、无异熟之别的心中。那确实以了知之义被称为“识”。如说:“诸比丘,了知故名为识,因此名为识。” “心的称呼”即心的言说。 “应当看作”即应当了知。 “这里”即在说明这四种法之处。 “由智者”即由了知者,意思是“由阿毗达磨论师”。巴利
So panāyaṃ citta-saddo kiñcāpi anekatthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘citto ca gahapatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 2.133; 4.176) paññattiyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Sabbo loko paracittena acitto’’tiādīsu viññāṇe. ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekanikāyampi samanupassāmi, evaṃ citta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.100) vicitte, nānappakāreti attho. ‘‘Caraṇaṃ nāma citta’’ntiādīsu cittakammake. Idha pana catubbidhadhamme niddesato pakaraṇavasena yathāvuttavacanatthayutto viññāṇavacanova daṭṭhabboti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘paññattiyampī’’tiādi . Paññāpīyati etāyāti paññatti, tassaṃ nāmapaññattiyanti attho. Cittoti hi ekassa gahapatino nāmaṃ. Pi-saddo vakkhamānasampiṇḍanattho. Viññāṇeti savipākāvipākabhede citte. Tañhi vijānanaṭṭhena ‘‘viññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘vijānātīti kho, bhikkhave, viññāṇaṃ, tasmā viññāṇanti vuccatī’’ti. Cittasammutīti cittavohāro. Daṭṭhabbāti viññātabbā. Idhāti imasmiṃ catubbidhadhammaniddesaṭṭhāne. Viññunāti vijānatā, ābhidhammikenāti attho.
有分别的诸法,要显示它们的自性之显示,离开分别就无法做到。为了显示心的分别,所以开始说“有所缘”等语。其中,依着它而生起,所以叫所缘,也就是缘、境。正如“魔得到所缘,魔得到机会”等句中,缘被称为“所缘”;在“出入息为相,一心无所缘”等句中,则是境。但在这里两者都适用,因为一切心都带有缘和境。与所缘一起生起,不离开所缘故,叫有所缘。这里按照以状态(性)为主的说明方式,用“有所缘”这个词来说有所缘性,就像“此亦于佛是殊胜宝”等句中,宝、我、我所等状态由宝等词说出,因此是有所缘性之义。其他处也应随其所应而见。一种类,即一部门之义。巴利
Vibhāgavantānaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvavibhāvanaṃ vibhāgena vinā na hotīti cittassa vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sārammaṇato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ālambanti taṃ nissāya pavattantīti ārammaṇaṃ, paccayo, gocaro ca. Tathā hi ‘‘labhati māro ārammaṇaṃ, labhati māro otāra’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80) paccayo ‘‘ārammaṇa’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Nimittaṃ assāsapassāsā, anārammaṇamekacittassā’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.159) gocaro. Idha pana ubhayampi vaṭṭati sabbasseva cittassa sappaccayasagocarattā. Saha ārammaṇena vattati tadavinābhāvatoti sārammaṇaṃ. Bhāvappadhānaniddesavasena cettha sārammaṇabhāvo sārammaṇa-saddena vutto yathā ‘‘idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ (khu. pā. 6.3). Cakkhu suññaṃ attena vā attaniyena vā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.85) ratanaattattaniyādibhāvo ratanādīhi saddehīti, tato sārammaṇabhāvatoti attho. Evamaññatthāpi yathānurūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekavidhanti ekappakāraṃ, ekakoṭṭhāsanti attho.
“有果报与无果报”这句话,是根据能生果报的自性存在或不存在来说的。因为“果报”这个词有两种用法:有时用在已经达到果报状态的无色法上,有时用在能生果报的自性上。比如在“果报法”这类说法里,它用在已经达到果报状态的无色法上;在“果报法法”这类说法里,它用在能生果报的自性上。但在这里,应当理解为能生果报的自性。否则的话,神通善等法就会被排除在“有果报”这个词之外。因为如果这里只取已经达到果报状态的法,认为凡是有这些法的就是有果报,其余的就是无果报,那么神通善,以及有时并非果报的现法受业等,还有修所断的不善,由于没有果报生起,就会被归入“无果报”这个词里。这样一来,因为后面要说“无果报的无记”,它们就会变成无记,但这并不是想要的结果,因为它们只在善和不善的说明中被提到。但如果取能生果报的自性,这种自性在尚未断除渴爱随眠的相续中,就是有作意地运作的,由于渴爱随眠在那些人身上还存在,所以即使果报还没有生起,“有果报”这个词的涵盖也能成立,不会出现任何与所愿相违的过失。至于神通善等为什么是无果报,以及这里应当作的判定,这一切我们都会在各自出现的地方说明。巴利
Savipākāvipākatoti vipākuppādanasabhāvassa vijjamānāvijjamānabhāvato. Vipāka-saddo hi dvīsu atthesu pavattati. Katthaci vipakkabhāvamāpannesu arūpadhammesu, katthaci vipākuppādanasabhāve . Tathā hesa ‘‘vipākā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 3) vipakkabhāvamāpannesu arūpadhammesu pavattati. ‘‘Vipākadhammadhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 3) vipākuppādanasabhāve. Idha pana vipākuppādanasabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Itarathā hi abhiññākusalādīnaṃ savipāka-pade asaṅgahitabhāvāpatti siyā. Tathā hi yadi vipakkabhāvamāpannā eva dhammā idha gahitā siyuṃ, te yassa santi, taṃ savipākamitaramavipākanti abhiññākusalassa ceva kadāci avipākassa diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādikammassa bhāvanāyapahātabbākusalassa ca vipākuppattiyā abhāvato avipāka-padasaṅgaho siyā, evañca sati ‘‘avipākaṃ abyākata’’nti vakkhamānattā nesaṃ abyākatabhāvo āpajjati, na cetamiṭṭhaṃ kusalākusalaniddeseyeva tesaṃ niddesato. Vipākuppādanasabhāve pana gahite taṃsabhāvo nāma anupacchinnāvijjamānataṇhānusayasmiṃ santāne sabyāpārappavatti evāti tassā tesupi atthitāya asatipi vipākuppādane savipāka-padasaṅgaho siddhoti na koci iṭṭhavighāto āpajjati. Yena pana kāraṇena abhiññākusalādikamavipākaṃ, yo cettha vattabbo vinicchayo, taṃ sabbaṃ tassa tassa āgataṭṭhāneyeva dassayissāma.
那么,这里要问:哪一个是有果报的,哪一个是没有果报的?针对这个问难,论师说“其中,有果报的……”等等。无记,按果报心和唯作心来分,有两种。在它们当中,果报心就像镜面上的面容影像一样,因为没有主动造作的力量,所以没有能力产生果报。而在唯作心里,那种只存在于漏尽者相续中、确定有十八种的识,因为它是在已经断除了存在之根的相续中生起的,所以就像根已断掉的藤蔓开的花一样,不能结出果实。至于两种转向心,即使是在还没有断除存在之根的相续中生起,也因为不常习行的缘故而力量薄弱,就像空花一样,不能成为种子,所以也是不结果实的。这样一来,这全部都是无记,因为不具备产生果报的资格,所以说为“没有果报的无记”。所谓“种类”,就是在这里,即使是不相似者也以相似的形态生起,所以叫“种类”,也就是相同的形态。善、不善、无记的种类,就是善、不善、无记的类别。按它的分类,有三种:善、不善、无记。关于词义提问的用意,前面已经说过了。巴利
Katamaṃ panettha savipākaṃ, katamamavipākanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha savipāka’’ntiādi. Abyākatanti vipākakiriyāvasena duvidhamabyākataṃ. Tesu vipākacittaṃ tāva ādāsatale mukhanimittaṃ viya nirussāhattā vipākuppādane asamatthaṃ. Kiriyacittesu ca yadetaṃ khīṇāsavasantāneyeva niyatamaṭṭhārasavidhaṃ viññāṇaṃ, taṃ upacchinnabhavamūlāya santatiyaṃ pavattatīti samucchinnamūlāya latāya pupphaṃ viya phaladāyī na hoti. Āvajjanadvayaṃ pana anupacchinnabhavamūlepi santāne pavattamānaṃ anāsevanabhāvena dubbalattā moghapupphamiva bījabhāve asamatthaṃ aphalameva. Iti sabbametaṃ abyākataṃ vipākārahatābhāvato avipākanti vuttaṃ ‘‘avipākaṃ abyākata’’nti. Jāyanti ettha asadisāpi sadisākārāti jāti, samānākāro, kusalākusalābyākatānaṃ jāti kusalākusalābyākatajāti, tassā bhedato tividhaṃ kusalaṃ akusalaṃ abyākatanti. Vacanatthapucchāya payojanaṃ vuttameva.
10 “可厌弃的”等是回答。其中,“可厌弃的”指应受谴责的,意思是说,就像不净之物一样,是会被市民和智者呵责的诸恶法。“割断”是因为伤害、因为去除。因为善法随着相应的情况,以彼分断等方式舍弃不善法时,就伤害它们、去除它们,所以这样说。或者,“割断”是因为防护、因为遮蔽。因为依靠善法,制止不善法的生起,并使它们成为不再生起的法,所以在眼等六门中,不善法的生起被防护、被封闭。“恶”是指:由于与贪等不净相应,以及由于以种种苦为因,以可厌弃的方式,由于未被断除的状态,在相续中躺卧、生起,所以是恶法,即恶法。或者,“恶”是指:对于可厌弃的杀生等有罪法,由于它们躺卧、藏伏、锐利,所以贪、瞋等是“恶”。因为由于瞋等的力量,思变得锐利,杀生等就有大罪。以它们的“盐”即切断、随宜舍弃,是这个意思。以“恶”即由于可厌弃者的躺卧、使变薄,或使终结,而获得“恶”之名的智。由于可得,即由于可取,由于俱生和亲依止的状态,应在相续中生起。因为智使三因善法以俱生的状态和亲依止的状态,使二因善法仅以亲依止的状态在相续中生起。这样作之后,以一切善法共通的方式,说“善巧所生之义即善之义”。或者,“以恶”是由于词性为阳性,是单数表述,但意思是“以诸恶”。因为以福业事生起的信等诸根,按照所说的方法,被称为“诸恶”,由于可得,按照所说的方法应使它们生起。此外在这里——巴利
10.‘‘Kucchitāna’’ntiādi vissajjanaṃ. Tattha kucchitānanti ninditānaṃ, asuci viya nāgarikehi viññūhi garahitabbānaṃ pāpadhammānanti attho. Salanatoti hiṃsanato, apanayanato vā. Kusalañhi yathānurūpaṃ tadaṅgādivasena akusaladhamme pajahantaṃ te hiṃsati, apanayatīti vā vuccati. Atha vā salanato saṃvaraṇato, pidahanatoti attho. Kusaladhammavasena hi akusalappavattinivāraṇena, appavattidhammatāpādanena ca manacchaṭṭhesu dvāresu appavattiyā saṃvutā pihitā honti. Kusānanti rāgādiasucisampayogena nānāvidhadukkhahetutāya ca kucchitenākārena appahīnabhāvena santāne sayanti pavattantīti kusā, pāpadhammā. Atha vā kucchitānaṃ pāṇātipātādīnaṃ sāvajjadhammānaṃ sānato nisānato tejanato kusā, dosalobhādayo. Dosādīnañhi vasena cetanāya tikkhabhāvappattiyā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ mahāsāvajjatāti. Tesaṃ lavanena chindanena yathānurūpaṃ pajahanenāti attho. Kusenāti kucchitānaṃ sānato tanukaraṇato, osānakaraṇato vā ‘‘kusā’’ti laddhanāmena ñāṇena. Lātabbattāti ādātabbattā, sahajātaupanissayabhāvena santāne pavattetabbattā. Ñāṇañhi tihetukakusalaṃ sahajātabhāvena ceva upanissayabhāvena ca, duhetukakusalaṃ upanissayabhāveneva santāne pavatteti. Evañca katvā kosallasambhūtaṭṭho kusalaṭṭhoti sabbakusalānaṃ sādhāraṇavasena attho vuccati. Atha vā kusenāti jātisaddatāya ekavacananiddeso, kusehīti pana attho. Puññakiriyāvasena hi pavattāni saddhādīni indriyāni yathāvuttanayena ‘‘kusānī’’ti vuccanti, tehi lātabbattā vuttanayena pavattetabbattā. Apicettha –
就像库沙草一样割断,或者像库沙草一样割断。
善法之所以名为善,是因为它摧毁恶,也刈割恶。巴利
‘‘Kuso viya lunātīti, kusā viya lunāti vā; Kusalaṃ kuṃ saletīti, lunāti kusamiccapī’’ti.
在这里,就像抓住库沙草会割伤手和脚两边一样,这个善法也从已生和未生两方面割断、斩断烦恼的阵营,正如所说的正勤:“为了不让未生的恶不善法生起,而生起意欲、努力……为了断除已生的……”因此,它像库沙草一样割断,所以是“善”。关于“像割断恶一样割断”:这里“ku”指地,因为它是诸法的立足处,所以这里以色蕴和非色蕴来说明与之相似。贪等烦恼,因为现在和未来都烧尽、毁坏作为自己依止处的那些蕴,所以称为“恶”;像那些恶一样,它割断、斩断自己的依止处,所以是“善”。因为由精勤所成就的善法,通过使色法与非色法彻底不再生起而完全断除它们,并到达无余涅槃界。按照前面所说的方式,对于获得“ku”这个名字的色蕴和非色蕴,由于动摇、去除,所以是“动摇ku”。至于“它割断恶”:这里“恶”是指污秽者的安住处,也就是身体;它按照前面所说的方式割断它,所以是“善”。巴利
Tattha yathā kuso gahito ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthapadesaṃ lunāti, evamidampi uppannānuppannavasena ubhayabhāgagataṃ kilesapakkhaṃ lunāti chindati, seyyathāpi – ‘‘anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya chandaṃ janeti, vāyamati, uppannānaṃ…pe… pahānāyā’’ti āgataṃ sammappadhānaṃ. Tasmā kuso viya lunātīti kusalaṃ. Kusā viya lunātīti ettha ‘‘ku’’iti bhūmi vuccati, dhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvena taṃsadisatāya idha rūpārūpakkhandho vutto. Attano nissayabhūtassa tassa etarahi, āyatiñca anudahanato vināsanato kuṃ sāyantīti kusā, rāgādayo, te viya attano nissayaṃ lunāti chindatīti kusalaṃ. Payogasampāditā hi kusaladhammā accantameva rūpārūpadhamme appavattikaraṇena samucchindanti anupādisesanibbānadhātupāpanatoti. Vuttanayena pana ‘‘ku’’nti laddhanāmassa rūpārūpakkhandhassa salanato apanayanato kuṃ saletīti kusalaṃ. Kusaṃ lunātīti pana kucchitā ettha sayantīti kuso, kāyo, taṃ lunāti yathāvuttavasenevāti kusalaṃ.
11 现在,为了显示“善”这个字的含义,而说“善字见于‘机巧’等义”。其中,在“你善巧于战车的各个大小部件”(中部2.87)、“善巧于舞蹈与歌唱”、“女子们训练有素而机巧”(本生2.22.94)等句中,“善”字表示“机巧”;机巧的同义词,就是娴熟。在“不知尊者是否安好、是否无病”(本生1.15.146;2.20.129)等句中,“善”字表示“健康”。在“尊者,什么样的身行是善的?大王,凡是无过失的身行”(中部2.361),以及“再者,尊者,这是无上的——世尊依善法而说法”(长部3.145)等句中,“善”字表示“无过失”。在“因受持善法,这福德便增长”(长部3.80),以及“由于造作、积累善业”(法聚论431)等句中,“善”字表示“可意的果报”。“无过失等”:指无过失和可意果报;说“等”字,是因为与下文将要讲述的特征相符,而不是因为健康这个含义不成立——因为不存在烦恼之病,所以“善”就是健康。巴利
11. Idāni kusala-saddassa atthuddhāradassanatthamāha ‘‘cheke kusala-saddoya’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘kusalo tvaṃ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ (ma. ni. 2.87), kusalānaccagītassa, sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.94) cheke diṭṭho, chekapariyāyo pavīṇatthoti attho. ‘‘Kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ, kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129) ārogye. ‘‘Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro kusalo? Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anavajjo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.361) ca ‘‘aparaṃ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṃ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti kusalesu dhammesū’’ti (dī. ni. 3.145) ca evamādīsu anavajje. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ vaḍḍhati (dī. ni. 3.80), kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā’’ti (dha. sa. 431) ca ādīsu iṭṭhavipāke. Anavajjādiketi anavajjaiṭṭhavipāke, ‘‘anavajjādike’’ti ca attanā vakkhamānalakkhaṇassa anurūpattā vuttaṃ, na pana ārogyatthassa asambhavato. Kilesarogassa hi abhāvato kusalaṃ ārogyaṃ hoti.
贪等法是过失,谁没有这些过失,谁就是无过失;谁的果报是可意的,由四种蕴组成,谁就是可意果报。而他的可意果报性,应当从他自己具有这样的性质来看,并不是只因为他必定会产生可意果报。以它来标记,所以叫特征。既无过失又是可意果报,所以叫无过失可意果报。它具有这种特征,所以叫无过失可意果报的特征。巴利
Vajjā rāgādayo, te yassa na santi, taṃ anavajjaṃ, iṭṭho vipāko catukkhandhasaṅkhāto yassa, taṃ iṭṭhavipākaṃ, iṭṭhavipākatā cassa taṃsabhāvavantatāya daṭṭhabbā, na tassa avassaṃ iṭṭhavipākasambhavatoyeva, lakkhīyati anenāti lakkhaṇaṃ, anavajjañca taṃ iṭṭhavipākañcāti anavajjaiṭṭhavipākaṃ. Taṃ lakkhaṇamassāti anavajjaiṭṭhavipākalakkhaṇaṃ.
难道善不就是无过失、可意果报的吗?但按照所说的规则,也可能有不同于无过失可意果报的另一种善。因为一法不能自己就是自己的特征吧?这并没有错。因为根据“已了知的词义”和“未了知的词义”这两种本质上的区别,即使是同一个事物,也可以被设想为同时具有“能标记的特征”和“所标记的特征”。“无过失可意果报”是已了知的词义,“善”是未了知的词义。这样一来,通过已了知词义和未了知词义这两种本质的差别,对于具备这两者的同一个善,也可以设想出差别来,就像说“这人以前很机灵,现在更机灵了”一样,是根据功德上的差别和所依上的差别来设想的。因此,以已了知词义的本质作为特征,以未了知词义的本质作为所标记,在这样的差别设想中被把握时,就不会产生任何过失。巴利
Nanu ca kusalameva anavajjaiṭṭhavipākaṃ, vuttaniyāmena pana anavajjaiṭṭhavipākato aññaṃ kusalaṃ siyā. Na hi sayameva attano lakkhaṇanti sakkā vattunti? Nāyaṃ doso pariññātāpariññātavacanatthabhāvabhede ekassāpi lakkhitabbalakkhaṇabhāvaparikappanato. ‘‘Anavajjaiṭṭhavipāka’’nti hi pariññātavacanatthaṃ. ‘‘Kusala’’nti apariññātavacanatthaṃ. Evañca yena sabhāvena pariññātavacanatthassa saddassa attho hoti, yena ca apariññātavacanatthassa, tesaṃ pariññātāpariññātavacanatthasabhāvānaṃ bhedena taṃsamaṅgissa kusalassa ekassāpi bhedo parikappīyati yathā ‘‘pure bhavaṃ paṭu āsi, paṭutaro etarahī’’ti guṇabhedena, vatthubhedena ca parikappīyati, tasmā pariññātavacanatthabhāvena lakkhaṇaṃ, apariññātavacanatthabhāvena lakkhitabbanti evaṃ parikappitabhede pariggayhamāne na koci doso āpajjati.
或者,“被标记、被认定,所以叫‘相’”。它既无过失,又能带来可意的果报,兼具这两点,所以叫“无过失可意果报之相”。意思是:凡是成为无过失、可意果报而被认定的,那就是善。或者,“无过失”这个词说的是无过失的状态,“可意果报”这个词说的是可意果报的状态,所以,无过失且可意果报,合起来就是“无过失可意果报”。这东西以它为相,所以叫“无过失可意果报之相”——这是按工具格的意思,或者按业格的意思来说的:以“相”这个词,表示具有无过失可意果报的本质,或者表示应当通过无过失可意果报性来认定。那么,这里为什么要用两个词来涵盖呢?难道只用一个词就不能表达所要表达的意思吗?如果只说“无过失之相”,就像“尊者,然而这是另一种无上,即世尊在善法方面说法”等文句里那样,因为只说“无过失”,可能也会牵扯到无记法,所以“可意果报”这个词还是必须说;但如果只说“可意果报之相”,另一个词是不是就不必说了呢?因为无记法没有能力产生果报,不会涉及可意果报性,所以确实如此。用两个词,是为了以“无过失”这个词显示善法当下现行的安乐,以“可意果报”这个词显示异熟的安乐。因为“无过失”这个词是依它自身当下现行的本质来说它的相,另一个词则是依它在别的时节能产生异熟的能力来说。或者,前一个词是为了显示善法在意义上的清净,后一个词是为了显示它果报的清净。或者,前一个词是让善法从不善的自性中脱离出来,后一个词是让它从无记的自性中脱离出来。这样就不必再啰嗦了。在这里,通过“无过失……相”这样的说法,说的是善法的共相,因为无过失可意果报的本质是善这一类所共有的。也可以看作是不善法等所不共的自相。应当这样理解。巴利
Atha vā lakkhīyatīti lakkhaṇaṃ, anavajjaiṭṭhavipākañca taṃ lakkhaṇañcāti anavajjaiṭṭhavipākalakkhaṇaṃ, yaṃ anavajjaiṭṭhavipākaṃ hutvā lakkhīyati, taṃ kusalanti attho. Atha vā anavajja-saddena anavajjabhāvo vutto, iṭṭhavipākasaddena iṭṭhavipākabhāvo, tasmā anavajjo ca iṭṭhavipāko ca anavajjaiṭṭhavipākaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇametassāti karaṇatthe, kammatthe vā lakkhaṇa-saddena anavajjaiṭṭhavipākalakkhaṇanti anavajjaiṭṭhavipākasabhāvavantaṃ, anavajjaiṭṭhavipākabhāvena lakkhitabbaṃ vāti attho. Kiṃ panettha kāraṇaṃ padadvayapariggahena, nanu ekeneva padena adhippetatthasiddhi siyā. Kiñcāpi hi ‘‘anavajjalakkhaṇa’’nti vutte ‘‘aparaṃ pana, bhante, etadānuttariyaṃ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti kusalesu dhammesū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.145) viya vajjarahitattā abyākatassāpi pasaṅgo siyāti iṭṭhavipāka-padaṃ vattabbameva, ‘‘iṭṭhavipākalakkhaṇa’’nti pana vutte itaraṃ na vattabbaṃ abyākatassa vipākārahabhāvena iṭṭhavipākatāpasaṅgabhāvato? Saccametaṃ, anavajja-padena kusalassa pavattisukhataṃ, iṭṭhavipāka-padena ca vipākasukhataṃ dassetuṃ padadvayaṃ vuttaṃ. Anavajjapadañhi attano pavattisabhāvavasena lakkhaṇavacanaṃ, itaraṃ kālantare vipākuppādanasamatthatāvasenāti. Atha vā kusalassa atthavisuddhiṃ dassetuṃ purimapadaṃ vuttaṃ, parisuddhavipākataṃ dassetuṃ pacchimaṃ. Purimaṃ vā kusalassa akusalasabhāvato nivattanaṃ, pacchimaṃ abyākatasabhāvatoti alamatipapañcena. Ettha ca ‘‘anavajja…pe… lakkhaṇa’’nti vacanena kusalassa sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ anavajjaiṭṭhavipākasabhāvassa kusalajātiyā sādhāraṇattā. Akusalādīnamasādhāraṇabhāvena sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ vāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“破除不善的作用”,就是随其相应而断除不善的作用。因为善法分为欲界善、色无色界善、出世间善等不同种类,依次以彼分断、镇伏断、正断断的方式断除不善的一方。那么,彼分断等这些断除方式有什么差别呢?回答说:以布施等福行所摄的各种善支,断除相应的悭吝等不善支,这种断除就是彼分断,应当看作像灯光破除黑暗一样。因为欲界善法力量微弱,在它们自身住立的刹那所破除的不善,在它们离去之后,又会再次生起而重新现前。对种种盖法的镇伏,也就是以阻止它们生起的方式而断除,这叫镇伏断,应当看作像用罐子击水、把水面上的苔藻拨开一样。就像被强力罐击拨到远处的苔藻,即使罐子拿开了,由于那击打的冲力,也不会立刻重新覆盖过来;同样,被近行定和安止定所镇伏的欲贪等,即使在禅那不现行的时候,也由于那禅那的力量,不会立刻重新覆盖。使烦恼成为不再生起的法性,也就是以彻底断除的方式而断除,这叫正断断,应当看作像雷劈树木等,连根摧毁一样。因为被圣道正断的烦恼,即使以随眠的微弱形式,也不会在相续中生起。就像被一次生起的雷电连根摧毁的树木等,不会再生长;同样,即使只有一心刹那的圣道,仅凭它自身的生起,那些即使只以随眠形式存在的烦恼,也已经被彻底、完全地摧毁了。巴利
Akusalaviddhaṃsanarasanti yathānurūpaṃ akusalappajahanakiccaṃ. Kusalañhi parittamahaggatalokuttarabhedabhinnaṃ yathākkamaṃ tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedappahānavasena akusalapakkhaṃ pajahati. Atha tadaṅgādippahānānaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Vuccate – dānādipuññakiriyavatthugatena tena tena kusalaṅgena tassa tassa maccherādiakusalaṅgassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ, taṃ dīpālokena andhakāraviddhaṃsanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, kāmāvacarakusalānaṃ parittānubhāvatāya tehi attano ṭhitikkhaṇe viddhaṃsitānamakusalānaṃ tadapagame sati puna āgamena vottharaṇato. Tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanasaṅkhātaṃ pavattinivāraṇavasena pahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, taṃ ghaṭappahārena jalatale sevālaviyūhanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā hi balavatā ghaṭappahārena dūrīkataṃ sevālaṃ tasmiṃ apanītepi taṃpahāravegena sahasā na ottharati, evameva upacārappanābhedena jhānena vikkhambhitā kāmacchandādayo tadappavattikālepi tassa balena sahasā na ottharantīti. Anuppattidhammatāpādanasaṅkhātaṃ sammā ucchedavasena pahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ, taṃ pana asanisampātena rukkhādīnaṃ samūlaviddhaṃsanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi ariyamaggena samucchinnakilesā anusayamattakenāpi santāne pavattanti. Yathā pana ekavārappavattenapi indagginā saha mūlehi viddhaṃsitā rukkhādayo na puna viruhanti, evamevaṃ ekacittakkhaṇikenapi tena attano uppādamatteneva anusayamattaṭṭhāyinopi kilesā sabbena sabbaṃ viddhaṃsitāyeva honti.
清净就是净化,意思是脱离杂染之垢;它以这样的状态现起,所以叫清净现起,也就是说,它以清净的行相显现于修行者的智慧之前。巴利
Vodānaṃ visuddhi, saṃkilesamalavimuttīti attho, tathā hutvā paccupaṭṭhānamassāti vodānapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, parisuddhākārena yogino ñāṇassa upaṭṭhātīti vuttaṃ hoti.
前面已经按善法的无过失性和可爱果报的自性说明了它的相,又按作用、现起和近因说明了它的味与现起;接下来为了再从“对治过失”的角度说明相,并从“成就果报”的角度说明味等,所以说了“由于是对治过失”等话。其中,对诸过失的对治状态,就是“对治过失性”,由此而来。这就表明,“无过失相”里的“无”字是对治的意思,也因此排除了它属于无记的可能。否则,如果只是说它没有过失,或者说它不同于过失所以叫无过失,那么无记法也可能具有这种相,就会犯这个毛病。但说“由于是对治过失”时,因为善与不善之间,以所断和能断的关系,就像光明与黑暗一样,彼此直接相反,所以只有善由于是对治过失,才具有无过失相,不是别的法,这个道理就成立了。以清净状态为味,就是成就清净的状态,意思是以不被烦恼垢秽染污的方式生起。现起,就是被呈现、被引到面前,由因而呈现,或者依自己的因,以与之相连、面对的方式而现起;可爱的果报就是它的现起,所以叫可爱果报现起。巴利
Evaṃ kusalassa vajjarahitaiṭṭhavipākasabhāvehi lakkhaṇaṃ, kiccaupaṭṭhānākāravasena ca rasapaccupaṭṭhānāni vatvā puna vajjapaṭipakkhabhāvavasena ca lakkhaṇaṃ, sampattiphalavasena ca rasādikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vajjapaṭipakkhattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vajjānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvo vajjapaṭipakkhattaṃ, tato. Etena ‘‘anavajjalakkhaṇa’’nti ettha a-kāro paṭipakkhatthoti dasseti, tena panassa abyākatato nivattanaṃ kataṃ. Itarathā hi nāssa vajjaṃ, vajjato aññaṃ vā anavajjanti abyākatassāpi taṃlakkhaṇatāpasaṅgo siyā. ‘‘Vajjapaṭipakkhattā’’ti pana vutte yasmā kusalākusalānameva pahāyakappahātabbabhāvena ālokandhakārānaṃ viya aññamaññaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhāvo, tasmā kusalameva vajjapaṭipakkhattā anavajjalakkhaṇaṃ, na aññanti ayamattho siddho hoti. Vodānabhāvarasanti vodānabhāvasampattikaṃ, kilesamalehi asaṃkiliṭṭhabhāvena sampajjanakanti attho. Paccupaṭṭhāpīyati upanīyati kāraṇena, attano vā kāraṇaṃ paṭicca, tappaṭibaddhabhāvena paṭimukhaṃ vā upaṭṭhātīti paccupaṭṭhānaṃ, iṭṭho vipāko paccupaṭṭhānamassāti iṭṭhavipākapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
没有如理作意时,善法就生不起来;有如理作意时,善法就会生起,所以如理作意是善法的近因,因此说“如理作意是足处”。其中,以正确的方法、正确的方式作意,就是如理作意。从意义上看,对于还有随眠相续的人,在六门所缘境现前时,依靠住在适宜的地方等条件具足,以成为善法之缘的方式,让有分转向之后生起的转向心,就叫作如理作意。按照所说的相反面,也应知道非如理作意。然而,对于没有随眠相续的人,以唯作心为缘而生起的心,除了无过失的法之外,由于不会成为任何有过失法的缘,它可以归入如理作意这一边。因为属于漏尽者的相续,不看待如理或非如理的状态,仅仅在所缘境现前时生起,而不成为任何善或不善的缘,所以不能依据这两者来说,因此可以称为无记作意。巴利
Asati yonisomanasikāre kusalassa anuppajjanato, sati ca tasmiṃ uppajjanato tassa so āsannakāraṇanti āha ‘‘yonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhāna’’nti. Tattha yoniso pathena upāyena manasikāro yonisomanasikāro, atthato pana sānusayasantānavato channaṃ dvārānamāpāthagatesvārammaṇesu patirūpadesavāsādisampattiyā kusaladhammānaṃ paccayabhāvena bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭetvā uppannamāvajjanaṃ yonisomanasikāro nāma. Vuttapaṭipakkhavasena ayonisomanasikāropi daṭṭhabbo. Yaṃ pana niranusayasantānasamaṅgissa kiriyacittānaṃ paccayabhāvena uppannaṃ, taṃ ṭhapetvā niravajjadhammaṃ sāvajjadhammassa kassaci paccayabhāvānupagamanato yonisomanasikārapakkhaṃ vā bhajeyya. Khīṇāsavasantānagatattā yonisoayonisobhāvamanapekkhitvā āpāthagatārammaṇesu uppattimattaṃ vinā na kassaci kusalākusalabhāvassa paccayo hotīti tadubhayavasena navattabbattā abyākatamanasikāroti vā saṅkhaṃ gaccheyyāti.
对于“有过失、不可爱果报为相的不善”这一句,在这里也应按照前面所说的方式,用对立面来搭配理解:“贪等就是过失,它们存在于谁那里,谁就是有过失的;不可爱的果报属于谁,谁就是有不可爱果报的。”等等。从味等方面来说,它具有产生无意义之事的味,以杂染为现起。或者,由于是可呵责的状态,所以就是以有过失为相,以杂染为味,以不可爱果报为现起,以非如理作意为足处。从词义来说,不是善的就是不善,意思是善的对立面。因为这里的“不”字表示对立,不表示别的意思,也不表示不存在。否则的话,三法就成立不了,会变成二法或四法。也就是说,如果不善是不同于善的另一种东西,那么无记法也不同于善,也会被“不善”这个词涵盖,这样一来,按善和不善的类别划分,就应该说只有二法。如果善的不存在就是不善,那么它不涵盖任何类别,按善和无记的类别划分,也只应该说二法。如果说“不存在也应该单独算进去”,那么由于它没有类别,就无法和“类别”这个词产生关联,因为只有存在的东西才有类别。或者,就像善的不存在一样,无记的不存在也存在,那么无记的类别也应该被说到,这样就会变成四法。但这不是所承许的,因为只承许善等三种类别,而且巴利文中也只以三法来说“善法、不善法、无记法”。然而,当说“善的对立面”时,就像朋友的对立面是敌人、贪的对立面是无贪一样,凡是与善直接相反的法类,那就是不善,依此三法就成立。它的直接相反性,应知是因为有过失、有不可爱果报,以及因此是应当被断除的,而不是因为能破坏善。因为不善并不能断除善,反而是善因为力量强大而断除它。善是大力者,不善是弱力者。因此说:“弱者被强者压倒,种种危难摧伏他。”所以应知,只有善按上述方式是不善的断除者,而不是不善是善的断除者。巴利
Sāvajjāniṭṭhavipākalakkhaṇamakusalanti etthāpi ‘‘vajjā rāgādayo, te yassa santi, taṃ sāvajjaṃ, aniṭṭho vipāko yassa, taṃ aniṭṭhavipāka’’ntiādinā vuttanayānusārena paṭipakkhayojanā daṭṭhabbā. Rasādito panetaṃ anatthajananarasaṃ, saṃkilesapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā gārayhabhāvato sāvajjalakkhaṇameva, saṃkilesabhāvarasaṃ, aniṭṭhavipākapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ayonisomanasikārapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Vacanatthato pana na kusalanti akusalaṃ, kusalapaṭipakkhanti attho. Paṭipakkhatthe hi ayaṃ akāro, na pana aññatthe, nāpi abhāve. Itarathā hi tikaṃ na siyā, dukaṃ, catukkaṃ vā āpajjeyya. Tathā hi yadi kusalato aññamakusalaṃ siyā , tadā abyākatassāpi tato aññabhāvena akusala-saddasaṅgahoti kusalākusalajātibhedato duvidhanti dukaṃ vattabbaṃ. Yadi ca kusalābhāvo akusalaṃ, tena na kāci jāti gayhatīti kusalābyākatajātibhedato dukameva vattabbaṃ. Atha siyā ‘‘abhāvopi visuṃ gahetabbo’’ti, evaṃ sati tassa jātiyā abhāvato jāti-saddena saha sambandho na siyā. Vijjamānassa hi jāti nāma hoti. Yatheva vā kusalassa abhāvo, evaṃ abyākatassāpi abhāvo atthīti anabyākatajātipi vattabbāti catukkaṃ āpajjeyya. Na cetamiṭṭhaṃ kusalādivasena tividhajātiyā eva icchitattā, pāḷiyañca ‘‘kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā abyākatā dhammā’’ti tikavaseneva vuttattā ‘‘kusalapaṭipakkha’’nti pana vuccamāne mittapaṭipakkho amitto viya, lobhapaṭipakkho alobho viya ca yaṃ dhammajātaṃ kusalassa ujuvipaccanīkabhūtaṃ, taṃ akusalanti tassa vasena tikaṃ upapannaṃ hoti, ujuvipaccanīkatā cassa sāvajjāniṭṭhavipākattā, tena pahātabbabhāvato ca veditabbā, na pana kusalavināsanato. Na hi akusalena kusalaṃ pahīyati, mahābalattā pana kusalameva taṃ pajahati. Kusalañhi mahābalaṃ, akusalaṃ dubbalaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘abalā naṃ balīyanti, maddantenaṃ parissayā’’ti (su. ni. 776), tasmā kusalameva yathāvuttanayena akusalassa pahāyakaṃ, nākusalaṃ itarassāti veditabbaṃ.
这个“两者相反之相”是指:有一类法,既不像善那样具有“没有过失、能带来可爱果报”的特征,也不像不善那样具有“有过失、能带来不可爱果报”的特征,而是因为没有异熟,所以具有与这两者相反的特征,这就是“无记”的意思。难道不会这样吗?如果说“与这两者相反的特征”,那岂不是像与苦受、乐受相反的舍受那样,凡是具有与可爱、不可爱异熟相反的其他某种异熟,就成了无记?不会这样,因为那种情况根本不存在。就像光明与黑暗之外,没有别的什么相反的东西;同样,与可爱、不可爱异熟相反的其他异熟,也根本不存在。或者,这里的“彼”字,是撇开可爱、不可爱异熟,只指善和不善本身。因此,因为善和不善是有异熟的,与这两者相反的特征,就是没有异熟的特征,这就是它的意思。这里不必再追问了。以善、不善的性质来说而不记说,所以是无记。因为说了善和不善之后再说无记,应当理解为正是以善、不善的性质来说而不说,并不是以别的什么方式。而且,之所以这样不说,正是因为它具有与这两者相反的特征,并不是仅仅因为不可说。应当这样理解。或者,“vi”这个前缀是相反的意思,“ā”这个前缀是面向、显现的意思。因此,由各自的缘而使彼此面对面地相反,从特征相违的角度,或者从应断与可断的状态来说,善和不善是“已记说”。除此之外的就是“无记”。因为从特征上说,它不像善和不善那样彼此相对。确实,无异熟性并不像不可爱异熟与可爱异熟相对那样,与可爱、不可爱异熟相冲突;无记也不舍弃善和不善中的任何一个,也不被任何一个所舍弃。当这样理解“与这两者相反的特征是无记”时,有人可能会想:“有业,却没有业异熟;没有业异熟,将来也不会有业异熟。”为了排除这种想法,经中又说“或没有能力产生异熟”。因为由趣、依、时、加行的缺失,那些不能产生异熟的业,比如现法受业等,以及由修习所断的不善业和通智善业,都不能产生异熟,所以有时有人会想:“是不是可能有无记的状态呢?”为了排除这种想法,所以说“或没有能力产生异熟”,即没有能力给出异熟,因为在那里没有这种功能。这里的意思是:现法受业等,由于缘不具足等原因而没有异熟;但如果它们远离那些条件,就有能力给出异熟,那就成为“有能力产生异熟”。然而事实并非如此,而是无论如何都没有能力给出异熟,所以不是“有能力产生异熟”,而是称为“无记”。巴利
Tadubhaya…pe… abyākatanti yaṃ dhammajātaṃ kusalaṃ viya na anavajjaiṭṭhavipākalakkhaṇaṃ, nāpi akusalaṃ viya sāvajjāniṭṭhavipākalakkhaṇaṃ, atha kho avipākattā tadubhayaviparītalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ abyākatanti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘tadubhayaviparītalakkhaṇa’’nti vutte sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ viparītā upekkhāvedanā viya iṭṭhāniṭṭhavipākānaṃ viparīto añño koci vipāko yassa atthi, taṃ abyākatanti āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati tathā asambhavato. Yathā hi ālokandhakārānaṃ viparīto añño koci natthi, evamiṭṭhāniṭṭhavipākānaṃ viparīto na koci vipāko atthīti. Atha vā taṃ-saddo idha iṭṭhāniṭṭhavipākanirapekkhaṃ kusalākusalamattameva paccāmasatīti kusalākusalānaṃ savipākattā tadubhayaviparītalakkhaṇaṃ, taṃ avipākalakkhaṇanti atthoti alamettha anuyogena. Kusalākusalabhāvena na byākatanti abyākataṃ. Kusalākusalañhi vatvā abyākatassa vuttattā kusalākusalabhāveneva avuttattāti viññāyati, na pakārantarena. Tathā avacanañca tassa tadubhayaviparītalakkhaṇattāyeva, na pana avattabbattāmattenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā vi-saddo virodhivacano. Ā-saddo abhimukhabhāvappakāsano, tasmā attano paccayehi aññamaññaṃ virodhābhimukhataṃ kataṃ lakkhaṇavirodhato pahāyakappahātabbabhāvato vāti byākataṃ, kusalākusalaṃ. Tato aññaṃ abyākataṃ. Tañhi lakkhaṇato aññamaññaṃ kusalākusalaṃ viya na tassa viruddhaṃ. Na hi avipākataṃ aniṭṭhavipākatā viya, iṭṭhavipākatāya iṭṭhavipākatā viya ca aniṭṭhavipākatāya iṭṭhāniṭṭhavipākatāhi virujjhati, na cāpi abyākataṃ kusalākusalesu kiñci pajahati, na ca kenaci pahātabbanti. ‘‘Tadubhayaviparītalakkhaṇamabyākata’’nti viññāyamāne ahosi kammaṃ, nāhosi kammavipāko, natthi kammavipāko, na bhavissati kammavipākoti iminā tikena saṅgahitassa gatiupadhikālappayogavipattīhi avipākassa diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādikammassa bhāvanāyapahātabbassa akusalassa ca abhiññākusalassa ca vipākuppādanābhāvato ‘‘siyā nu kho abyākatabhāvo vā’’ti kadāci koci cinteyyāti tannivāraṇatthamāha ‘‘avipākārahaṃ vā’’ti, vipākaṃ dātuṃ nārahati tattha sāmatthiyābhāvatoti avipākārahaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādayo tāva paccayavekallādīhi kāraṇehi avipākā, sace panete tabbidūrā assu, tadā vipākadāne samatthatāya vipākārahāyeva, taṃ pana na tathā, atha kho yena kenaci ākārena vipākadāne asamatthatāyeva vipākārahaṃ na hoti, taṃ abyākataṃ nāmāti.
现在,对于以上面三种分类方式列出的善等诸法,先分析善心,用“其中,善心”等话来说明它的数量范围。所谓二十一种,就是八种欲界心、五种色界心、四种无色界心、四种出世间心,这样简要来说就是二十一种。从地来说有四种:就是依欲界、色界、无色界、出世间这四种地,在那里生起的心也有四种。这里的“地”,就是处所、位置和状态。因为状态也被当作有状态者的生起之处。这样就能容易地把握它们。这里的状态,是指诸法被欲贪等限定或未被限定的情况。其中,前三种地要从两种意义来理解,后一种地只从状态的意义来理解。因为出世间法在欲有等之外,找不到别的处所。巴利
Idāni evaṃ tikavasena niddiṭṭhesu kusalādīsu paṭhamaṃ tāva kusalacittaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘tattha kusalacitta’’ntiādinā tassa gaṇanaparicchedaṃ dasseti. Ekavīsatividhanti aṭṭha kāmāvacarāni , pañca rūpāvacarāni, cattāri arūpāvacarāni, cattāri lokuttarānīti evaṃ saṅkhepato ekavīsatividhaṃ. Bhūmito catubbidhanti kāmarūpārūpalokuttarabhūmisaṅkhātānaṃ catunnaṃ bhūmīnaṃ vasena tattha pavattamānaṃ cittampi catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha bhavanti etthāti bhūmi, ṭhānaṃ, avatthā ca. Avatthāpi hi avatthavantānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānaṃ viya gayhati. Evañhi nesaṃ sukhaggahaṇaṃ hoti. Avatthāti cettha dhammānaṃ kāmataṇhādīhi paricchinnāparicchinnabhāvo. Tattha purimā tisso bhūmiyo ubhayavasena veditabbā, itarā avatthāvaseneva. Na hi lokuttaradhammānaṃ kāmabhavādito aññaṃ ṭhānamupalabbhatīti.
即使是在其他地方生起的,按照后面将要讲的方式,因为属于欲界,所以从界来说只有一种。按有依处和无依处的区别来分:眼等五种加上心所依处,共六种依处。不过,善心并不是依眼等而生起的,所以这里以心所依处作为依处。与它俱行、决定依它而生起的,就是有依处,也就是在欲界和色界中生起的识。因为在色界,无色界心的生起会受到色的阻碍;而在无色界,由于没有色,所以只能没有依处地生起,在那里生起的就是无依处。卑下……(中略)……三种:在这里,从缘和果来看,比中等和殊胜的卑下,或者功德比它们少的,就是卑下;通过自己的缘而达到主导地位的,就是殊胜;处于两者中间的,就是中等。其中,以卑下的欲、心、精进、观而发动的,是卑下;以中等的欲等发动的,是中等;以殊胜的欲等发动的,是殊胜。而欲等的卑下等状态,应该从胜解的角度来看。也就是说,以卑下的胜解而发动,所以是卑下;以殊胜的胜解而发动,所以是殊胜;以两者中间的胜解而发动,所以是中等。或者,为了求名声而作的善,是卑下;为了求福德果报而作的,是中等;依于圣者境界而作、认为“这福德本来就是善士应当做的”,这样的就是殊胜。或者,以“我是施主,而其他这些是受施的奴仆之类”这样自赞毁他而杂染发动的,是卑下;同样没有杂染的,是中等;作为道果近因的,是殊胜。或者,为了求得生存和受用的圆满而作的,是卑下;以声闻、独觉菩提的波罗蜜,为了自己解脱而作的,是中等;以正等正觉的波罗蜜,为了令一切众生解脱而作的,是殊胜。巴利
Aññattha pavattamānassāpi vakkhamānanayena kāmabhūmipariyāpannattā bhūmito ekavidhanti. Savatthukāvatthukabhedatoti cakkhādīni pañca, hadayañcāti cha vatthūni. Kusalassa pana cakkhādinissitattābhāvato hadayavatthu idha vatthūti adhippetaṃ. Tena sahitaṃ ekantena tannissitappavattitoti savatthukaṃ, kāmarūpadhātuyaṃ pavattamānaviññāṇaṃ. Tattha hi arūpassa rūpapaṭibandhappavatti, arūpadhātuyaṃ pana rūpābhāvato vatthuvirahitameva pavattatīti tattha pavattamānaṃ avatthukaṃ. Hīna…pe… tividhanti ettha paccayato, phalato ca majjhimapaṇītehi nihīnaṃ, tesaṃ vā guṇehi parihīnanti hīnaṃ, attano paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītanti paṇītaṃ, ubhinnaṃ vemajjhe bhavaṃ majjhimaṃ. Tattha hīnena chandena cittena vīriyena vīmaṃsāya vā pavattitaṃ hīnaṃ, majjhimehi chandādīhi pavattitaṃ majjhimaṃ, paṇītehi paṇītaṃ. Chandādīnaṃ pana hīnādibhāvo adhimuttivasena daṭṭhabbo. Hīnādhimuttivasena hi nesaṃ hīnatā, paṇītādhimuttivasena paṇītatā, tadubhayavemajjhavasena majjhimatā. Yasakāmatāya vā kataṃ kusalaṃ hīnaṃ, puññaphalakāmatāya majjhimaṃ, ‘‘puññaṃ nāmetaṃ sādhūhi kattabbamevā’’ti evaṃ ariyabhāvaṃ nissāya kataṃ paṇītaṃ. ‘‘Ahamasmi dānapati, ime panaññe dānadāsādayo’’tiādinā attukkaṃsanaparavambhanāhi upakkiliṭṭhaṃ pavattitaṃ vā hīnaṃ, tathā anupakkiliṭṭhaṃ majjhimaṃ, maggaphalapadaṭṭhānaṃ paṇītaṃ. Bhavabhogasampattinimittaṃ vā kataṃ hīnaṃ, sāvakapaccekabodhipāramitāvasena attano vimokkhatthāya kataṃ majjhimaṃ, sammāsambodhipāramitāvasena sabbesaṃ vimokkhatthāya kataṃ paṇītanti.
喜……差别:差别这个词要分别搭配起来理解,也就是依喜与舍的差别、依智的差别、依加行的差别。其中,依加行的差别就是依行的差别。喜与舍的差别倒是说得通,因为它们性质不同。可是智与加行的差别又怎么讲呢?回答说:由智和加行造成的差别,就叫智与加行的差别,因为它们随着智和加行的存在与否而转起。现在,为了把喜与舍等差别详细展示出来,先以即所谓提问,然后用喜俱行等来回答。这里的即所谓,意思是:那是哪一种?或者那是怎样的?巴利
Somanassu…pe… bhedatoti bheda-saddo paccekaṃ sambandhitabbo ‘‘somanassupekkhābhedato ñāṇabhedato payogabhedato’’ti. Tattha payogabhedatoti saṅkhārabhedatoti attho. Nanu ca somanassupekkhābhedo tāva yutto tesaṃ bhinnasabhāvattā. Ñāṇappayogabhedo pana kathanti? Vuccate – ñāṇappayogakato bhedo ñāṇappayogabhedo tesaṃ bhāvābhāvamupādāya pavattattā. Idāni tameva somanassupekkhādibhedaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyathida’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘somanassasahagata’’ntiādinā vissajjeti. Tattha seyyathidanti taṃ katamaṃ, taṃ kathanti vā attho.
善妙的心,或者“此心善妙”,所以叫善心;它的状态就是喜,这是对心意乐受的称呼。与喜从生起一直到灭尽,俱行、转起、结合、相应,这就是“俱行”的意思。或者,与喜一起达到同一生起等状态,所以叫“喜俱行”。能如实了知、通达,就是智;与那智以同一生起等方式结合,所以叫“智相应”。没有行,所以叫“无行”;无行本身就是“无行作”。与行一起转起,就是“有行”,那本身就是“有行作”。这里所说的“行”,是指自己或他人先前的加行,因为“以锐利状态的特相而庄严,令心作准备,或心由此而被准备、被令准备”。其中,在布施等修福之时,心被悭吝、懈怠、昏沉、睡眠等杂染所消沉,以杂染止息之力,以及令心振奋之力,于三门中转起的正精进,名为自己的加行。然而,对于修善无振奋心的人,以“喂,善男子,修善是智者所行的道路,你也应当依此而行,因此你应布施、持戒,那对你将有利益、有安乐”等语,为令修善而振奋他人,于他人身语门中转起的命令,名为他人的加行。其中,前者存在于前分转起的心相续中,后者只存在于他人的心相续中,因此,由那所生的心的锐利状态特相,这里以近取的方式称为行,应当知道。因此诸阿阇梨说:巴利
Sobhanaṃ mano, sobhanaṃ vā mano etassāti sumano, tassa bhāvo somanassaṃ, mānasikasukhavedanāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, somanassena uppādato yāva nirodhā sahagataṃ pavattaṃ saṃsaṭṭhaṃ sampayuttanti attho. Atha vā somanassena saha ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gatanti somanassasahagataṃ. Jānāti yathāsabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhatīti ñāṇaṃ, tena samaṃ ekuppādādīhi pakārehi yuttanti ñāṇasampayuttaṃ. Nāssa saṅkhāro atthīti asaṅkhāraṃ, asaṅkhārameva asaṅkhārikaṃ. Saha saṅkhārena pavattamānaṃ sasaṅkhāraṃ, tadeva sasaṅkhārikaṃ. Saṅkhāroti cettha attano, parassa vā pubbappayogo ‘‘saṅkharoti tikkhabhāvasaṅkhātena maṇḍanavisesena sajjeti, saṅkharīyati vā sajjīyati cittaṃ etenā’’ti katvā. Tattha dānādipuññakaraṇakāle maccheramalathinamiddhādīhi upakkilesehi saṃsīdamāne citte upakkilesavūpasamavasena, cittassa ca ussāhajananavasena tīsu dvāresu pavatto sammāvāyāmo attano payogo nāma. Kusalakaraṇe nirussāhassa pana ‘‘ambho, sappurisa, kusalakaraṇaṃ nāma paṇḍitehi āsevitamaggo, tattha tayāpi paṭipajjituṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā dānaṃ dehi, sīlaṃ rakkha, tañhi te atthāya hitāya sukhāya bhavissatī’’tiādinā kusalakaraṇatthāya ussāhajananavasena paresaṃ kāyavacīdvāresu pavattā āṇatti parappayogo nāma. Tesu pana purimo pubbabhāgappavattacittasantāne, pacchimo paresaṃ cittasantāneyeva sambhavatīti tannibbattito cittassa tikkhabhāvasaṅkhāto viseso idha upacārato saṅkhāroti veditabbo. Tenāhu ācariyā –
由先前的加行所生,是心现起的差别;
了知诸行本性的人,把它称为“行”。巴利
‘‘Pubbappayogasambhūto, viseso cittasambhavī; Saṅkhāro iti saṅkhāra-sabhāvaññūhi kittito’’ti.
或者,“有行作、无行作”这个说法,仅仅是依据行的存在与否而说的,并不是依据与它同时生起的存在与否而说。因此,即使行是在不同的心相续中生起,由于这个行存在,以那个行为条件所生的心,因为那个行存在,就称为“有行作”——就像“有毛的”“有翅膀的”这些说法里,“有”字表示的是“存在”的意思。反过来,因为没有那个行,按照同样的方式就是“无行作”。
或者,行就是令准备,或者心借此被准备——也就是通过去除外来生起的、令心沉没的自性,而被准备;或者它准备那心,按照上述方式。因此,行就是直接由前前的加行所生的锐利状态,因为无彼,所以是无行作,意思是自性的锐利。与彼俱行的,是有行作。或者,被吝啬之垢等所准备,是行,即心沉没的自性;那不存在于彼,就是无行作,另一种是有行作。或者,殊胜的时节、食物等强有力的缘是行,作意“它准备心,使之锐利;或者心借此被准备”。由于a音有增长之义,增长了的行存在于彼,所以是无行作,意思是具有强有力的缘。然而,因为未被增长之义的a音所限定,所以是有行作,有缘,但意乐是弱缘。与智不相应,即远离,是智不相应。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘sasaṅkhārikamasaṅkhārika’’nti ca etaṃ kevalaṃ saṅkhārassa bhāvābhāvamattāpekkhāya vuttaṃ, na tassa sahappavattisabbhāvābhāvatoti bhinnasantānappavattinopi saṅkhārassa idamatthitāya taṃvasena nibbattaṃ cittaṃ saṅkhāro assa atthīti sasaṅkhārikaṃ saha-saddassa vijjamānatthaparidīpanato ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu viya. Tabbiparītaṃ pana tadabhāvato yathāvuttavaseneva asaṅkhārikaṃ. Atha vā saṅkharaṇaṃ, saṅkharīyati vā etena āgantukasambhūtena cittasaṃsīdanasabhāvāpanayanavaseneva sajjīyati, saṅkharoti vā taṃ yathāvuttavasenevāti saṅkhāroti ujukameva pubbappayogajanito tikkhabhāvo vuccati, tadabhāvato asaṅkhārikaṃ, sabhāvatikkhanti attho. Taṃsahagatāya sasaṅkhārikaṃ, atha vā maccheramalādīhi saṅkharīyatīti saṅkhāro, cittassa saṃsīdanasabhāvo, so yassa natthīti asaṅkhārikaṃ, itaraṃ sasaṅkhārikaṃ. Paṇītautubhojanādiko vā balavapaccayo saṅkhāro ‘‘saṅkharoti cittaṃ tikkhabhāvena, saṅkharīyati vā taṃ etenā’’ti katvā. A-kārassa vuḍḍhatthavuttitāya vuḍḍhippatto saṅkhāro assāti asaṅkhārikaṃ, balavapaccayavantanti attho. Vuḍḍhiparidīpakena pana a-kārena avisesitattā sasaṅkhārikaṃ sappaccayaṃ dubbalapaccayanti adhippāyo. Ñāṇena vippayuttaṃ virahitanti ñāṇavippayuttaṃ.
“舍”就是“平等地观看”:即使正在感受,也只是以中立的方式看待所缘,意思是安住在中舍的状态里。或者,对于可意和不可意的所缘,因为没有偏向,以恰当、合理的方式去看、去体验,所以叫“舍”。或者,与苦乐都不相冲突地去看、去体验,所以叫“舍”。正因为不相冲突,它甚至能在苦乐之后接着生起。而苦受和乐受各自性质相反,所以不能彼此无间地生起。正因如此,在《发趣论》中,喜之后无间生起忧、忧之后无间生起喜,是被否定的。这个含义在贪俱行心相应的受里也能成立,但前面两种解释就不适用了,因为贪俱行等并没有以中舍的方式看待,也没有以恰当的方式看待。舍俱行:解释方法都跟前面所说的一样。巴利
Upekkhatīti upekkhā, vediyamānāpi ārammaṇaṃ ajjhupekkhati, majjhattākārasaṇṭhitiyāti attho. Atha vā iṭṭhe, aniṭṭhe ca ārammaṇe pakkhapātābhāvena upapattito yuttito ikkhati anubhavatīti upekkhā. Atha vā upetā sukhadukkhānaṃ aviruddhā ikkhā anubhavananti upekkhā. Aviruddhattāyeva hesā tesaṃ anantarampi pavattati. Sukhadukkhavedanā pana visuṃ visuṃ viruddhasabhāvattā nāññamaññaṃ anantaraṃ pavattanti . Teneva hi paṭṭhāne somanassassa anantaraṃ domanassassa, domanassassa anantaraṃ somanassassa ca uppatti paṭisiddhā. Ayañca attho lobhasahagatacittasampayuttavedanāyapi labbhati, purimā pana dve na tathā. Na hi lobhasahagatādīnaṃ majjhattākārena ajjhupekkhanaṃ, upapattito ikkhanaṃ vā atthīti. Upekkhāsahagatanti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
难道不是还有触等其他相应法存在吗?那么,为什么只按照喜等来区分八种心呢?因为它们能区分心。触等是遍一切心的心所,信等是遍一切善心的心所,所以不能靠它们来区分心;而喜等在某些心里有,在某些心里没有,所以靠它们来区分心就很明显了。那为什么这些喜等在某些心里有、在某些心里没有呢?因为它们的因缘有时具足、有时不具足。那什么是它们的因缘呢?回答说:其中,喜俱心首先是因为所缘才生起的。面对可意所缘时,喜俱心就会生起。可意所缘难道不是贪的所依吗?因为它是可染着的。那善心怎么会在那里生起呢?这并不一定,因为即使在可意所缘上,由于决意等,善心也会生起。如果有人已经决意“我只应该行善”,心就固定在行善上,从已经生起的不善中回转过来,转向行善,又因为经常实行而熟练于善,依靠合适住处、听闻正法、亲近善士、往昔所修福这四种条件,并且如理作意,那么即使在可意所缘上,生起的也只是与无贪相应的心,而不是与贪相应的心。这里有一首偈颂:巴利
Nanu ca aññepi phassādayo sampayuttadhammā atthīti somanassādīnaṃ vaseneva pana aṭṭhavidhatā kasmā gahitāti? Bhedakarabhāvato. Phassādīnañhi sabbacittasādhāraṇattā, saddhādīnañca sabbakusalasādhāraṇattā na tehi cittassa vibhāgo, somanassādayo pana katthaci citte honti, katthaci na hontīti pākaṭova tehi cittassa vibhāgoti. Kasmā panete katthaci citte honti, katthaci na hontīti? Kāraṇassa sannihitāsannihitabhāvato. Kiṃ pana nesaṃ kāraṇanti? Vuccate – tattha somanassasahagatabhāvo tāva ārammaṇavasena hoti. Iṭṭhārammaṇasmiñhi somanassasahagatacittamuppajjati. Nanu ca iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ lobhassa vatthu rajjanīyattāti kathaṃ tattha kusalaṃ uppajjatīti? Nayidamekantikaṃ iṭṭhepi ārammaṇe niyamitādivasena kusalassa uppajjanato. Yassa hi ‘‘kusalameva mayā kattabba’’nti kusalakaraṇeyeva cittaṃ niyamitaṃ hoti, akusalappavattitova nivattetvā kusalakaraṇeyeva pariṇāmitaṃ, abhiṇhakaraṇena ca kusalaṃ samudāciṇṇaṃ, paṭirūpadesavāsasaddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayapubbekatapuññatāsaṅkhātacatucakkūpanissayavasena, yoniso ca ābhogo pavattati, tassa iṭṭhepi ārammaṇe alobhasampayuttameva cittamuppajjati, na lobhasampayuttaṃ. Hoti cettha –
由因果秩序转变、以及反复串习的缘故,
以智为先导的作意,即使在可意的对象上,善也可能生起。巴利
‘‘Niyāmapariṇāmehi , samudāciṇṇatāya ca; Ñāṇapubbaṅgamābhogā, iṭṭhepi kusalaṃ siyā’’ti.
另外,还应当通过信心增上等原因,来理解心与喜相应这件事。因为对没有信心的人和持邪见的人来说,即使看到如来色身这样完全可意的对象,也不会生起喜。那些看不到善行利益的人,即使被别人鼓励去行善,在行善时也不会生起喜。所以,信心增上、见解清净、能看到利益——正是由于这些原因,心才与喜相应。巴利
Apica saddhābahulatādīhi ca kāraṇehi cittassa somanassasahagatatā veditabbā. Assaddhānaṃ, hi micchādiṭṭhikānañca ekantamiṭṭhārammaṇabhūtaṃ tathāgatarūpampi disvā somanassaṃ na uppajjati. Ye ca kusalappavattiyaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ na passanti, tesaṃ parehi ussāhitānaṃ kusalaṃ karontānampi somanassaṃ na uppajjati, tasmā saddhābahulatā visuddhidiṭṭhitā ānisaṃsadassāvitāti imehipi kāraṇehi cittassa somanassasahagatatā hoti.
另外,还有十一种法能帮助喜觉支生起,也就是:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、寂止随念、避开粗劣的人、亲近温和的人、省察能让人生起净信的经典、以及心倾向于这些。通过这些因缘,就应当知道心是处于与悦意之心相应的状态。因为当人随念佛等功德时,喜会生起,甚至遍满全身,一直到近行定生起。同样地,当人省察自己长久以来以无缺损等方式守护的四遍净戒时;当在家人省察十戒、五戒时;当在饥荒、怖畏等时候,把上好的食物布施给同梵行者之后,省察自己的布施:“我作了这样的布施”时;当在家人也在那样的时机,省察自己布施给持戒者的布施时;当省察那些具足某些功德而投生天界的天人,并观察自己也有那样的功德时;当通过止和观镇伏了烦恼,看到六十年、七十年都不再现行,而想:“啊,我的烦恼不再现行了”时;当避开那些对塔庙、长老等不恭敬,行为粗劣,对佛等没有净信与敬爱,就像驴背上的尘土一样的粗劣之人时;当亲近那些对佛等有浓厚净信、心性柔软的温和之人时;当省察那些阐明三宝功德、能让人生起净信的经典时;当为了生起喜,即使在站立、坐下等时候,也以倾向于喜等方式持续修习时,喜大多会生起。又因为喜和悦意之心不可分离,所以当喜生起时,悦意之心也必定会生起。因此应当知道,这些既是喜的因缘,也是悦意之心的因缘。还有两种原因会导致与悦意之心相应:一是天性不深沉,二是结生时就是悦意之心的类型。因为天性不深沉的人,即使别人只给一点点帮助,也会感到满足;而结生时就是悦意之心类型的人,即使面对不太清净的所缘,也不会觉得可厌。这样的人,大多数时候生起的都是与悦意之心相应的心。反之,如果没有上面所说的那些悦意之心的因缘,所缘又是中等的,就应当知道那是与舍相应。巴利
Apica ye te ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti. Seyyathidaṃ – buddhānussati dhammānussati saṃghānussati sīlānussati cāgānussati devatānussati upasamānussati lūkhapuggalaparivajjanaṃ siniddhapuggalasevanā pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇā tadadhimuttatāti imehipi kāraṇehi cittassa somanassasahagatabhāvo veditabbo. Buddhādiguṇe anussarantassa hi yāva upacāruppādā sakalasarīraṃ pharamānā pīti uppajjati. Tathā dīgharattaṃ akkhaṇḍatādivasena attanā rakkhitaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa, gihino dasasīlaṃ pañcasīlaṃ paccavekkhantassa, dubbhikkhabhayādīsu paṇītaṃ bhojanaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvā ‘‘evaṃnāma dānaṃ adāsi’’nti attanocāgaṃ paccavekkhantassa, gihinopi tathārūpe kāle sīlavantānaṃ dinnadānaṃ paccavekkhantassa, yehi guṇehi samannāgatā devā devattaṃ gatā, tathārūpānaṃ guṇānaṃ attani atthitaṃ paccavekkhantassa, samathavipassanāhi vikkhambhitakilese saṭṭhipi sattatipi vassāni asamudācarante disvā ‘‘aho mayhaṃ kilesā na samudācarantī’’ti cintentassa, cetiyadassanatheradassanesu asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsucitalūkhabhāvena buddhādīsu pasādasinehābhāvena gadrabhapiṭṭhe rajasadise lūkhapuggale parivajjantassa, buddhādīsu pasādabahule muducitte siniddhapuggale paṭisevantassa, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpake pasādanīyasuttante paccavekkhantassa, ṭhānanisajjādīsupi pītiuppādanatthaṃ tanninnatādivasena pavattentassa yebhuyyena pīti uppajjati. Pītiyā ca somanassena saha avinābhāvato taduppattiyā tassāpi uppatti niyatāti evaṃ pītikāraṇānipi somanassakāraṇānīti daṭṭhabbāni. Kiñca – agambhīrapakatitā, somanassapaṭisandhikatāti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi somanassasahagatatā hoti. Yo hi agambhīrapakatiko hoti, appamattakepi hitopakaraṇe tussati, yo ca somanassapaṭisandhiko appasannesu ārammaṇesupi appaṭikkūladassāvī, tassa yebhuyyena somanassasahagatacittaṃ uppajjati. Yathāvuttānaṃ pana somanassakāraṇānamabhāvena majjhattārammaṇatāya ca upekkhāsahagatatā veditabbā.
不过,与智相应的(心)则是由业、投生、根成熟、烦恼远离这些原因而产生的。如果有人以利益他人的意愿来说法,或者教别人各种没有过失的技艺门类,比如编织、印章、算数等技艺,木工、农耕、经商等职业,以及解毒等明处,或者自己去学习;或者恭敬说法者、请人说法;或者发愿“未来我要成为有智慧的人”,然后做种种福业——对于这样完成种种能引生智慧的业的人,依靠那个业而生起的善心,就是与智相应的。同样地,投生在无瞋害之世间的人,生起的善心也是与智相应的。这确实是所说的——巴利
Ñāṇasampayuttassa pana kammato upapattito indriyaparipākato kilesadūrībhāvatoti imehi kāraṇehi hoti. Yo hi paresaṃ hitajjhāsayena dhammaṃ deseti hīnukkaṭṭhādīni ca naḷakāramuddāgaṇanādīni sippāyatanāni, vaḍḍhakīkasivāṇijjādīni ca kammāyatanāni, visaharaṇādīni ca vijjāyatanānīti evaṃ niravajjasippāyatanādīni sikkhāpeti, sayaṃ vā sikkhati, dhammakathikassa sakkāraṃ katvā dhammaṃ kathāpeti, ‘‘āyatiṃ paññavā bhavissāmī’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nānappakāraṃ puññakammaṃ karoti, tassevaṃ nānappakāraṃ paññāsaṃvattanikakammaṃ sampādentassa taṃ kammaṃ upanissāya uppajjamānaṃ kusalaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ uppajjati. Tathā abyāpajje loke uppannassa uppajjamānaṃ kusalaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
在那里,那个享受安乐的人,法句漂浮其上。比丘们,忆念生起得慢,但那个众生很快就会获得殊胜的成就。巴利
‘‘Tassa tattha sukhino dhammapadāni pilavanti, dandho, bhikkhave, satuppādo, atha so satto khippameva visesabhāgī hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.191).
同样地,对于达到智慧十年阶段的人,依靠诸根成熟而生起的善心是与智相应的。然而,对于那些通过止与观的修习已经镇伏了烦恼的人,依靠烦恼的远离而生起的心,是与智相应而生起的。正如所说的:巴利
Tathā paññādasakaṃ sampattassa indriyaparipākaṃ nissāya uppajjamānaṃ kusalaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ hoti. Yena pana samathavipassanābhāvanāhi kilesā vikkhambhitā, tassa kilesadūrībhāvaṃ nissāya uppajjamānaṃ cittaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ uppajjati. Yathāha –
精勤修行,智慧确实会生起;懈怠不修行,智慧就会灭尽。巴利
‘‘Yogā ve jāyate bhūri, ayogā bhūrisaṅkhayo’’ti. (Dha. pa. 282).
还有,哪些法能促成择法觉支的生起呢?具体来说,就是:勤于请教、让所缘境清净、调匀诸根、远离愚痴的人、亲近有智慧的人、反复思惟甚深的智慧行境、对此生起信解。由于这些原因,心就成为与智相应。也就是说,一个人亲近有智慧的人,对蕴、界、处、根、力、觉支、道支、禅支、止观等法多多请教,那么以由此生起的闻所成智为开端,生起的心就是与智同行的。再者,有人把指甲、毛发、衣服、住处等内外事物,原先模糊不清的,通过修剪、去除污垢等变得清晰干净;这个所依境清晰的人,当心与心所生起时,他的智也是清晰的,就像依托干净的灯盏等物而生起的灯火之光一样。又,如果有人信根等诸根中某一根特别强,其余诸根微弱,那么其余诸根就无法各自完成自己的作用,因此他按照觉支分别中所说的方式,以各种方法使诸根达到平衡;这样调匀诸根的人,依观智等,心就成为与智相应。而一个人远离愚痴的人,或者亲近有智慧的人,或者反复思惟世尊在蕴等法中所展现的甚深智慧行境,或者在站立、坐下等时以信解之心安住,这些生起的善心也是与智相应的。此外,通过随念佛陀等功德,心也是与智同行的。正如经中所说:巴利
Apica ye te dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti. Seyyathidaṃ – paripucchakatā vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā paññavantapuggalasevanā gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā tadadhimuttatāti imehi kāraṇehi ñāṇasampayuttabhāvo hoti. Tathā hi yo paññavante upasaṅkamma khandhadhātuāyatanaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānaṅgasamathavipassanādīnaṃ paripucchābahulo hoti, tassa taṃvasena uppannaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā uppajjamānaṃ cittaṃ ñāṇasahagataṃ hoti. Yena pana nakhakesacīvarasenāsanādīni ajjhattikabāhiravatthūni pubbe avisadāni chedanamalaharaṇādinā visadāni katāni, tassevaṃ visadavatthukassa uppannesu cittacetasikesu visadaṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti parisuddhāni dīpakapallakādīni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Yassa ca saddhindriyādīsu aññataraṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni, tato tāni sakasakakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkonti, tasmā so tassa bojjhaṅgavibhaṅge āgatanayena tena tena ākārena samattaṃ paṭipādeti, tassevaṃ indriyānaṃ samattaṃ paṭipādentassa vipassanāñāṇādīnaṃ vasena cittaṃ ñāṇasahagataṃ hoti. Yo pana duppaññapuggale parivajjeti, paññavantapuggale vā payirupāsati, khandhādīsu ogāḷhaṃ bhagavato gambhīrañāṇacariyaṃ vā paccavekkhati, ṭhānanisajjādīsu tadadhimuttacitto vā viharati, imesampi uppajjamānaṃ kusalaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ hoti. Apica buddhādiguṇānussaraṇenapi cittaṃ ñāṇasahagataṃ hoti. Yathāha –
摩诃男,当圣弟子随念如来的时候,他的心在那时不会被贪缠住,不会被嗔缠住,也不会被痴缠住;在那时,他的心只向着如来而保持正直。摩诃男,心保持正直的圣弟子,能得到对意义的理解,能得到对法的理解,能得到与法相应的喜悦。有了喜悦,喜就生起;心里有喜的人,身体就变得轻安;身体轻安的人,就感受到乐;有乐的人,心就入定;入定的人,就能如实了知。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa…pe… na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti tathāgataṃ ārabbha. Ujugatacitto kho pana, mahānāma, ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11).
应当这样理解:随念佛陀等修法,也是通过净化贪等烦恼而成为生起智慧的因。再者,三因结生正是生起智慧的因。因为结生智从最初开始就随着有分心的相续反复生起,通过心相续的熏习,就成为生起智慧的一种特别的亲依止缘。而无行性,则是由适宜的季节、饮食、住处等条件而产生的。在这里,有这些:巴利
Evaṃ buddhānussatiādayopi rāgādimalavisodhanena ñāṇuppattihetukāyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñca – tihetukapaṭisandhikatā ñāṇuppattikāraṇaṃ. Paṭisandhipaññā hi ādito paṭṭhāya bhavaṅgasantativasena bahulaṃ pavattamānā santānaparibhāvanena ñāṇuppattiyā savisesaupanissayo hoti. Asaṅkhārikattaṃ pana sappāyautubhojanaāvāsādipaccayehi hotīti. Honti cettha –
可意的所缘、信心充足,以及见清净;
以及能看见果报,这些是喜觉支的因。
这十一种法,其本质并不深奥。
与喜相应的连接,这些就是乐的因。
没有乐的各种因,以及以中舍为所缘;
以及舍生起的因,具慧者应当这样了知。
从业的投生,以及同样从诸根的成熟;
通过烦恼的止息,以及抉择诸法的各种因由。
通过七法以及随念佛陀等功德,
只要和具智慧的人接触,心就会与智慧相应。
由季节、饮食、住处等适宜条件作为原因;
无造作的状态也应由有辨识力的人了知。巴利
‘‘Iṭṭhārammaṇatā saddhābāhulyaṃ diṭṭhisuddhi ca; Phaladassāvitā ceva, pītibojjhaṅgahetuyo. ‘‘Ekādasa tathā dhammā, agambhīrasabhāvatā; Somanassayuttā sandhi, iccete sukhahetuyo. ‘‘Abhāvo sukhahetūnaṃ, majjhattārammaṇanti ca; Upekkhuppattihetu ca, evaṃ ñeyyā vibhāvinā. ‘‘Kammūpapattito ceva, tathā indriyapākato; Kilesūpasamā dhamma-vicayassa ca hetuhi. ‘‘Sattadhammehi buddhādi-guṇānussaraṇena ca; Sappaññasandhito ceva, cittaṃ ñāṇayutaṃ siyā. ‘‘Utubhojanaāvāsa-sappāyādīhi hetuhi; Asaṅkhārikabhāvopi, viññātabbo vibhāvinā’’ti.
像这样,按照受、智、加行的差别,说明了八种欲界心之后,现在为了总结它们,而说“此……中略……名”。巴利
Evaṃ vedanāñāṇappayogabhedato aṭṭhavidhaṃ kāmāvacaracittaṃ niddisitvā idāni taṃ nigamento āha ‘‘idaṃ…pe… nāmā’’ti.
12 12. 现在为了说明“欲界”这个名称是根据什么含义而来的,开始说“从摄颂”等话。其中,“从摄颂”就是从概要上、从简略上来说的意思。虽然烦恼欲和未断的烦恼等一样,因为可以被享受而包含在事欲之中,就像智被包含在所知之中一样,所以简略来说可能只有一种欲;但是,烦恼欲走向事欲的状态时,是依“值得欲求”这个意义而走向的,不是依“就是欲”这个意义。而依“就是欲”这个意义来说,只有烦恼欲才是欲,事欲不是欲。所以说“依烦恼与事”等话。那么,这里什么是事欲,什么是烦恼欲?心里存着这个疑问,就说“欲是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲,思是欲,贪是欲,思贪是欲”——像这样在《大义释》1的解说文中说到的、被指出的欲爱,在这里就是烦恼欲。而事欲则是那里所说的“可爱的色……可意的触……一切欲界法……一切色界法……一切无色界法……是欲”。为了说明这些有识与无识差别、属于三界的法,所以说“烦恼……轮转”。“或欲贪”这个限定,是在以烦恼为本性而确立的贪、嗔、痴等十种之中,排除了嗔、痴等其余九种烦恼。欲、色、无色爱的依处、基础,或者说作为原因的,就是事。巴利
12. Yena panatthena idaṃ ‘‘kāmāvacara’’nti vuccati, taṃ dāni dassetuṃ ‘‘uddānato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha uddānatoti uddesato, saṅkhepatoti attho. Kiñcāpi avasiṭṭhakilesādayo viya kilesakāmopi assādetabbatāya vatthukāme saṅgahito ñāṇaṃ viya ñeyyeti saṅkhepato ekoyeva kāmo siyā, tathāpi kilesakāmo vatthukāmabhāvaṃ gacchanto kāmanīyaṭṭhena gacchati, na kāmanavasena. Kāmanavasena ca pana kilesakāmova hoti, na pana vatthukāmoti āha ‘‘klesavatthuvasā’’tiādi. Ko panettha vatthukāmo, ko kilesakāmoti codanaṃ manasi nidhāya ‘‘chando kāmo, rāgo kāmo, chandarāgo kāmo, saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’ti (mahāni. 1) evaṃ niddesapāḷiyaṃ āgatā niddiṭṭhā kāmataṇhāva idha kilesakāmo. Vatthukāmoti ca ‘‘manāpikā rūpā…pe… manāpikā phoṭṭhabbā…pe… sabbepi kāmāvacarā dhammā…pe… sabbepi rūpāvacarā…pe… sabbepi arūpāvacarā…pe… kāmā’’ti (mahāni. 1) tattheva niddiṭṭhā saviññāṇāviññāṇappabhedā tebhūmakadhammāti dassento āha ‘‘kileso…pe… vaṭṭaka’’nti. ‘‘Chandarāgovā’’ti avadhāraṇena kilesabhāvena niruḷhesu lobhadosamohādīsu dasasu dosamohādayo nava kilese paṭikkhipati. Kāmarūpārūpataṇhāya vatthu patiṭṭhānaṃ, kāraṇabhūtanti vā vatthu.
13 13. 那么,什么叫烦恼欲,什么叫事欲呢?回答说“烦恼欲”等等。“欲”是指渴求事欲。“被欲”是指被烦恼欲所渴求。iti这个词在这里是“因此”的意思。ca这个词是“即”的意思。因此,因为烦恼欲是“欲者”所以是欲,事欲是“被欲者”所以是欲,所以这两种欲在主动和被动这两种语法关系中都能成立,意思是它既经历主动的状态,也经历被动的状态。或者,“两种”是指作为两种欲的表述词而分为两种。“欲”这个词在如前所说的主动和被动两种语法关系中成立,也就是说,它产生于主动格和被动格之中。而vo这个音只是语助词,就像“evaṃ vo kālāmā”等句中的用法一样。或者,“两种vo”是指两种蕴。因为烦恼欲以行蕴为自性,所以属于行蕴;事欲则按照后面将要说的方式,作为五种欲功德,以色蕴为自性,所以属于色蕴。这样,这两种欲在两种蕴中成立、产生,也就是归属于两种蕴之内。巴利
13. Kathaṃ pana kilesakāmo nāma, kathañca vatthukāmoti āha ‘‘kilesakāmo’’tiādi. Kāmetīti vatthukāmaṃ pattheti. Kāmīyatīti kilesakāmena patthīyati. Iti-saddo ‘‘tasmā’’ti imassa atthe. Ca-saddo eva-kāratthe, tena yasmā kilesakāmo kāmetīti kāmo, vatthukāmo ca kāmīyatīti, tasmā eva kilesakāmo, vatthukāmo cāti duvidhopi esa kāmo kārakadvaye kattari, kammani ca sijjhati, kattubhāvaṃ, kammabhāvañca paccanubhotīti attho. Atha vā duvidhoti dvinnaṃ kāmānaṃ vācakato duvidho. ‘‘Kāmo’’ti ayaṃ saddo kārakadvaye sijjhati yathāvuttakārakayugaḷe nipphajjati, kattari, kammani ca ‘‘kāmo’’ti padasambhavo hotīti attho. Vo-kāro pana nipātamattaṃ ‘‘evaṃ vo kālāmā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) viya. Atha vā vokārakadvayeti khandhadvayeti attho. Kilesakāmo hi saṅkhārasabhāvattā saṅkhārakkhandhe, vatthukāmo ca vakkhamānanayena pañcakāmaguṇabhūto rūpasabhāvattā rūpakkhandheti evaṃ duvidhopesa kāmo khandhadvaye sijjhati nipphajjati, antobhāvaṃ gacchatīti.
14 14. “成就”就是种种圆满的获得。依这些成就来说,是以境与有境的相互关系,以及彼此交融、圆满达成的方式,这就是它的含义。这里要说明的是:当两种欲以境与有境相结合的方式生起时,那十一种处所就称为欲界。而在色界和无色界中,只有纯粹的所缘欲在生起,所以那些处所不叫欲界。难道两种欲的结合在色界、无色界中就不存在吗?因为色界、无色界的法是所缘欲,而以色界、无色界为对象的渴爱与它们结合,这样烦恼欲的性质也应该成立吧?并非如此。因为这里所说的烦恼欲,特指属于下分结的、粗重的烦恼——欲贪。虽然按照摄颂“依总说有二种欲”把一切欲都列举出来,但通过“处所为四恶趣”等对境的限定,在这里“这两种”当中,作为欲的一部分、处于盖障状态的欲贪,被说为烦恼欲;而以这欲贪为所缘的法,才被取为所缘欲,并不是色界、无色界的渴爱以及它们所缘的法。这样就能明白了。这样一来,后面将要讲到的“有论师的欲界譬喻”也就能成立。因为这里所指的就是前面所说的那些欲,所以在色界、无色界中,对天宫、如意树、衣饰、微小善法等欲界法生起的欲贪,不叫烦恼欲;而作为其对象的天宫、如意树等微小法类,也不取为所缘欲。因此说“欲或欲想,在梵天界中不存在”。不过,当它们成为欲界众生相续中渴爱的对象时,与它结合而在色界、无色界中生起的微小法,仍应理解为就是所缘欲。另一种说法是:按照论释中来的方式,这里说的是无余的烦恼欲,包括欲爱、有爱、无有爱、灭爱等分类。在所缘欲方面,除了色界、无色界的异熟果这一点点之外,其余全部都在这里说到了。所以就无余生起而言,说“这欲有两种”。虽然这样说,但为了表明其中被取的是粗重的烦恼欲——粗重的欲贪,以及作为其对象的五种欲功德,所以说“依诸成就”。以圆满达成、以成功的方式,这就是含义。“行于”就是生起。iti这个词表示原因,因为这两种欲都行于此处,所以欲在这里行,就称为欲界,这就是含义。巴利
14. Sampajjanāni sampattiyo, tāsaṃ vasena visayavisayībhāvena aññamaññaṃ samosaraṇavasena, sampāpuṇanavasenāti attho. Iminā pana idaṃ dīpeti – yattha duvidhopi kāmo visayavisayībhāvena sahito pavattati, soyeva ekādasavidho padeso kāmāvacarasaññito . Yattha pana rūpārūpadhātuyaṃ kevalaṃ vatthukāmova pavattati, na so padeso kāmāvacaro nāmāti. Nanu ca duvidhopi sahito rūpārūpadhātūsu pavattati, rūpārūpāvacaradhammānaṃ vatthukāmattā, tadārammaṇabhūtānañca rūpārūpataṇhānaṃ taṃyogena kilesakāmabhāvasiddhitoti? Nayidamevaṃ orambhāgiyabhūtassa bahalakilesasseva kāmarāgassa idha kilesakāmabhāvena adhippetattā. ‘‘Uddānato duve kāmā’’ti sabbe kāme uddisitvāpi hi ‘‘padeso catupāyāna’’ntiādinā visayaniyamanena ‘‘duvidhopi aya’’nti ettha kāmekadesabhūto nīvaraṇāvatthāya kathito kāmarāgo kilesakāmabhāvena, tabbatthukāyeva dhammā vatthukāmabhāvena gahitā, na rūpārūpataṇhā, tabbatthukadhammā cāti ñāpīyati. Evañca katvā upari vakkhamānā sasatthāvacarūpamā upapannā hoti, yathāvuttānameva kāmānaṃ idha adhippetattā rūpārūpadhātūsu vimānakapparukkhavatthālaṅkāraparittakusalādibhedesu kāmāvacaradhammesu pavatto chandarāgo kilesakāmo nāma na hoti, na ca tabbatthubhūtaṃ vimānakapparukkhādiparittadhammajātaṃ vatthukāmo nāmāti siddhaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘kāmo vā kāmasaññā vā brahmaloke na vijjatī’’ti. Kāmāvacarasattasantānagatataṇhāya visayabhāve sati pana taṃyogena rūpārūpadhātūsupi pavattamāno parittadhammo vatthukāmoyevāti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā niddese āgatanayena niravaseso kilesakāmo kāmataṇhābhavataṇhāvibhavataṇhānirodhataṇhāpabhedo idha pavattati. Vatthukāmesupi appakaṃ rūpārūpavipākamattaṃ ṭhapetvā sabboyeva idha pavattatīti anavasesappavattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘kāmoyaṃ duvidhopi cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi evaṃ vuttaṃ, tesu pana bahalakilesakāmabhūto bahalakāmarāgo ca tabbatthukā pañca kāmaguṇā ca idha gahitāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sampattīnaṃ vasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sampajjanavasena, samijjhanavasenāti attho. Avacaratīti pavattati. Iti-saddo hetumhi, yasmā duvidhopi ayaṃ kāmo avacarati, tasmā kāmo ettha avacaratīti kāmāvacarasaññitoti attho.
15 15. 这些界大多数远离了成为天界与解脱之因、被认可为福德的状态,所以叫苦界。按地狱等来分,有四种苦界,也就是四苦界。“六”指的是四大王天、三十三天、夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天这六层天界。不过,住在须弥山脚下的阿修罗其实也算在三十三天里,所以没有把他们一起算进去说七种。人类因为心意增盛,所以叫“人”;意思是说,由于具足正念、勇猛,以及适合修梵行等功德,心意得以积聚增上、具有殊胜功德之心——不过这些人严格来说应当理解为指赡部洲的居民。正如经中所说:巴利
15. Saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasammatā ayā yebhuyyena apetāti apāyā. Nirayādivasena cattāro apāyā catupāyā. Channanti cātumahārājikatāvatiṃsayāmātusitānimmānaratiparanimmitavasavattisaṅkhātānaṃ channaṃ devalokānaṃ. Merupādavāsino pana asurā tāvatiṃsesuyeva saṅgayhantīti na tehi saddhiṃ sattannanti vuttaṃ. Manaso ussannatāya manussā, satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasatāya ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittatāyāti attho, te pana nippariyāyato jambudīpavāsino veditabbā. Yathāha –
比丘们,赡部洲的人以三种情况胜过北俱卢洲的人和忉利天的天人。是哪三种呢?勇敢、有正念,以及在这里能过梵行生活。巴利
‘‘Tīhi , bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpakā manussā uttarakuruke ca manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21).
其他大岛的居民由于与那些小岛居民形貌等相同,也被认作“人”。而世间人则因为他们是摩奴的后裔,就说他们是“人”。所谓“十一种”,是说在四恶趣中,畜生界和饿鬼界虽然没有各自单独划分出来的固定区域,但它们固定居住的地方,比如森林、大海、山脚之类,把这些地方也算进去,所以就有十一种。巴利
Tehi pana samānarūpāditāya saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi ‘‘manussā’’icceva paññāyiṃsu. Lokiyā pana manuno apaccabhāveneva ‘‘manussā’’ti vadanti . Ekādasavidhoti caturāpāyesu tiracchānapettivisayānaṃ visuṃ paricchinnassa okāsassa abhāvepi yattha te araññasamuddapabbatapādādike nibaddhavāsaṃ vasanti, tādisassa ṭhānassa gahitattā ekādasavidho.
16 有人会问:既然其他诸法也能生起、运行,那为什么只有欲界才因为“欲的游行之义”而得到这个名称呢?注释书回答说“因为被欲所标明”等等。这里,“其”指的就是这两种欲。“被标明”是指在十一种处所中很明显、很清楚。或者说,“其”是表示工具的属格用法,那么意思就是:以这两种欲,使十一种处所被标明、被施设。又或者说,“其”是表示业格的属格用法,意思就是:这十一种处所,被那两种欲所标明。所谓“与军队同行”,就是有军队的地方,也就是军队所游行之处。就像这样:比如在某个地方,带着军队的人在那里活动,即使其他两足、四足等众生也在那里活动,但因为那些带军队的人在那里很显眼,或者以他们为标志,那个地方就被认定为“带军队者游行之处”;同样,即使其他色界、无色界等众生也在那里活动,但因为这里是按“欲”来标明的,所以这个地方就被称为“欲界”。这个道理也适用于色界和无色界。巴利
16. Nanu cettha aññesampi dhammānaṃ pavattisambhavato kāmasseva avacaraṇavasena kathaṃ nāmalābhoti āha ‘‘assābhilakkhitattā’’tiādi. Tattha assāti imassa duvidhassa kāmassa. Abhilakkhitattāti ekādasavidhe padese pākaṭattā. Atha vā assāti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, tasmā anena duvidhena kāmena ekādasavidhassa padesassa abhilakkhitattā, paññāpitattāti attho. Atha vā upayogatthe sāmivacanavasena assa ekādasavidhassa padesassa tena duvidhena abhilakkhitattāti attho. Saha satthehīti sasatthā, yattha te avacaranti, so sasatthāvacaro, padeso. So viya. Yathā hi yasmiṃ padese sasatthā purisā avacaranti, so vijjamānesupi aññesu dvipadacatuppadādīsu avacarantesu tesaṃ tattha pākaṭattā, tehi vā abhilakkhitattā ‘‘sasatthāvacaro’’tveva paññāyati, evaṃ vijjamānesupi aññesu rūpāvacarādīsu avacarantesu abhilakkhaṇavasena ayaṃ padeso ‘‘kāmāvacaro’’tveva saññitoti. Esa nayo rūpārūpāvacaresu.
17-8 既然心被称为欲界心,但按照前面所说的方式,这里取的是处所,那么,在那里游行的心为什么叫欲界心呢?对此,论师说“它即是欲”等。连接的意思是:这个欲界心被认定为“欲”。就像色有被称为“色”——色有就是被命名为“色”。虽然没有明说“如”字,但从“如是”这个词的确定中就能得出。比如在“为获得色有而修习道”这句话里,本来应该说“为获得色有”,但色有被认定为“色”,这里就是这个意思。那么,它为什么这样被认定呢?论师说“由于后者的省略”等。或者,就像省略了后一个词而说出的色有被认定为“色”一样,同样,这个欲界心被认定为“欲”,这就是连接的意思。“于彼欲中”,就是在那个因为省略后一个合成词而被认定为“欲”的处所中。“此”,指这八种心。不过,从主题统摄的角度来取它时,一切欲界心的这个含义也都能得出,因为一切欲界心都在欲中游行。“常”,指一切时候,意思是“大多数时候”。用这个来说明:比如在战场上,大象大多数时候在那里游行,因此得名“战场游行者”,即使它到别处游行,因为多数时候在战场活动的缘故,仍然被认知为“战场游行者”;同样,这个心即使到别处游行,因为在欲界多数时候生起的缘故,就只被称为“欲界心”。这样一来,就回应了“那么,它难道不也应该因为游行于色界、无色界而得到色界心等名称吗”这个责难。这里有这样的意思——巴利
17-8. Nanu ca cittaṃ kāmāvacaranti vuttaṃ, yathāvuttanayena pana padesassa gahitattā kathaṃ tattha avacarantaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘svāya’’ntiādi. So ayaṃ kāmāvacaro ‘‘kāmo’’ti saññitoti sambandho. Rūpabhavo rūpanti yathā rūpabhavo rūpaṃ. Avuttopi hi yathāsaddo evaṃ-saddasanniṭṭhānato labbhati. Yathā ‘‘rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāvetī’’ti ettha ‘‘rūpabhavūpapattiyā’’ti vattabbe rūpabhavo ‘‘rūpa’’nti saññitoti ayamettha attho. Kathaṃ panesa evaṃ saññitoti āha ‘‘uttarassā’’tiādi. Atha vā yathā uttarassa padassa lopaṃ katvā udīrito esa rūpabhavo ‘‘rūpa’’nti saññito, evaṃ svāyaṃ kāmāvacaro kāmoti sambandho. Tasmiṃ kāmeti tasmiṃ uttarapadalopavasena kāmasaññite padese. Idanti idaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ cittaṃ. Adhikāravasena pana tassa gahaṇepi sabbesameva parittacittānamayamattho labbhati sabbesampi kāme avacaraṇato. Sadāti sabbakālaṃ, bāhulyenāti adhippāyo. Iminā pana idaṃ dīpeti – yathā saṅgāme yebhuyyena avacaranto ‘‘saṅgāmāvacaro’’ti laddhanāmo hatthī aññattha avacarantopi bāhullappavattivasena ‘‘saṅgāmāvacaro’’tveva paññāyati, evamidaṃ aññattha avacarantampi kāmaloke bāhullavuttito ‘‘kāmāvacara’’micceva vuttanti. Tena pana nanu cetaṃ rūpārūpabhavesupi avacaraṇato rūpāvacarādināmampi labheyyāti idaṃ codanaṃ pariharati. Hoti cettha –
“在诸欲中活动”这一说法,指的就是被称为欲界的东西;
即使游走在其他地方,也像在战场上活动的人一样。巴利
‘‘Kāmevacaratītyetaṃ, kāmāvacarasaññitaṃ; Sese avacarantampi, saṅgāmāvacaro yathā’’ti.
iti这个词表示原因。ca这个词表示把其他要说的内容也收进来。因此,因为省略了后面的词,欲界就被称为“欲”;又因为此心总是在那欲中活动,所以只说它是“欲界”,而不是说“欲界的活动处”,也不是说“色界”或“无色界”——这就是这里的意旨。“杀欲者”:以教说的智慧,能摧毁应受调伏者相续中的烦恼欲,具有这种摧毁烦恼欲特质的正自觉者。巴利
Iti-saddo hetumhi. Ca-saddo vattabbantarasamuccaye. Tena yasmā uttarapadalopena kāmāvacaro ‘‘kāmo’’ti saññito, yasmā ca tasmiṃ kāme idaṃ cittaṃ sadā avacarati, tasmā ‘‘kāmāvacara’’micceva kathitaṃ, na pana kāmāvacarāvacaraṃ, nāpi rūpārūpāvacaranti vāti adhippāyo. Kāmaghātināti desanāñāṇena vineyyasantānagatassa kilesakāmassa hananasīlena sammāsambuddhena.
19 再者,“令结生……运行”——或者说,因为不论在哪里生起,都只令它在欲有中结生并运行,所以把这种令它在欲中运行的状态称为“欲界”,也就是把ca缩短发音后的说法。这样,通过省略后词展示了词的构成方式之后,现在为了说明即使不省略后词,kāmāvacara这个词也能成立,所以说了“所属的,或在那里”。在那里,就是指在那欲有中。所属的,就是包含在内的意思。这里要表达的意旨如下——巴利
19.Paṭisandhiṃ…pe… avacārayatīti vāti atha vā yasmā yattha katthaci uppannampi kāme bhaveyeva paṭisandhiṃ avacārayati, tasmā idaṃ kāme avacārayatīti ‘‘kāmāvacara’’nti kathitaṃ cā-saddassa rassattaṃ katvāti attho. Evaṃ uttarapadalopavasena padasambhavaṃ dassetvā idāni vināpi uttarapadalopaṃ kāmāvacara-saddassa sambhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyāpannanti tatra vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatrāti tasmiṃ kāmabhave. Pariyāpannanti antogadhaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo –
哪些法是欲界法?从最下面的无间地狱算起,到最上面的他化自在天为止,在这范围之内、属于此范围、包含在此范围里的蕴、界、处——也就是色、受、想、行、识,这些法就是欲界法。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā kāmāvacarā? Heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ katvā uparito paranimmitavasavattī deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhadhātuāyatanā rūpaṃ vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ. Ime dhammā kāmāvacarā’’ti (dha. sa. 1287) –
因为这样说,就像投生到女人子宫里的畜生,虽然生在那种地方,由于它属于畜生胎,仍然只被称为畜生;同样,这个心即使生在色界、无色界的有中,由于它属于欲有,也就只被称为欲界。而它属于欲有,应当理解为:它是从无间地狱到他化自在天为范围、倾向于这十一处的欲爱的所缘。正如法护长老在《摄义分别》中也这样说:此处所说的“此处行”,是就无间地狱到他化自在天为范围的欲爱的所缘性而说的。这里词源应当这样理解:欲爱就是欲,它在这里以作所缘的方式行,所以叫欲界。这里难道不会犯下“什么是欲爱?就是以欲界法为所缘的渴爱。什么是欲界法?就是欲爱的对象”这样互相依赖的过失吗?不会。因为以无间地狱等十一处为所趋,把任何一种渴爱都把握为欲爱,而欲界法就由于是那种性质渴爱的所缘而被了知。或者,按烦恼欲和事欲两种,两种欲随其所应,以俱生的方式在这里行,所以叫欲界;或者,这个心以两种欲为所缘而行,所以叫欲界。又或者,就像坐在床上的人喊叫时,因为认知上不区分依赖者和所依赖者,就以所依赖者来说依赖者,说“床在喊叫”——同样,这个心因为依欲界有而生起,也就以所依赖者的称呼,被称为欲界。这里还有这样的说法:巴利
Vuttattā yathā manussitthiyā kucchismiṃ nibbattopi tiracchānagatiko tiracchānayoniyameva pariyāpannattā ‘‘tiracchāno’’tveva vuccati, evamidaṃ rūpārūpabhavesu uppannampi kāmabhavapariyāpannattā ‘‘kāmāvacara’’micceva kathitanti. Tappariyāpannatā cassa avīciparanimmitaparicchinnokāsaninnāya kāmataṇhāya visayabhāvatoti veditabbā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherena nikkhepakaṇḍepi ‘‘‘etthāvacarā’ti vacanaṃ avīciparanimmitaparicchinnokāsāya kāmataṇhāya visayabhāvaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti. Padasambhavo panettha evaṃ veditabbo – kāmataṇhā kāmo, so ettha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena avacaratīti kāmāvacaranti. Nanu cettha katamā kāmataṇhā, yā kāmāvacaradhammārammaṇā taṇhā. Katame kāmāvacaradhammā, ye kāmataṇhāvisayāti evaṃ itarītaranissayatādoso āpajjatīti ? Nāpajjati, avīciādiekādasokāsaninnatāya yaṃkiñci taṇhaṃ kāmataṇhābhāvena gahetvā taṃsabhāvāya taṇhāya visayabhāvena kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ upalakkhetabbabhāvato. Atha vā kilesavatthuvasena duvidhopi kāmo yathārahaṃ sahajātavasena ettha avacaratīti kāmāvacaraṃ, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā duvidhepi kāme etaṃ avacaratīti kāmāvacaraṃ. Atha vā mañcanissitakesu ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontesu nissayanissitānaṃ abhedassa buddhiyā gahitattā nissitakesu nissayūpacāravasena ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti vuccati, evametampi kāmāvacarabhave pavattanavasena tannissitattā nissayavohārena ‘‘kāmāvacara’’nti vuccati. Hoti cettha –
在这里,“欲界行”或者是指“在欲中行”。
或者从处所近行的角度说,它在存在中就是属于欲界的。巴利
‘‘Kāmovacaratītyettha, kāmevacaratīti vā; Ṭhānūpacārato vāpi, taṃ kāmāvacaraṃ bhave’’ti.
20 能产生应受供养的果报,又能使自己的心相续不断增长,所以叫“福”;因为是应当去做的,所以叫“行”;又因为它们是种种功德的依托,所以叫“事”——合起来就叫“福行事”。从数目上说,限定为十种,这十种就是福行事,所以叫“十福行事”。依这十种福行事而说,就是以十种福行事为方式,意思是成为由这十种福行事所构成的。不过,用“唯”这个字,是要表明:并不像色界、无色界和出世间的福行那样,仅仅依靠修习而生起。或者也可以说,“唯”字是用来限定的:只依十种福行事而生起,而不是依其他人所设想出来的赞他等福行事而生起。因此后面会说“一切随念福”等等。巴利
20. Pujjaphalanibbattanato, attasantānaṃ punanato ca puññāni, kattabbatāya kiriyā, tesaṃ tesaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ vatthutāya vatthūni cāti puññakiriyavatthūni. Gaṇanato dasaparimāṇattā dasa ca tāni puññakiriyavatthūni cāti dasa puññakiriyavatthūni, tesaṃ vasenāti dasapuññakriyavatthuvasena, dasapuññakiriyavatthubhāvena taṃmayaṃ hutvāti attho. Eva-kārena pana rūpārūpalokuttaraṃ viya na kevalaṃ bhāvanāvasenevāti dasseti. Atha vā dasapuññakiriyavatthuvaseneva pavattati, na pana parehi parikappitaparapasaṃsādipuññakiriyavatthuvasenāti eva-saddena avadhāraṇaṃ. Yato vakkhati ‘‘sabbānussatipuññañcā’’tiādi.
21 那么,这些十福行事到底是哪些呢?经文里说“依它们而令这八种心生起”,就是为了回应这个提问,为了按它们各自的自相来显示它们,所以才说了“布施、戒”等。其中,“以此而施与”,所以叫布施,也就是舍离的思。但在这里,因为是以心为主来讨论,所以应当取与布施相应的思。“戒”等也是如此。“令身语业等善加安立”,所以叫戒,意思是使身语业等得到良好的整饬。因为依靠善戒,身业等就不散乱,现在和未来都能带来利益安乐,被正确地安立、良好地整饬;也可以说,执持、护持,所以叫戒,这里的执持就是指善法的安住状态。以它来修习、串习、增长善法,所以叫修习。把自己相续中已经成就的证得施与他人,所以叫施所得。忙于各自应做之事的状态,叫承事。以它来开示,所以叫开示。以它来随喜所得,所以叫随喜得;但省略了前一部分,就说成“随喜”。见的正直状态,叫见正直,意思是使正见正直。为了自己或他人的利益,以这样的意乐正确地听闻,所以叫正闻。以恭敬的方式尊重、行合宜之行,所以叫恭敬。福行事的分类,叫福行事分类;但省略了中间的部分,说成“福事分类”,就像良种马所驾的车被称为“良种马车”一样。以上便是这里对词句的分析。巴利
21. Kāni pana tāni dasapuññakiriyavatthūni, yesaṃ vasena idaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ cittaṃ pavattatīti vuttanti imaṃ anuyogaṃ sandhāya tāni sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘dānaṃ sīla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha diyyati etenāti dānaṃ, pariccāgacetanā. Idha pana cittādhikāravasena taṃsampayuttaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Tathā ‘‘sīlā’’dīsupi. Sīlatīti sīlaṃ, kāyavacīkammāni samādahatīti attho. Susilyavasena hi kāyakammādīni avippakiṇṇāni sampati, āyatiñca hitasukhāvahāni sammā ṭhapitāni samāhitāni honti, sīlayati upadhāretīti vā sīlaṃ. Upadhāraṇaṃ panettha kusalānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvo. Bhāveti kusaladhamme āsevati vaḍḍheti etāyāti bhāvanā. Attano santāne nipphannā patti diyyati etenāti pattidānaṃ. Taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇe byāvaṭassa bhāvo veyyāvaccaṃ. Deseti etāyāti desanā. Pattiṃ anumodati etenāti pattānumodo. Pubbapadalopena pana ‘‘anumodo’’ti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhiyā ujubhāvo diṭṭhijuttaṃ, sammādiṭṭhiyā ujukaraṇanti attho. Attano, parassa vā hitajjhāsayavasena sammā suṇanti etāyāti saṃsuti. Pūjāvasena apacāyati sāmīciṃ karoti etenāti apacāyo. Puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ pabhedo puññakiriyavatthuppabhedo. Majjhapadalopavasena pana ‘‘puññavatthuppabhedo’’ti vuttaṃ yathā ājaññayutto ratho ‘‘ājaññaratho’’ti. Ayaṃ tāvettha padavicāro.
这里应当这样判定:有学圣者和凡夫为了利益他人,怀着恭敬与摄受的意愿,把自己现有的物品舍出去,在这个过程中生起的思,就叫作“施所成福行事”。漏尽者虽然也同样行布施,但那不叫福行事,所以不包括在这里所说的范围内。因为福能产生值得受人供养的果报,也能使自己的心相续不断增长清净;而在漏尽者的心相续中生起的布施,既不产生果报,也不能使他变得更清净——因为他的心相续已经彻底清净了。其余的福行事也是同样的道理。巴利
Ayaṃ pana vinicchayo – tattha sekhaputhujjanānaṃ paraṃ uddissa pūjānuggahakāmatāya attano vijjamānavatthupariccajanavasena pavattā cetanā dānamayapuññakiriyavatthu nāma. Khīṇāsavānampi tathā pavattā dānameva, sā pana puññakiriyā nāma na hotīti na idha adhippetā. Pujjaphalanibbattanato, hi attasantānaṃ punanato ca puññaṃ, na ca khīṇāsavasantāne pavattā phalanibbattikā hoti, na ca taṃ punāti visuddhasantānappavattattāti. Evaṃ sesesupi.
有人按照常戒、布萨戒等来受持五戒、八戒、十戒时;或者虽然没有正式受持,但依照家族传统习惯,远离所遇到的身恶行等时;或者在受具足戒的戒坛上受持防护时;或者圆满持守巴帝摩卡时;或者在已入现前之境时,闭塞眼等诸根时;或者对衣服等资具省察时;或者从诡诈等事中净化活命时——在这些情况下生起的思,就叫做戒所成福行事。
在这里有人问:如果有人这样想——“布施是我家族的传统、家族的习惯”,然后安住在习惯性戒上而行布施,那么他生起的施所成福行事,到底是施所成,还是戒所成?回答:只能是戒所成,因为这属于习惯性戒。即使这种思是通过施舍物品而生起的,但由于先前的加行以及后来的思都如此(作为习惯戒)而转起,所以它只是戒所成福行事,不是施所成。因为以恭敬和摄受的意欲而行布施,那才叫施所成。巴利
Yā pana niccasīlauposathasīlādivasena pañcasīlaṃ aṭṭhasīlaṃ dasasīlaṃ samādiyantassa, asamādiyantassapi kulacārittavasena sampattakāyaduccaritādīhi viramantassa, upasampadamāḷake saṃvaraṃ samādiyantassa, pātimokkhaṃ paripūrentassa, āpāthagatavisayesu cakkhādīni indriyāni thakentassa , cīvarādike ca paccaye paccavekkhantassa, kuhanādivatthuto ājīvaṃ parisodhentassa pavattā cetanā, ayaṃ sīlamayapuññakiriyavatthunāma. Etthāha – ‘‘dānaṃ nāmetaṃ mayhaṃ kulavaṃso kulacāritta’’nti evaṃ cārittasīle ṭhatvā dentassa pavattā dānamayapuññakiriyavatthu kiṃ, udāhu sīlamayanti? Sīlamayameva cārittasīlabhāvato. Deyyadhammapariccāgavasena pavattāpi hesā pubbābhisaṅkhārassa aparabhāge cetanāya ca tathā pavattattā sīlamayameva puññakiriyavatthu, na dānamayaṃ. Pūjānuggahakāmatāya hi dinnaṃ dānamayanti.
以“眼是无常”等语句,把无常、苦、无我这三相加到眼等诸法上,进行观照的人,生起的以种姓智和净化智为终点的观思,以及在遍等所缘中尚未达到安止、以种姓智为终点的遍作思,这叫做修所成福行事。即使未达到安止,也仍然是修习,但它不属于欲界,所以这里没有收录。老师们说:对无过失的明处、业处、工巧处的学习思,也归入修所成。在这里,布施者以“尽灭、坏灭”的方式观照所施之物而行布施时生起的思,也应知道,因为前后两部分的思都同样生起,所以也是修所成福行事。巴利
‘‘Cakkhu anicca’’ntiādinā pana cakkhādike tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā sammasantassa pavattā gotrabhuvodānapariyosānā vipassanācetanā, kasiṇādīsu ārammaṇesu appanaṃ appattā gotrabhupariyosānā parikammacetanā cāti ayaṃ bhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthu nāma. Appanāppattāpi bhāvanāyeva, sā pana na kāmāvacarāti idha na gahitā. Niravajjavijjāyatanakammāyatanasippāyatanānaṃ sikkhanacetanāpi bhāvanāmayeyeva samodhānaṃ gacchatīti ācariyā. Yā cettha deyyadhammaṃ khayato vayato sammasitvā dadato pavattā, sāpi pubbe viya ubhayabhāge cetanānaṃ tathā pavattattā bhāvanāmayapuññakiriyavatthuyevāti veditabbaṃ.
做了布施等任何善行之后,心里想“愿这份功德归于某某”,或者“愿它归于一切众生”,像这样希望自己所做的善业能与他人共享,这种心念生起的福业,就叫回向功德所成的福行事。有人问:这样回向功德,功德会耗尽吗?不会。就像点燃一盏灯,再用它点燃上千盏灯,不能说第一盏灯就烧完了,反而是前面的光和后面的光汇合在一起,变得非常广大。同样,回向功德的人不会有损失,只会增长,应当这样理解。那怎样才算已经回向了呢?在事前或事后,用言语说出来,或者只是在心里想:“愿我这份福业归于一切众生,或者归于某某”,这样就算是已经回向了。有些人说:“只要说‘我所做的善行,它的果报我施与出去’,那也已经是回向了。”不过诸位师长的结论是:因为善业才是根本,而且别人也只能对这份业生起随喜,所以应当回向的是业本身,随喜的人也应该随喜业本身。巴利
Dānādikaṃ yaṃ kiñci sucaritakammaṃ katvā ‘‘asukassa ca nāma patti hotu, sabbasattānaṃ vā hotū’’ti evaṃ attanā katassa parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ paccāsīsanavasena pavattā pattidānamayapuññakiriyavatthu nāma. Kiṃ panevaṃ pattiṃ dadato puññakkhayo hotīti? Na hoti, yathā pana ekaṃ dīpaṃ jāletvā tato dīpasahassaṃ jālentassa paṭhamadīpo khīṇoti na vattabbo, purimālokena pana saddhiṃ pacchimālokassa ekībhāve atimahāva hoti, evameva pattiṃ dadato parihāni nāma na hoti, vuḍḍhiyeva pana hotīti daṭṭhabbā. Kathaṃ panesā dinnā nāma hotīti? ‘‘Idaṃ me puññakammaṃ sabbasattānaṃ, asukassa vā pariṇamatū’’ti evaṃ pubbabhāge, pacchāpi vā vacībhedaṃ karontena manasā eva vā cintentena dinnā nāma hoti. Keci pana ‘‘yaṃ mayā kataṃ sucaritaṃ, tassa phalaṃ ‘dammī’ti vuttepi patti dinnāva hotī’’ti vadanti. Kusalakammādhikārattā pana parehi ca kammasseva anumoditabbattā kammameva dātabbaṃ, anumodentenapi kammameva anumoditabbanti idamettha ācariyānaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ.
对衣服等资具没有期待,以没有染污的发心,通过为沙门、婆罗门尽义务,以及通过照顾病人而生起的承事所成福行事。巴利
Cīvarādīsu paccāsārahitassa asaṃkiliṭṭhena ajjhāsayena samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ vattapaṭivattakaraṇavasena, gilānupaṭṭhānavasena ca pavattā veyyāvaccamayapuññakiriyavatthu nāma.
对于不贪著于物质供养等的心,站在解脱处的立场上,宣说自己所精通的法,以及同样地开示无过失的明处等,这种说法的行为所产生的福业事,叫做说法所成福行事。对于他人所做的任何善行,不论已回向或未回向,舍弃嫉妒与悭吝的污垢,以“善哉,太好了”的心态随喜,这种随喜所产生的福业事,叫做随喜所成福行事。以“有布施”等业自性智的方式使见解端正,这种见解端正所产生的福业事,叫做见正直业所成福行事。如果这样的话,与智不相应的心就不能获得见正直业所成福行事了吗?并非不能获得,因为前后的思也都包含在各自的福行事中。正如接下来要说的:巴利
Āmisakiñcakkhādinirapekkhacittassa attano paguṇaṃ dhammaṃ vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā desentassa, tatheva niravajjavijjāyatanādikaṃ upadisantassa ca pavattā desanāmayapuññakiriyavatthu nāma. Parehi kataṃ yaṃ kiñci sucaritakammaṃ dinnamadinnampi vā issāmaccheramalaṃ pahāya ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti anumodantassa pavattā anumodanapuññakiriyavatthu nāma, ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādinā kammassakatāñāṇavasena diṭṭhiṃ ujuṃ karontassa pavattā diṭṭhijukammapuññakiriyavatthu nāma. Yadi evaṃ ñāṇavippayuttacittassa diṭṭhijukammapuññakiriyatā na labbhatīti? No na labbhati purimapacchimacetanānampi taṃtaṃpuññakiriyāsveva saṅgaṇhanato. Tathā hi vakkhati –
前思、舍思以及后思这三种思;
有布施所成的福,其余几种也应照此说明。巴利
‘‘Purimā muñcanā ceva, parā tissopi cetanā; Hoti dānamayaṃ puññaṃ, evaṃ sesesu dīpaye’’ti.
因此,即使是在使见变得正直的那个时候,心确实是与智相应的,但在之前和之后的阶段,心也是不与智相应的;所以,见正直业之福业行事性对它也生起。巴利
Tasmā kiñcāpi ujukaraṇavelāyaṃ ñāṇasampayuttameva cittaṃ hoti, purimapacchābhāge pana ñāṇavippayuttampi hotīti tassāpi diṭṭhijukammapuññakiriyabhāvo uppajjati.
另有一些人这样说:以识和慧来看待事物,见就是见解,心就是慧。见的正直,就是见正直。那是什么?就是善的识,以及业自性智等正见。其中,善识在生起智的时候,也含摄了对自身善行的随念、对他人功德的称赞和忆念、以及前往皈依;业自性智则含摄了业道正见。而与布施等相应的智,应当知道就已包含在布施等里面了。像这样听闻这个法之后,按照那里所说的方法去修行,我将证得世间和出世间的殊胜功德,或者成为多闻的人之后,以说法来帮助他人——以这样的方式,为了自己或为了他人,以解脱处为顶点而听闻正法时,所生起的思,就叫作闻所成福行事。无过失的明处等的听闻思,也包含在这里面。见到应受供养的人、应受尊重的人、年长的人时,从座位上起身、接取衣钵、让路、礼拜、合掌、献上座位和花、香等供养,这样做时所生起的崇敬思,就叫作尊敬俱行福行事。因为承事和恭敬的区别是:为年长的人、有德行的人以及病人做各种事务,是承事;行合宜的礼节,是恭敬。巴利
Apare panāhu – viññāṇapaññāṇavasena dassanaṃ diṭṭhi, cittaṃ paññā ca. Diṭṭhiyā ujubhāvo diṭṭhijuttaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Kusalañca viññāṇaṃ kammassakatāñāṇādi ca sammādassanaṃ. Tattha kusalaviññāṇena ñāṇuppādepi attano sucaritānussaraṇaparaguṇapasaṃsāsaraṇagamanānaṃ saṅgaho, kammassakatāñāṇena kammapathasammādiṭṭhiyāti. Dānādisampayuttaṃ pana ñāṇaṃ dānādīsveva antogadhanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Evamimaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā tattha vuttanayena paṭipajjanto lokiyalokuttaraguṇavisesaṃ adhigamissāmi, bahussuto vā hutvā pare dhammadesanāya anuggaṇhissāmī’’ti evaṃ attano, paresaṃ vā vimuttāyatanasīsena saddhammaṃ suṇantassa pavattā savanamayapuññakiriyavatthu nāma. Niravajjavijjāyatanādisavanacetanāpi ettheva saṅgayhati. Pūjārahe, garuṭṭhāniye, mahallake ca disvā āsanā vuṭṭhahantassa pattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇamaggadānaabhivādanaañjalikammakaraṇaāsanapupphagandhādiabhihāraṃ karontassa ca pavattā bahumānacetanā apacitisahagatapuññakiriyavatthu nāma. Veyyāvaccāpacāyanānañhi ayaṃ viseso – vayasā, guṇena ca jeṭṭhānaṃ, gilānānañca taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇaṃ veyyāvaccaṃ, sāmīcikiriyā apacāyananti.
22-3 22-3. 这样,按照注释书里传下来的方式说明了十种福行事之后,现在为了按照经里传下来的方式,只说明布施、持戒、修习这三种,并且指出其余那些也被包含在这三种里面,所以说“归入摄集”等话。其中,回向功德和随喜功德归入布施所摄,因为它们的本性就是布施。布施确实是对治嫉妒和悭吝的,而回向和随喜也是对治嫉妒和悭吝的,所以因为对治相同、与布施具有同一特征,它们就归入布施所成的福行事中。承事和恭敬归入持戒所成的福中,因为它们的本性就是持戒的行为。说法、闻法和令见正直,则因为是对善法的修习、属于修习,所以归入修习所成的福中。不过有些人说:“说法的人和听法的人,按照说法所指示的方向运用智慧、通达特征,而说法和闻法本身能带来证悟,所以说法和闻法归入修习所成的福中。”又因为属于法布施的缘故,也可以说“说法归入布施所成的福中”。同样,令见正直的行为,具有在一切地方规范一切的特征。因为在布施等当中,任何善行只有被“有布施”等理趣所引生的正见净化之后,才会有大果报、大利益。因此,《长部注》中说:“令见正直的行为,则具有规范一切的特征。”不过,大众部和无畏山寺的住者们不把令见正直的行为单独作为一种福行来算。他们是这样做的:把布施、持戒、修习、赞叹、说法、随念、回向、承事、供养、忆念、皈依、称赞他人功德——也就是随念自己所作的福、皈依佛等、称赞他人的功德——这十二种列为福行事,不把令见正直的行为单独拿出来。再说“又只有三种”:前面十种虽然都一样,但再按简要来说,就只归为三种。巴利
22-3. Evaṃ aṭṭhakathāya āgatanayena dasapuññakiriyavatthūni dassetvā idāni sutte āgatanayena dānaṃ sīlaṃ bhāvanāti tīṇiyeva dassetuṃ tesu itaresampi saṅgahaṃ dīpento āha ‘‘gacchanti saṅgaha’’ntiādi. Tattha pattidānānumodanā dāne saṅgahaṃ gacchanti taṃsabhāvattā. Dānampi hi issāmaccherānaṃ paṭipakkhaṃ, etepi, tasmā samānapaṭipakkhatāya dānena saha ekalakkhaṇattā ete dānamayapuññakiriyavatthumhi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Veyyāvaccāpacāyanā sīlamaye puññe saṅgahaṃ gacchanti cārittasīlasabhāvattā. Desanāsavanadiṭṭhiujukā pana kusaladhammāsevanato bhāvanato bhāvanāmaye saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Keci pana ‘‘desento, suṇanto ca desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā lakkhaṇaṃ paṭivijjha deseti, suṇāti ca, tāni ca desanāsavanāni paṭivedhameva āharantīti desanāsavanaṃ bhāvanāmaye saṅgahaṃ gacchatī’’ti vadanti. Dhammadānabhāvato ‘‘desanā dānamaye saṅgahaṃ gacchatī’’tipi sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā diṭṭhijukammaṃ sabbatthāpi sabbesaṃ niyamanalakkhaṇattāti. Dānādīsu hi yaṃ kiñci ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattāya sammādiṭṭhiyāva visodhitaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsanti. Evañca katvā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhijukammaṃ pana sabbesaṃ niyamanalakkhaṇa’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305) vuttaṃ. Mahāsaṃghiyā pana abhayagirivāsino ca diṭṭhijukammaṃ visuṃ puññakiriyabhāvena na gaṇhanti. Tathā hi te dānaṃ sīlaṃ bhāvanā saṃsuti desanānussatimodanaṃ veyyāvaccapūjāsaraṇappattipasaṃsā cāti attanā katapuññānussaraṇaṃ buddhādīsu saraṇagamanaṃ paraguṇapasaṃsāti imāni tīṇi pakkhipitvā diṭṭhijukammaṃ aggahetvā dvādasa puññakiriyavatthūni paññāpenti. Puna tīṇevāti paṭhamaṃ dasāpi samānā puna saṅkhepato tīṇeva sambhonti.
24 24. 现在,为了说明他人所指出的随念福德等,其实都统摄在自己已经指出的那些项目当中,所以说了“一切随念福德”等话。其中,对自己所做过的一切善行的随念,就叫作“一切随念福德”。“称赞”是指:以清净的信心,对他人所做的福行和正行加以称赞、随喜,也就是感到满足的意思。“三皈依”:在这里,能忆念、能损害,所以叫“皈依”,也就是佛等三种宝。因为它们对于已经皈依的人,正是通过皈依这个行为,损害、灭除怖畏、恐惧、恶趣的苦恼。具有三个组成部分,所以叫“三”,这是对由三个部分组成的集合体的称呼;皈依的三,就是三皈依,意思是三种皈依。因为并不存在脱离组成部分的所谓集合体。不过在这里,通过说“三皈依”,或者是用邻近替代的说法,或者是省略了后面的词,实际要表达的是皈依的行为。因为三皈依本身并不是福行事。从意义上看,这是依“那位世尊确实是正自觉者、法是善说的、僧是善行的”等语句,在佛等上面获得净信而生起的思,它归入令见正直的行为当中;正是依靠它,这些才能成就。因为一个见解颠倒的人,这三种是不会生起的,所以它们必定归入令见正直的福行事中,不应被单独当作一种福行来理解,这就是其意图。因此说“没有疑问”。令见正直的行为,在简略说明时也被归入修习所成;但如果详细来说,就可能产生“到底在哪里”的疑问,所以这里没有说它们归入修习所成。或者,为了显示令见正直的行为对一切福行都具有大果报的决定作用,因为它是根本,所以特别说明它们单独归入其中。另有一些人说:“因为‘收摄者收摄,取者释放’这种说法,皈依的行为就像受持戒律一样,可以取持,所以归入戒所成。”还有人说:“皈依的行为因为是礼拜的状态,所以归入与恭敬相应的部分。”巴利
24. Idāni parehi niddisiyamānānaṃ puññānussaraṇādīnaṃ attanā niddiṭṭhesveva samodhānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbānussatipuññañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbasseva attanā katasucaritassa anussaraṇaṃ sabbānussatipuññaṃ nāma. Pasaṃsāti parehi katāya puññakiriyāya, sammāpaṭipattiyā ca vippasannacittena pasaṃsanaṃ, santussananti attho. Saraṇattayanti ettha saranti hiṃsantīti saraṇāni, buddhādīni tīṇi ratanāni. Tāni hi saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena bhayaṃ santāsaṃ duggatiparikkilesaṃ hiṃsanti vināsenti. Tayo avayavā assāti tayaṃ, tīhi avayavehi yuttasamudāyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, saraṇānaṃ tayaṃ saraṇattayaṃ, tīṇi saraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Na hi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma koci atthīti. Idha pana saraṇattayaggahaṇena upacārato, uttarapadalopato vā saraṇagamanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Na hi saraṇattayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma hoti. Atthato panetaṃ ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṃgho’’tiādinā buddhādīsu pasādapaṭilābhavasena pavattā cetanā diṭṭhijukammasmiṃ saṅgahaṃ yanti taṃvaseneva tesaṃ ijjhato. Na hi viparītadiṭṭhikassa imāni tīṇi sambhavanti, tasmā te ekantena diṭṭhijukammapuññakiriyavatthusmiṃ saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, na visuṃ puññakiriyabhāvena gahetabbāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘natthi saṃsayo’’ti. Diṭṭhijukammassa bhāvanāmayasaṅgahepi saṅkhepanayena bhāvanāmaye saṅgayhanti, vitthāranayena pana ‘‘kattha nu kho’’ti saṃsayo siyāti imesaṃ bhāvanāmayasaṅgaho na vutto. Diṭṭhijukammassa vā sabbesaṃ mahapphalabhāvaniyāmakattena mūlabhūtattā tassa padhānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ visuṃ tattha saṅgayhantīti vuttaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘saṅgaṇhanto saṅgaṇhāti, gaṇhanto ‘muñcatī’ti vacanato saraṇagamanassa sīlasamādāne viya gahaṇaṃ sambhavatīti sīlamaye saṅgayhatī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Saraṇagamanaṃ paṇipātabhāvato apacitisahagate saṅgayhatī’’ti keci.
25 25. 现在,为了说明:按照前面所说的福行事,依前分和后分而现起的思,也就在各自那里被归摄进去,所以说了“前分、释放”等话。其中,“前分”是指:为了布施,以如法、公平的方式产生施物的人,对已生起的施物想着“我要施舍”而思虑时,以及寻找应供者时,直到把施物交到接受者手中,或者作回向为止,这段时间里现起的思,就是前分思。而把施物交到接受者手中时的思,或者回向时的思,就叫释放思。这个词因为省略了鼻音,所以说成“mucanā”,或者原文本来就是“muñcanā”。“后分”是指:对自己已经施舍出去的施物不再执着,而以欢喜心回顾“善哉,我很好地布施了最上的布施”时,所生起的后分思。前分思、释放思、后分思这三种思合在一起,就成为布施所成的福,叫做布施福行事,这就是它的意思。因为考虑到“福”这个词,所以用单数说“成为”。现在,为了把所说的这个道理类推到其余福行事上,说“如此,应于其余中阐明”。“其余”是指:在戒等福行事中,应当按上面所说的方式阐明,比如:“想着‘我要护戒’时,前往寺院想‘我要出家’时,现起的思是前分思;受戒时、出家时、圆满戒时,生起的思是中分思;回顾‘我已圆满’时,生起的思是后分思。如此,这三种思合在一起,就叫戒所成的福行事。”应当这样阐明、开示其义。有人问:自己所行福的随念思,已经归入令见正直的行为中,而这里的后分思正是那同一个思,那它怎么能被包含在戒等里面呢?这不算过失,因为所缘不同,二者有差别。福随念只以自己所行的福为所缘,而这里的后分思则以该事物(如戒等)为所缘,二者的差别是显而易见的。巴利
25. Idāni yathāvuttapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ purimapacchimabhāgavasena pavattamānāpi cetanā tattha tattheva saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘purimā muñcanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha purimāti dānatthāya deyyadhammaṃ dhammena samena uppādentassa, uppannaṃ ‘‘pariccajissāmī’’ti cintentassa, dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesantassa ca yāva vatthuno paṭiggāhakassa hatthe vissajjanaṃ, pariṇāmanaṃ vā, tāva pavattā pubbabhāgacetanā. Paṭiggāhakassa pana hatthe vissajjanacetanā, pariṇāmanacetanā vā muñcanacetanā nāma. Sāyeva niggahītalopena ‘‘mucanā’’ti vuttā. ‘‘Muñcanā’’itiyeva vā pāṭho. Parāti attanā vissaṭṭhavatthumhi ālayaṃ akatvā ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu aggaṃ dānaṃ me dinna’’nti somanassacittena paccavekkhantassa uppannā aparabhāgacetanā. Tissopi cetanāti iti ayañca purimā cetanā, ayañca muñcanacetanā, ayañca aparacetanāti tissopi cetanā ekato hutvā dānamayaṃ puññaṃ hoti, dānamayapuññakiriyavatthu nāma hotīti attho. ‘‘Puñña’’nti padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘hotī’’ti ekavacananiddeso. Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ sesesupi atidisanto āha ‘‘evaṃ sesesu dīpaye’’ti. Sesesūti sīlādīsu puññakiriyavatthūsu evaṃ yathāvuttanayena ‘‘sīlaṃ ‘rakkhissāmī’ti cintentassa, ‘pabbajissāmī’ti vihāraṃ gacchantassa pavattā purimacetanā, sīlaṃ samādiyantassa, pabbajantassa, sīlaṃ paripūrentassa uppannā majjhimacetanā, ‘pūritaṃ me’ti paccavekkhantassa uppannā aparacetanāti evaṃ tissopi cetanā ekato hutvā sīlamayapuññakiriyavatthu nāmā’’tiādinā dīpaye, pakāseyyāti attho. Nanu ca attanā katapuññānussaraṇacetanā diṭṭhijukammasaṅgahitā, ayañca aparacetanā sāyevāti kathamassā tattha saṅgahoti? Nāyaṃ doso, visayabhedena ubhinnampi visesasabbhāvato. Puññānussaraṇañhi attanā katapuññavisayameva. Ayaṃ pana tabbatthuvisayāti pākaṭoyeva dvinnaṃ visesoti.
到这里为止,已经按各自的自体和归类,说明了“唯依十种福行事而生起”这句话里所说的十种福行事。现在为了显示这样生起时各自生起的方式和对象,就开始说“现在”等话。其中,“此”是指将要说明的内容。应当布施的法就是施物,也就是食物等十种物品。正如所说:巴利
Ettāvatā ca yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dasapuññakiriyavatthuvaseneva pavattatī’’ti, tattha dasapuññakiriyavatthūni sarūpato, saṅgahato ca niddisitvā idāni tathāpavattamānassa cassa pāṭekkaṃ pavattākāravisayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idānī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ayanti vakkhamānanidassanaṃ. Dātabbo dhammo deyyadhammo, annādidasavidhaṃ vatthu. Vuttañhi –
食物、饮料、衣服、车乘,花鬘、香料、涂香,
床座、住所和灯明,这些就是十种布施之物。巴利
‘‘Annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ, mālāgandhavilepanaṃ; Seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṃ, dānavatthū dasāvime’’ti.
受施者等:以受施者为首,包括说法者、时间、善友等在内,这些就是受施者等。施物和受施者等的圆满具足,就是施物与受施者等的成就。其中,施物本身殊胜、合人心意,又是以如法、正当的方式获得的,这是施物的成就。受施者是最高无上的应供者,这是受施者的成就。很难得到饮食等物品的地方,是地方的成就。同样,那样的时间就是时间的成就。因为在很难得到饮食等的地方或时间布施,由于意愿强烈,果报就大,而且成为喜的因,所以这些被说为布施的成就。善友的成就,就是有善友。因为依靠善友,在布施等善行中,心就能达到踊跃。侍者的成就,就是得到即使没有吩咐也能把各种事务办好的、不放逸的侍从。或者,其他喜的因,是指信心强、见解清净等不同种类,以及其他让人欢喜的原因。依止,就是靠近、依靠,这是它的意思。欢喜踊跃,就是因喜而欢喜、因喜而踊跃,这两者一起表示更强烈的喜悦。有……生起:就是依这样生起的十种正见事——有布施,有供养,有祭祀,有善行恶行之业的果报,有此世,有他世,有母,有父,有化生有情,世间有正行、正修的沙门婆罗门,他们自己以神通证知、现证此世和他世之后而安住——以及依择法觉支的处所等而生起。因为“等”这个字,不只是包括九种正见事,也包括择法觉支的处所等。以正确的道理生起的见解,或者值得称赞的见解,就是正见,即那正见。令它在前,就是把它放在首位。而这也是就同时生起和在前生起来说的,因为像“诸法以意为先”等说法中,所指的是相应关系。巴利
Paṭiggāhako ādi yesaṃ desakālamittādīnaṃ te paṭiggāhakādayo, deyyadhammassa, paṭiggāhakādīnañca sampatti sampannatā deyyadhammapaṭiggāhakādisampatti. Tattha deyyadhammassa paṇītamanāpabhāvo dhammena samena uppannabhāvo deyyadhammasampatti. Paṭiggāhakānaṃ aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvo paṭiggāhakasampatti. Dullabhaannapānādiko deso desasampatti. Tādisova kālo kālasampatti. Dullabhaannapānādike hi dese, kāle vā dinnaṃ ajjhāsayassa balavatāya mahapphalaṃ, somanassahetukañca hoti, tasmā te dānassa sampattivasena vuttā. Mittasampatti pana kalyāṇamittabhāvo. Kalyāṇamittañhi nissāya dānādīsu cittaṃ odagyappattaṃ hoti. Paricārikasampatti pana anāṇattiyāpi taṃtaṃkiccasampādane appamattassa paricārikajanassa paṭilābho. Aññaṃ vā somanassahetunti saddhābahulatāvisuddhidiṭṭhitādibhedaṃ aññaṃ somanassakāraṇaṃ vā. Āgammāti upāgamma, paṭiccāti attho. Haṭṭhapahaṭṭhoti somanassavasena haṭṭho ceva pahaṭṭho ca. Ubhayenapi adhikasomanassaṃ vuttaṃ. Atthi…pe… pavattanti ‘‘atthi dinnaṃ, atthi yiṭṭhaṃ, atthi hutaṃ, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko, atthi ayaṃ loko, atthi paro loko, atthi mātā, atthi pitā, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā, ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharantī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.441) evaṃ pavattaṃ dasavidhaṃ sammādiṭṭhivatthuvasena ceva dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyādīnaṃ vasena ca pavattaṃ. Ādi-saddena hi na kevalaṃ navannaṃyeva sammādiṭṭhivatthūnaṃ gahaṇaṃ, atha kho dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyānampi saṅgaho. Sammā ñāyena pavattā diṭṭhi, pasatthā vā diṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhi, taṃ. Purakkhatvāti pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā. Tañca kho sahajātapubbaṅgamavasena ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 1-2) viya sampayogassa adhippetattā.
不被劝导:因为不因贪、悭等而在修福之事上退缩,是自己不被劝导,也不是被他人某个人劝导。因为这是从自性上显示福行的生起。而说“被他人”,则是为了显示他人明显的劝导。“第一”:按说法的次第,或按此处所列的次第,是第一。“大善心”:因为具足喜俱等支分,所以是广大的善心。或者,因为能牵引最后有菩萨的结生,所以是广大、应受尊敬的善心,称为大善心。因为据说一切知菩萨的结生,是以慈为先导的三因喜俱无行心的果报。在这里,从“施物……欢喜踊跃”这一段,说明了此心的喜俱性;“令正见在前”说明了智相应性;而“不被劝导”则说明了无行性,应当这样理解。巴利
Anussāhitoti lobhamacchariyādivasena puññakiriyāya saṅkocaṃ anāpajjanato attanā, parena vā kenaci anussāhito hutvā. Sabhāvato hi puññappavattidassanamidaṃ. Parehīti pana parapākaṭussāhadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Paṭhamanti desanākkamena, idha niddiṭṭhakkamena vā paṭhamaṃ. Mahākusalacittanti somanassasahagatatādiaṅgapāripūriyā mahantaṃ kusalacittaṃ. Atha vā pacchimabhavikabodhisattānaṃ paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanato mahantaṃ pūjitaṃ kusalacittanti mahākusalacittaṃ. Sabbesampi hi sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ paṭisandhi mettāpubbaṅgamassa tihetukasomanassamayassa asaṅkhārikacittassa vipākoti vuttaṃ. Ettha ‘‘deyyadhamma…pe… haṭṭhapahaṭṭho’’ti ettāvatā imassa somanassasahagatabhāvamāha, ‘‘sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkhatvā’’ti ñāṇasampayuttabhāvaṃ, ‘‘anussāhito’’ti pana iminā asaṅkhārikabhāvanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
按前面所说的方式,就是指“依靠施物、受施者等各方面的圆满,或者依靠其他能让人心生欢喜的因素”这样所说的方式。被鼓动:因为对施物有所期待等,又因为对戒律成就等没有坚定意愿等,使善行退缩;这时由自己或别人某个人来鼓动。至于“由他人”,则是按前面所说的方式理解。关联是:他做布施等种种善业。“就是那一种”:因为与喜俱等状态相似,所以这样说。对于相似的事物,也会有这样的称呼,就像说“就是那只鹧鸪,就是那些药”一样。不过在这里,“被鼓动”这个词显示的是有行。其余部分按前面所说的方式理解。关于这个含义:“在这个有行一词所表达的含义中”,也就是在以应当被鼓动的心为本质的含义中,以那为对象的意思。“先前的努力”:当善行退缩发生时,从中脱离出来,以鼓励的方式生起的心之努力。这里用“先前”这个词,是因为这样的努力属于先前已经如此生起的加行,并不是说它在时间上一定更早。巴利
Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘deyyadhammapaṭiggāhakādisampattiṃ, aññaṃ vā somanassakāraṇaṃ āgammā’’ti evaṃ vuttanayena. Ussāhitoti deyyadhamme sāpekkhāditāya, sīlasampadādīsu anadhimuttatādīhi ca puññakiriyāya saṅkocāpajjanato attanā, parena vā kenaci ussāhito. Parehīti pana vuttanayameva. Karoti dānādīni puññānīti sambandho. Tamevāti somanassasahagatādinā taṃsadisatāya vuttaṃ. Hoti hi taṃsadisepi taṃvohāro yathā ca ‘‘sāyeva tittirī, tāniyeva osadhānī’’ti. Ettha pana ‘‘ussāhito’’ti iminā sasaṅkhārikataṃ dasseti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Imasmiṃ panattheti imasmiṃ sasaṅkhārikasaddābhidheyye, ussāhitabbacittasaṅkhāte atthe taṃvisayeti attho. Pubbappayogassāti puññakiriyāya saṅkoce jāyamāne tato vivecetvā samussāhanavasena pavattassa cittappayogassa. Pubba-ggahaṇaṃ panettha tathāpavattapubbābhisaṅkhāravasena so payogo hotīti katvā vuttaṃ, na tassa pubbakālikatāyāti vuttovāyamattho.
因为看见比丘等人的修行,也就是看见他们舍弃布施之物、礼拜等修行。愚人就是没有智慧的人,他们只靠吸气和呼气活着,不是靠智慧活着,这就是这里的意思。愚人就是愚童。但这里说的他们,是指还没有生起“有布施”等正见、因此没有智慧的孩子们。这里用“愚童”这个说法,是为了表明他们很明显是愚笨的。而在急忙布施等时候,其他人的心也是与智慧不相应的。他们生起了喜悦,所以叫生喜,就是喜悦已经生起的意思。急速,是因为想赶快布施,所以在生起的同时就立刻去做。巴利
Paṭipattidassanenāti bhikkhū disvā deyyadhammapariccajanavandanādipaṭipattidassanena. Balanti anantīti bālā, assāsitapassāsitamatteneva jīvanti, na paññājīvitenāti adhippāyo. Bālāyeva bālakā. Te pana idha ‘‘atthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattāya sammādiṭṭhiyā abhāvena asañjātabuddhino dārakā. Pākaṭavasena cettha bālaka-ggahaṇaṃ. Sahasā karaṇādikāle pana itaresampi ñāṇavippayuttaṃ hotīti. Somanassaṃ jātaṃ etesanti somanassajātā, jātasomanassāti attho. Sahasāti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ dātukāmatāya uppattisamakālameva.
在这里,“由见修行”这句话,是说明他人没有加行;“由已生惯习”这句话,是说明自己没有加行。这两者都表明此心是无行的。“愚童”“急速”这些词,是说明它与智不相应;“比丘……生喜”是说明它与喜俱。或者,由于“修行……惯习”表明了无行性,而“愚童比丘……生喜”等词表明了智不相应与喜俱性,所以“急速”一词所显示的,正是前面所说的智不相应无行性。这样一来,从逆次来说,就显示了喜俱等性质;从顺次来说,则由“生喜”显示喜俱性,由取“急速”显示智不相应无行性。“由修行……见”这些词则是说明喜俱等性质的原因。“他们”指那些亲属,或者指那些愚童。“依喜乐因之无有”这一句应当只看作举例,因为面对中庸所缘时,像这样的心行等也唯以舍俱为因。心中没有喜,人也就没有喜,所以说“于四等中”,是依人而说,意思是行善的人没有喜。“如是”等是结论。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘paṭipattidassanenā’’ti iminā paresaṃ payogābhāvamāha, ‘‘jātaparicayā’’ti attano payogābhāvaṃ. Ubhayenāpi imassa asaṅkhārikabhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Bālakā, sahasā’’ti ca imehi ñāṇavippayuttabhāvamāha, ‘‘bhikkhū…pe… jātā’’ti somanassasahagatabhāvaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘paṭipatti…pe… paricayā’’ti iminā asaṅkhārikabhāvassa ‘‘bālakā bhikkhū…pe… jātā’’ti ca imehi ñāṇavippayuttasomanassasahagatabhāvassa ca dīpitattā ‘‘sahasā’’ti vacanena yathāvuttameva ñāṇavippayuttaasaṅkhārikabhāvaṃ pakāseti. Evaṃ sati paṭilomato somanassasahagatādibhāvo dassito hoti. Anulomato pana ‘‘somanassajātā’’ti iminā somanassasahagatabhāvaṃ, sahasā-ggahaṇena ñāṇavippayuttāsaṅkhārikabhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘‘Paṭipatti…pe… disvā’’ti ettāvatā pana somanassasahagatādibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ vuttanti. Teti te ñātakā, te bālakāti vā attho. ‘‘Somanassahetūnaṃ abhāvaṃ āgammā’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Majjhattārammaṇaṃ tathārūpe cetobhisaṅkhārādayopi hi upekkhāsahagatatāya kāraṇamevāti. Cittassa somanassābhāve puggalassapi somanassarahitatā hotīti ‘‘catūsupi…pe… hontī’’ti puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, somanassarahitā honti puññaṃ karontāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi nigamanaṃ.
在这八种识当中,从喜俱到舍俱,舍俱更强;从智不相应到智相应,智相应更强;从有行到无行,同类的当中无行更强。不同类的,则依据受、智、加行的差别而有强有弱。也就是说,从喜俱三因无行到舍俱三因有行,后者更强;从舍俱二因无行到喜俱三因无行,后者更强。这样,从第四心到第三心更强,从第三心到第八心更强,从第八心到第七心更强,从第七心到第二心更强,从第二心到第一心更强,从第一心到第六心更强,从第六心到第五心更强。应当这样了知这些心的强弱层次。巴利
Imesu pana aṭṭhasu viññāṇesu somanassasahagatato upekkhāsahagataṃ balavataraṃ, ñāṇavippayuttato ñāṇasampayuttaṃ, sasaṅkhārikato asaṅkhārikaṃ sadisaṃ balavataraṃ. Visadisaṃ pana vedanāñāṇappayogavasena balavaṃ, dubbalañca hoti. Somanassasahagatatihetukaasaṅkhārikato hi upekkhāsahagatatihetukasasaṅkhārikaṃ balavataraṃ, upekkhāsahagataduhetukaasaṅkhārikato somanassasahagatatihetukaasaṅkhārikaṃ balavataraṃ. Iti catutthacittato tatiyacittaṃ balavataraṃ, tato aṭṭhamacittaṃ, tato sattamacittaṃ, tato dutiyacittaṃ, tato paṭhamacittaṃ, tato chaṭṭhacittaṃ, tato pañcamacittanti evamimesaṃ balavabalavatarabhāvo veditabbo.
26 26. 这样,按照巴利经文中传来的方式,从受、智、加行的差别指出八种性之后,现在为了也依义注中所说的福行等显示其分类,所以说“十种福行等”。通过“等”这个词,应当看到它统摄了六种所缘、四种增上、三种业以及下劣等的差别。因此他们说——巴利
26. Evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena vedanāñāṇappayogabhedato aṭṭhavidhataṃ niddisitvā idāni aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatapuññakiriyādīnaṃ vasenapi pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dasa puññakriyādīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena channaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ, catunnaṃ adhipatīnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ kammānaṃ, hīnādibhedassa ca saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tenevāhu –
按顺序,通过福事,以及所缘和增上
善巧于理路的人,也应当从业、劣等等等为始来计数。巴利
‘‘Kamena puññavatthūhi, gocarādhipatīhi ca; Kammahīnādito cāpi, gaṇeyya nayakovido’’ti.
27 现在,为了把这种状态运作时,按照各种不同情况所能得到的数量界限汇总起来展示,所以说了“一万七千”等。那里的计算应当这样理解:先说这八种识,因为依十种作福德事而运作,所以每一种有十种,成为八十种心;它们又因为在六种所缘中运作,所以乘以六,成为四百八十;它们又因为与四种增上结合,所以乘以四,成为一千九百二十;它们又因为以身、语、意三种业为准,所以乘以三,成为五千七百六十;它们又因为分下品、中品、上品,所以乘以三,成为一万七千二百八十。可是,与智不相应的心没有审察增上与之结合,所以按增上计算只有一千六百八十;再按业等汇总,就成为一万五千二百。不是这样吗?确实如此。不过,这是不依随顺文流而计算,而采用了增上的计算,所以不应认为因此就减少了数量。巴利
27. Idāni tathāpavattamānassa tassa yo yo tesaṃ tesaṃ vasena labbhamāno gaṇanaparicchedo, taṃ sampiṇḍitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sattarasa sahassānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthevaṃ gaṇanā veditabbā – imāni tāva aṭṭha viññāṇāni dasannaṃ puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ vasena pavattanato paccekaṃ dasa dasāti katvā asīti cittāni honti, tāni ca chasu ārammaṇesu pavattanato chagguṇitāni sāsītikāni cattāri satāni honti, tāni catunnaṃ adhipatīnaṃ sahayogavasena catugguṇitāni sahassaṃ, vīsādhikāni ca nava satāni honti, tāni ca kāyavacīmanosaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ kammānaṃ vasena tiguṇitāni sasaṭṭhisattasatādhikāni pañca sahassāni honti, tāni ca hīnamajjhimapaṇītabhedato tiguṇitāni sāsītikadvisatādhikāni sattarasa sahassāni hontīti. Nanu ca ñāṇavippayuttacittānaṃ vīmaṃsādhipatisahayogābhāvato adhipativasena sahassaṃ, sāsītikāni ca cha satāni hontīti tāni kammādīnaṃ vasena sampiṇḍitāni vīsasatādhikāni pannarasa sahassāni bhavantīti? Saccametaṃ, sotapatitavasena pana taṃ anādiyitvā adhipatigaṇanā gahitāti na tassa vasena gaṇanahāni katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
有人会问:不是说过了“善业是有果报的”吗?那它到底怎样、在哪里、结什么果呢?针对这个质问,注释者才说“然而那……”等等。
因为三因的善业,能带来三因或二因的结生,不会带来无因的结生。当它产生三因结生时,在生命流转过程中能成熟十六种果报;当它产生二因结生时,则成熟十二种。二因的善业则能产生二因和无因的结生,不能产生三因结生。当它产生二因结生时,在流转中成熟十二种;当它产生无因结生时,则成熟八种。
至于那些依据传承主张果报随行蕴差别而有不同的人,按他们的观点,三因善业成熟十二种或十种果报,二因善业成熟十种或八种,所以说“随其相应”。
由于具有种种圆满处所的缘故,所以是“善的”;由于应当前往的缘故,所以是“趣处”;因此“善趣”就是欲界的存在,也就是欲界善趣。在那欲界善趣中。
在“有与受用的圆满”这句话里,“有”就是存在,这里指的是被称为生有的那些果报蕴和业生色法;“受用”就是应当享受的,是在流转中应当获得的圆满。或者说,“有”是结生,“受用”是连同其余果报和业生色法一起,在流转中应当获得的圆满。有和受用合起来就是“有与受用”,它们本身就是圆满的状态,所以叫“圆满”;或者它们的圆满就叫“有与受用的圆满”。它产生这些,也就是以能生的力量和以强力助缘的力量来成就,这就是意思。
在这里,是就“有与受用的圆满”完全没有遗漏地都能得到的地方,才说“在欲界善趣中”。不过,除了有因的果报之外,那些流转中的果报和业生色法这类“有”的圆满,以及某些“受用”的圆满,或者仅仅是受用的圆满,在善趣和恶趣中也都一样会产生。因为龙、金翅鸟等也有跟天人相似的可意受用物,也有以那些为对象的果报心,还有金色身、妙音声等等,这一切都是欲界善业的果报。不善业不可能有可喜的果报。因为这样说过:“这是不可能的,没有这样的道理:不善业会有可喜、可爱的果报。”巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘savipākaṃ kusala’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ pana kathaṃ, kuhiṃ, kiṃ phalatīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘taṃ panā’’tiādi. Yasmā tihetukaṃ kusalaṃ tihetukaṃ vā duhetukaṃ vā paṭisandhiṃ deti , nāhetukaṃ paṭisandhiṃ deti. Yadā ca tihetukaṃ paṭisandhiṃ janeti, tadā pavatte soḷasa vipākāni abhinipphādeti. Yadā dvihetukaṃ, tadā dvādasa. Duhetukaṃ pana duhetukamahetukañca paṭisandhiṃ janeti, na tihetukaṃ. Yadā ca duhetukaṃ janeti, tadā pavattiyaṃ dvādasa. Yadā ahetukaṃ, tadā aṭṭha. Ye pana āgamanato vipākassa saṅkhārabhedamicchanti, tesaṃ matena tihetukaṃ dvādasa, dasa vā vipaccati, duhetukaṃ dasa, aṭṭha vā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘yathānurūpa’’nti. Nānāvidhasampattiṭṭhānabhāvato sobhanā, gantabbato gati cāti sugati, kāmāvacarabhavova sugati kāmāvacarasugati. Tassaṃ kāmāvacarasugatiyaṃ. Bhavabhogasampattinti ettha ca bhavatīti bhavo, upapattibhavasaṅkhātānaṃ vipākakkhandhakaṭattārūpānametaṃ gahaṇaṃ, bhuñjitabbato bhogo, pavattiyaṃ paṭilabhitabbasampatti, bhavoti vā paṭisandhi, bhogo sesavipākakaṭattārūpehi saha pavattiyaṃ paṭilabhitabbā sampatti, bhavo ca bhogo ca bhavabhogo, teyeva sampannabhāvato sampatti, tesaṃ vā sampatti bhavabhogasampatti, taṃ abhinipphādeti, janakavasena ca upanissayavasena ca sādhetīti attho. Ettha ca bhavabhogasampattīnaṃ niravasesato labbhamānaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kāmāvacarasugatiya’’nti vuttaṃ. Sahetukavipākavajjaṃ pana pavattivipākakaṭattārūpasabhāvaṃ bhavasampattiṃ, ekaccabhogasampattiñca, bhogasampadameva vā avisesena sugatiyaṃ duggatiyampi abhinipphādetiyeva. Nāgasupaṇṇādīnampi hissa devasampattisadisaṃ manuññaṃ bhogajātaṃ, tabbisayāni ca vipākacittāni, suvaṇṇatāsussaratādi ca taṃ sabbaṃ kāmāvacarakusalasseva phalaṃ. Na hi akusalassa iṭṭhaphalaṃ atthi. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ akusalassa iṭṭho kanto vipāko saṃvijjatī’’ti.
色界善法注释巴利
Rūpāvacarakusalavaṇṇanā
现在,因为接着欲界善之后,已经到了解释前面列出的色界善的时候,所以为了说明它,就开始说“在其余中”等话。其中,“在其余中”是指从前面所说的欲界善之外的其余中,也就是色界等当中的意思。依有依处而是一种,因为它完全依赖于依处的缘故。因为在无色界中,得不到色界法,这是由于无色界有情是通过修习离色而转起的,而且不再有色界禅那等至的缘故。巴利
Idāni yasmā kāmāvacarakusalānantaraṃ uddiṭṭhassa rūpāvacarakusalassa niddesāvakāso anuppatto, tasmā taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘itaresū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha itaresūti yathāvuttakāmāvacarakusalato itaresu, rūpāvacarādīsūti attho. Savatthukato ekavidhaṃ ekantena vatthusannissitattā . Na hi arūpadhātuyaṃ rūpāvacaradhammā labbhanti rūpavirāgabhāvanāya nibbattattā puna rūpāvacarajjhānasamāpattiyā abhāvato.
关于下等、中等、上等的区分:在这里,应该像前面那样,根据主导因素的劣等、中等、上等状态,来对应禅那的劣等、中等、上等状态。或者也可以这样理解:只是获得却很少修习的,是下等,因为它极其微弱;修习不够充分、没有完全掌握自在的,是中等;修习极其充分、一切都完全掌握自在的,是上等。同样,为了追求广大福报而运作的,是下等;为了世间神通而运作的,是中等;由安住于圣者境界、以希求远离而运作的,是上等。或者,为了自利而运作的,是下等;纯粹以无贪的意乐而运作的,是中等;为了利他而运作的,是上等。或者,以轮回的意乐而运作的,是下等;以远离的意乐而运作的,是中等;以出离轮回的意乐、作为出世间法基础而运作的,是上等。巴利
Hīnamajjhimapaṇītabhedatoti ettha pubbe viya adhipatīnaṃ hīnādibhāvehi jhānassa hīnādibhāvo yojetabbo. Atha vā paṭiladdhamattamanāsevitaṃ hīnaṃ paridubbalabhāvato, nātisubhāvitaṃ aparipuṇṇavasibhāvaṃ majjhimaṃ, ativiya subhāvitaṃ pana sabbaso paripuṇṇavasibhāvaṃ paṇītaṃ. Tathā uḷārapuññaphalakāmatāvasena pavattitaṃ hīnaṃ, lokiyābhiññatthāya pavattitaṃ majjhimaṃ, vivekakāmatāya ariyabhāve ṭhitena pavattitaṃ paṇītaṃ. Attahitāya vā pavattitaṃ hīnaṃ, kevalaṃ alobhajjhāsayena pavattitaṃ majjhimaṃ, parahitāya pavattitaṃ paṇītaṃ. Vaṭṭajjhāsayena vā pavattitaṃ hīnaṃ, vivekajjhāsayena pavattitaṃ majjhimaṃ, vivaṭṭajjhāsayena lokuttarapādakatthaṃ pavattitaṃ paṇītaṃ.
从行道等的差别来说,就是按苦行道、迟通达等行道与通达的差别来分。或者,单说“行道”这个词时,因为通达跟行道分不开,所以通达也一并被包含进来了。同样,这里常说的“行道四法”等等,通过“等”这个字,应当知道也涵盖了增上等差别。因此,“从行道等的差别来说”的意思就是:按行道差别、按增上差别、按所缘差别、按退分等差别。其中,先按行道差别来说,有四种:苦行道迟通达、苦行道速通达、乐行道迟通达、乐行道速通达。这当中,行道是苦的,所以叫苦行道;通达是迟的,所以叫迟通达。在“苦行道速通达”等说法里,道理也一样。巴利
Paṭipadādibhedatoti dukkhapaṭipadādandhābhiññādīnaṃ paṭipadābhiññānaṃ bhedena. Paṭipadāvacaneneva vā tadavinābhāvato abhiññāpi labbhati. Tathā hettha paṭipadācatukkanti voharantīti ādi-saddena adhipatiādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, tasmā paṭipadādibhedatoti paṭipadābhedato, adhipatibhedato, ārammaṇabhedato, hānabhāgiyādibhedatoti attho. Tattha paṭipadābhedato tāva dukkhapaṭipadaṃ dandhābhiññaṃ, dukkhapaṭipadaṃ khippābhiññaṃ, sukhapaṭipadaṃ dandhābhiññaṃ, sukhapaṭipadaṃ khippābhiññanti evaṃ catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha dukkhā paṭipadā assāti dukkhapaṭipadaṃ. Dandhā abhiññā assāti dandhābhiññaṃ. Esa nayo ‘‘dukkhapaṭipadaṃ khippābhiñña’’ntiādīsupi.
在这里,对于尚未断除盖障、尚未镇伏对禅那的贪求、智的作用还不明晰、但已完成全部前期准备的人,从“地、地”或“水、水”这样反复作意开始,一直到那那一种禅那的近行定生起,在此期间所进行的盖障断除和贪求镇伏,这整个阶段所修的前分修行,就叫做“行道”,意思是“依此而行于禅那”。而对于已经断除盖障、已经镇伏对禅那的贪求、智的作用已经明晰的人,从近行禅开始,一直到安止定生起,在此期间所生起的慧,因为比前分慧更为殊胜,所以叫做“神通”。因此,如果有人从一开始就以苦、有行、需要造作、艰辛地镇伏烦恼和对禅那的贪求,镇伏之后,在安止定的等待期间,经过很长时间才让禅支显现,那么他的禅那就是苦行道、迟钝神通。如果有人以有行镇伏烦恼等之后,不久就让禅支显现,那就是苦行道、速疾神通。如果有人镇伏烦恼等时是快乐地、不辛劳地镇伏,但在安止定的等待期间拖延很久,那就是乐行道、迟钝神通。如果有人快乐地镇伏烦恼等之后,迅速达到安止定,那就是乐行道、速疾神通。应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha appahīnanīvaraṇassa, avikkhambhitajhānanikantikassa ca ñāṇakiccassa aparibyattatāya pariniṭṭhitasakalapubbakiccassa ‘‘pathavī pathavī’’ti vā ‘‘āpo āpo’’ti vā evaṃ pavattapaṭhamasamannāhārato paṭṭhāya yāva tassa tassa jhānassa upacāruppattiyā nīvaraṇappahānaṃ, nikantivikkhambhanañca hoti, tāva pavattā pubbabhāgabhāvanā paṭipadā nāma ‘‘paṭipajjati jhānaṃ etāyā’’ti katvā. Pahīnanīvaraṇassa, pana vikkhambhitajhānanikantikassa ca ñāṇakiccassa paribyattabhāvato upacārajjhānaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva appanāya uppatti, tāva pavattā paññā pubbabhāgapaññāya visiṭṭhabhāvato abhiññā nāma, tasmā yo ādito kilese jhānanikantiñca vikkhambhento dukkhena sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilamanto vikkhambheti, vikkhambhitakilesajhānanikanti ca appanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena aṅgapātubhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa dukkhapaṭipadaṃ, dandhābhiññañca jhānaṃ hoti. Yo pana sasaṅkhārena kilesādike vikkhambhetvā na cirena aṅgapātubhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa dukkhapaṭipadaṃ, khippābhiññañca. Yo kilesādike vikkhambhento sukhena akilamanto vikkhambheti, appanāparivāsaṃ pana cirāyati, tassa sukhapaṭipadaṃ, dandhābhiññaṃ. Yo pana sukheneva kilesādike vikkhambhetvā sīghameva appanaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa sukhapaṭipadaṃ, khippābhiññanti veditabbaṃ.
这种行道与通达的差别,应当根据烦恼和根的强弱来了知。如果一个人的贪等烦恼很强烈,而信等五根很弱,并且对止和观都没有下过功夫,那么他生起的禅那就是苦行道,通达也迟钝。因为他的烦恼现行太强,要镇伏五盖非常艰难辛苦才能成功,所以行道是苦的、不乐的;又因为他的信等根很弱,通达也就迟钝、缓慢,不能快速生起。或者,因为过去世中对止没有下过功夫,所以行道是苦;对观没有下过功夫,所以通达也迟钝。反过来,如果一个人与上述情况相反,因为烦恼现行不太强、诸根锐利、对止和观都已下过功夫,那么依次就是乐行道和速通达。就像过去世已经熟习的人,好比把一部已经背熟后放下的书,只要稍微用一点功就能流畅诵出,他的修习也是只花很少力气就能成就。这里所说的已下功夫和未下功夫,在行道方面是依止来说的,因为行道以定为根本;在通达方面是依观来说的,因为安止以智为根本。应当这样理解。巴利
So panāyaṃ paṭipadābhiññānaṃ bhedo kilesindriyādhikāravasena veditabbo. Yassa hi rāgādayo kilesā tibbā honti, saddhāpañcamakāni ca indriyāni mudūni. Yo ca samathavipassanāsu akatādhikāro, tassa pavattajhānaṃ dukkhapaṭipadaṃ, dandhābhiññañca hoti. Tassa hi kilesasamudācāratibbatāya nīvaraṇavikkhambhanassa kicchena kasirena samijjhanato paṭipadā dukkhā asukhā, tasseva saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ mudutāya abhiññāpi dandhā mandā asīghappavattinī hoti. Bhavantare vā samathe akatādhikārattā paṭipadā dukkhā, vipassanāya akatādhikārattā abhiññāpi dandhā. Yo pana vuttaviparīto hoti, tassa kilesānaṃ atibbasamudācāratāya, indriyānañca tikhīṇatāya samathavipassanāsu katādhikāratāya yathākkamaṃ sukhapaṭipadā, khippābhiññā ca hoti. Bhavantare kataparicayassa hi yathā paguṇaṃ katvā vissaṭṭhagantho appamattakena payogena suppavatti vācuggato ca hoti, evaṃ bhāvanā appakasireneva ijjhatīti. Svāyaṃ akato, kato ca adhikāro samathanissito paṭipadāyaṃ vutto samādhippadhānattā paṭipadāya. Vipassanānissito abhiññāya ñāṇappadhānattā appanāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如果一个人烦恼强、根器利,或者只在观修上用过功,那么按前面所说的方式,他的行道是苦的,但证智很快;与此相反的人,则是乐行道、证智迟缓。因此,应当根据烦恼的强弱、根器的利钝,以及过去是否曾经修习过,这样从烦恼、根器与过去修习三方面来了知这些差别。巴利
Yo pana tibbakileso tikkhindriyo vipassanāyameva vā katādhikāro hoti, tassa vuttanayena dukkhā paṭipadā, khippā pana abhiññā hoti, tabbiparītassa sukhapaṭipadā dandhābhiññāti. Tasmā kilesānaṃ tibbamandabhāvato, indriyānaṃ tikhiṇamudubhāvato, pubbaparicayassa ca sambhavāsambhavavasenāti evaṃ kilesindriyādhikāravasena imāsaṃ bhedo veditabbo.
另外,对于后面会讲到的适合与不适合的情况、断除障碍等前期准备工作,以及安止的善巧,如果一个人在证得近行定之前和之后都亲近不适合的,他的行道就是苦的,证智也是慢的。如果在这两个阶段都亲近适合的,行道就是乐的,证智也是快的。如果一个人在前期亲近不适合的,后期却亲近适合的,他的行道是苦的,但证智是快的。与此相反的情况,应当知道是乐行道、慢证智。巴利
Apica yāni parato sappāyāsappāyāni, palibodhupacchedādīni pubbakiccāni, appanākosallāni ca āgamissanti, tesu yo upacārādhigamato pubbe, pacchā ca asappāyasevī hoti, tassa dukkhā paṭipadā, dandhā ca abhiññā hoti. Ubhayattha sappāyasevino sukhā paṭipadā, khippā ca abhiññā. Yo pana tato pubbabhāge asappāyaṃ sevitvā aparabhāge sappāyasevī hoti, tassa dukkhā paṭipadā, khippā abhiññā. Tabbiparītassa sukhā paṭipadā, dandhā abhiññā ca veditabbā.
同样,如果还没有完成断除障碍等前行准备就开始修习,因为还有障碍,所以行道是苦的;反过来,没有障碍,行道就是乐的。还没有成就安止善巧的人,因为智慧不清净,证智就迟缓;成就的人则相反,证智迅速。那么,这些差别应当依照渴爱、无明、三有、生的不同来了知。被渴爱压倒的人,行道是苦的,因为渴爱正好是定的对立面,会成为止修行的障碍;没有被渴爱压倒的人,因为没有这个障碍,所以行道是乐的。被无明压倒的人,证智迟缓,因为无明正好是慧的对立面;另一种人则证智迅速。不过,这种行道的差别,只适用于通过止修行而证得禅那的人;如果是通过证道而证得禅那的人,就没有苦行道等这些差别。但有些论师纯粹依照道来解说这种行道等差别,他们说:“因为道有苦行道等状态,所以那禅那也有苦行道等状态。”巴利
Tathā palibodhupacchedādipubbakiccaṃ asampādetvā bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa saparipanthatāya dukkhā paṭipadā, vipariyāyena aparipanthatāya sukhā. Appanākosallāni asampādentassa ñāṇassa avisadatāya dandhā abhiññā hoti, sampādentassa vipariyāyato khippā abhiññāti. Kiñca – taṇhāvijjātibhavanavasena etāsaṃ bhedo veditabbo. Taṇhābhibhūtassa hi dukkhā paṭipadā hoti tassā samādhissa ujupaṭipakkhattā samathapaṭipadāya paripanthakabhāvato, anabhibhūtassa tadabhāvato sukhā. Avijjābhibhūtassa ca tassā paññāya ujupaṭipakkhabhāvato dandhā abhiññā, itarassa khippā abhiññāti. So panāyaṃ paṭipadābhedo kevalaṃ samathabhāvanāvasena paṭiladdhajjhānassa, maggādhigamavasena paṭiladdhajjhānassa pana natthi dukkhapaṭipadādibhedo. Keci pana maggavaseneva tassa paṭipadādibhedaṃ vaṇṇenti ‘‘maggassa hi dukkhapaṭipadādibhāve tasmiṃ dukkhapaṭipadādika’’nti.
在增上差别等当中,应当知道有四种:依增上差别,有欲增上、心增上、精进增上、观增上;依所缘差别,有小而小所缘、小而无量所缘、无量而小所缘、无量而无量所缘;依退分等差别,有退分、住分、胜进分、抉择分。其中,以“有欲的人能生起禅那,我也能生起”这样的心,把欲放在首位而生起的,就是欲增上。心增上等也是同样的道理。品质低劣、不能成为上地禅那之缘的,是小;在仅仅像簸箕那么大的、没有扩展的所缘上生起的,是小所缘。与上面所说的相反,应当依次理解为无量所缘等。至于退分等的差别,他后面自己会说明。巴利
Adhipatibhedādīsu pana chandādhipateyyaṃ cittādhipateyyaṃ vīriyādhipateyyaṃ vīmaṃsādhipateyyanti evaṃ adhipatibhedato, parittaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ, parittaṃ appamāṇārammaṇaṃ, appamāṇaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ , appamāṇaṃ appamāṇārammaṇanti evaṃ ārammaṇabhedato, hānabhāgiyaṃ ṭhitibhāgiyaṃ visesabhāgiyaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyanti evaṃ hānabhāgiyādibhedato ca catubbidhatā veditabbā. Tattha ‘‘chandavato ce jhānaṃ nibbattissati, mayhampi nibbattissatī’’ti evaṃ chandaṃ dhuraṃ katvā uppannaṃ chandādhipateyyaṃ. Esa nayo ‘‘cittādhipateyyā’’dīsupi. Appaguṇaṃ pana uparijhānassa paccayo bhavituṃ asakkontaṃ parittaṃ, suppasarāvamattesu avaḍḍhitārammaṇesu nibbattaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ. Vuttapaṭipakkhato pana yathākkamaṃ appamāṇārammaṇādīni veditabbāni. Hānabhāgiyādivisesaṃ sayameva vakkhati.
依禅支结合的差别来说:有的地方有五禅支,有的地方有四禅支,有的地方有三禅支,有的地方有二禅支,有的地方有另外二禅支——就是这样,依禅支结合的差别而说。这里难道不应该像欲界善心那样,也把行的差别算进去吗?因为这也只是:靠止的修习而得到的,叫有行;靠证道而得到的,叫无行。那么是不是应该说“依禅支与行的结合差别而有十种”呢?并不是这样。因为即使是通过证道、从七种方式得到的,后来也只是依遍作而生起。所以,如果没有叫作遍作的前行,一切禅那单靠增上缘是不会生起的,因此不能说它是“无行”;而如果没有增上缘,单靠遍作行也不会生起,因此也不能说它是“有行”。所以,只依禅支结合的差别,说为五种。巴利
Jhānaṅgayogabhedatoti katthaci pañca jhānaṅgāni, katthaci cattāri, katthaci tīṇi, katthaci dve , katthaci aparāni dveti evaṃ jhānaṅgānaṃ sampayogabhedato. Nanu cettha kāmāvacarakusale viya saṅkhārabhedo kasmā na gahito. Idampi hi kevalaṃ samathānuyogavasena paṭiladdhaṃ sasaṅkhāraṃ, maggādhigamavasena paṭiladdhamasaṅkhāraṃ, tasmā ‘‘jhānaṅgasaṅkhārayogabhedato dasavidha’’nti vattabbanti? Nayidamevaṃ, maggādhigamavasena sattito paṭiladdhassāpi aparabhāge parikammavaseneva uppajjanato, tasmā sabbassapi jhānassa parikammasaṅkhātapubbābhisaṅkhārena vinā kevalaṃ adhikāravasena anuppajjanato ‘‘asaṅkhāra’’ntipi vattuṃ na sakkā, adhikārena ca vinā kevalaṃ parikammābhisaṅkhāreneva anuppajjanato ‘‘sasaṅkhāra’’ntipi vattuṃ na sakkāti jhānaṅgayogabhedato pañcavidhatā ca vuttāti.
欲贪、嗔恚、昏沉睡眠、掉举恶作、疑,这五种盖已经被断除了,所以称为“已断欲贪……中略……已断”。这里“已断”一词,应当像“已置”一词那样,理解为是就别的方面来说的。或者说,因为已经与欲贪等脱离、不再与它们相连,并且已经成为能断除它们的状态,所以称为“已断欲贪……中略……已断”。其中,“欲”是贪求的意思,“贪”是欲求的意思,合起来就是“欲贪”,这是对粗重欲贪的称呼。嗔恚等的含义后面会说明。因为欲贪等如果没有断除,禅那就不会生起,所以应当知道这些是禅那的断除支。难道其他不善法不也是被这个禅那所断除的吗?那为什么只说五种断除支呢?因为它们是特别会障碍禅那的。由于欲贪,心被种种不同的对象所引诱,不能专注于单一对象而得定。或者被欲贪所压倒,就不去修习能断除种种对象杂乱的欲界的行道。由于嗔恚,心在面对对象时受到抵触,不能安住而定。被昏沉睡眠所压倒,心就变得不堪能。被掉举恶作所缠扰,心就不得寂静而四处游荡。被疑所损害,就不能登上证得禅那的行道,因为对“到底是不是正等正觉者,是不是呢,地是地”等作意时生起“到底有没有禅那”等疑惑,由于这种疑惑,证得禅那的行道就无法成就。因此后面会说——巴利
Kāmacchando byāpādo thinamiddhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ vicikicchāti imāni pañca nīvaraṇāni vippahīnāni etassāti kāmacchanda…pe… vippahīnaṃ. ‘‘Agyāhito’’ti ettha āhita-saddassa viya vippahīna-saddassettha paravacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāmacchandādīhi vā vippahīnaṃ visaṃyuttaṃ tesaṃ pahāyakabhāvenāti kāmacchanda…pe… vippahīnaṃ. Tattha kāmetīti kāmo, chandanaṭṭhena chando cāti kāmacchando, bahalakāmarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Byāpādādīnamatthaṃ vakkhati. Yasmā kāmacchandādīsu appahīnesu jhānaṃ nuppajjati, tasmā tānissa pahānaṅgānīti veditabbāni. Nanu aññepi akusalā dhammā iminā jhānena pahīyanti, atha kasmā pañceva pahānaṅgavasena vuttānīti? Visesena jhānantarāyakarattā. Kāmacchandavasena hi nānāvisayapalobhitaṃ cittaṃ na ekattārammaṇe samādhiyati. Kāmacchandābhibhūtaṃ vā nānāvisayasamupabyūḷhāya kāmadhātuyā pahānapaṭipadaṃ na paṭipajjati, byāpādena ca ārammaṇe paṭihaññamānaṃ na samāhitaṃ pavattati, thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ akammaññaṃ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaparetaṃ avūpasantameva hutvā paribbhamati, vicikicchāupahataṃ jhānādhigamapaṭipadaṃ nārohati ‘‘sammāsambuddho nu kho, na nu kho, pathavī pathavī’’tiādinā pavattamanasikārena ‘‘jhānaṃ siyā nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā vicikicchantassa jhānādhigamapaṭipadāya asaṃsijjhanato. Yato vakkhati –
我必定凭此修行成为分享者。
为了得到远离的快乐,发起最上的精进。巴利
‘‘Bhāgī assamahaṃ addhā, imāya paṭipattiyā; Pavivekasukhassāti, katvā ussāhamuttama’’nti.
所以,正是这些被称为断支,因为它们直接与定等对立,特别是会障碍证得禅那。这里就有这样的说法:巴利
Tasmā samādhiādīnaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhāvena visesena jhānādhigamassa antarāyakaraṇato etāneva pahānaṅgānīti vuttāni. Hoti cettha –
因为在这里,五盖确实是定等的直接对立面。
它们是禅那的障碍,因此被确定为断除支分。巴利
‘‘Paccanīkā yato pañca, samādhādīnamettha hi; Jhānantarāyikā tasmā, pahānaṅge niyāmitā’’ti.
这样,先用“断除支”来说明,现在为了用“相应支”来说明,就说“寻……乃至……相应”。其中,寻等(禅支)的词义、特相等,后面还会讲到。因为当这些法生起时,禅那才叫作已生起,所以应当知道这些就是它的相应支。因此,不能认为除了具备这些支之外,还另有别的什么禅那。就像轮、辋等支聚合起来就有“车”这个说法,同样,禅支聚合起来就有“禅那”这个说法。《分别论》里也这样说:“什么是禅那?就是寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性。”那为什么在触等其他相应法也存在的情况下,偏偏只说这五法为禅支呢?回答说:因为它们具有审虑的作用,又因为是欲贪等的直接对立面。寻把心投向所缘,伺则持续跟随。它们成为证得禅那的特殊助缘,使不散乱、正在用功的心达到用功的圆满,由此生起的喜带来喜悦,乐则使心增长。然后,由寻的投向、伺的跟随、喜的喜悦、乐的增长所资助的一境性,以安止的作用推动自己,在一个所缘上平等而正确地安住——平等,是因为诸根平衡;正确安住,是因为远离了对立法,没有昏沉和掉举。这样,审虑作用就是这五法独有的。至于它们是欲贪等的对立面,后面自然会说到。因此,因为具有审虑作用,又是欲贪等的直接对立面,所以只有这五法被确定为禅支。正如所说:巴利
Evamidaṃ pahānaṅgavasena dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘vitakka…pe… sampayutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha vitakkādayo vacanatthalakkhaṇādivasena upari āgamissanti. Yasmā pana imesu uppannesu jhānaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti, tenassa imāni sampayogaṅgānīti veditabbāni, tasmā na etehi samannāgataṃ aññadeva jhānaṃ nāma atthīti gahetabbaṃ. Yathā pana nemiādiaṅgasamudāye rathādivohāro hoti, evaṃ jhānaṅgasamudāye jhānavohāro. Vuttampi hetaṃ vibhaṅge ‘‘jhānanti vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā’’ti (vibha. 569). Kasmā pana aññesupi phassādīsu sampayuttadhammesu vijjamānesu imāniyeva pañca jhānaṅgavasena vuttānīti? Vuccate – upanijjhānakiccavantatāya, kāmacchandādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhabhāvato ca. Vitakko hi ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, vicāro anubandhati. Evaṃ jhānādhigamassa visesapaccayabhūtehi tehi avikkhepāya samādahitapayogassa cetaso payogasampattisamuṭṭhānā pīti pīṇanaṃ, sukhañca upabrūhanaṃ karoti. Atha naṃ sasampayuttadhammaṃ etehi abhiniropanānubandhanapīṇanaupabrūhanehi anuggahitā ekaggatā samādhānakiccena attānaṃ anuvattāpentī ekattārammaṇe samaṃ, sammā ca ādhiyati, indriyasamatāvasena samaṃ, paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ dūrībhāvena līnuddhaccābhāvena sammā ca ṭhapetīti evametesameva upanijjhānakiccaṃ āveṇikaṃ. Kāmacchandādipaṭipakkhabhāvena pana sayameva vakkhati. Evaṃ upanijjhānakiccavantatāya, kāmacchandādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhabhāvato ca imeyeva pañca jhānaṅgabhāvena vavatthitāti. Yathāhu –
因为具有专注审察的作用,并且直接对抗欲贪等烦恼;
即使还有其他存在着的,也只有这五种被称为禅支。巴利
‘‘Upanijjhānakiccattā, kāmādipaṭipakkhato; Santesupi ca aññesu, pañceva jhānasaññitā’’ti.
从说法的次第来看,以及因为在广大诸法中它是最先应当证得的,所以称为“第一”;又因为应当最先进入这个定,也说它是“第一”。不过,这并不是它固定不变的特征,因为如果按照禅那的逆次第等方式入定,这种说法就站不住脚了。巴利
Desanākkamato, mahaggatadhammesu paṭhamaṃ adhigantabbato ca paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ samāpajjitabbantipi paṭhamanti vadanti. Taṃ pana na ekantalakkhaṇaṃ jhānapaṭilomādivasena samāpajjane asambhavato.
即使寻在前后两个心识阶段也会生起,但它在安止的那一刹那并不生起,所以寻对这个人来说已被断除;或者可以说,他是从那时起被断除的,因此称为“已断寻”。因为寻是经由修习而被断除的,所以在禅那的刹那不再生起。然而,由于它的本性并非染污,而且近行修习没有能力断除它,所以在前期和后期阶段,当与之对立的心不生起时,寻仍然会生起。巴利
Purimapacchimacittesu uppajjamānassāpi appanākkhaṇe anuppajjanato vitakko vippahīno etassa, tato vā etaṃ vippahīnanti vitakkavippahīnaṃ. Bhāvanāya hi pahīnattā vitakko jhānakkhaṇe nuppajjati. Asaṃkiliṭṭhasabhāvattā pana upacārabhāvanāya ca taṃ pahātuṃ asamatthabhāvato purimabhāge, pacchābhāge ca apaccanīkacittappavattito uppajjatiyevāti.
难道不是说过“因为它的本性没有被染污”吗?那么,它怎么会被禅那断除呢?因为善法并不能断除本性未被染污的法,而贪等染污的恶法才是它的直接对立面,不是吗?回答说:虽然它的本性未被染污,但它粗重而力量微弱,为了让它在禅那的刹那不生起,就通过镇伏对它的贪爱来修习第二禅。依靠第二禅的力量,它在禅那的刹那不再生起,或者说以镇伏贪爱的方式被镇伏,这就叫作断除。如果这样的话,在近行定中贪爱也会被镇伏,那么在那里也应该有它的断除,就像初禅的近行定中能断除诸盖一样,不是吗?并非如此。因为以寻为所缘的贪爱的镇伏,不像断除诸盖那样能由近行定殊胜地完成。在那里,贪爱的断除只有通过安止定才能殊胜地完成。所以,我们所说的“近行修习无力断除它”这句话,应当看作经过仔细考察之后才说的。“离伺”等处,也应按照所说的方式来理解。这里提到“寻”,只是为了显示在第二禅中已被断除的寻在此处不再现起,所以说“离寻、离伺”。同样,“离寻、离伺、离喜”等处也是如此。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘asaṃkiliṭṭhasabhāvattā’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kathaṃ jhānena esa pahīyati? Na hi kusalehi asaṃkiliṭṭhadhammassa pahānaṃ atthi rāgādisaṃkiliṭṭhānaṃ pāpadhammānametassa ujupaṭipakkhabhāvatoti? Vuccate – asaṃkiliṭṭhasabhāvassāpi etassa oḷārikatāya dubbalabhāvato jhānakkhaṇe anuppattisabhāvāpādanatthaṃ tattha nikantivikkhambhanavasena dutiyajjhānabhāvanā hotīti tassā balena taṃ jhānakkhaṇe anuppajjantaṃ nikantivikkhambhanavasena vā vikkhambhitaṃ pahīnaṃ nāma hoti. Yadi evaṃ upacārenapi nikanti vikkhambhīyatīti tatthapissa pahānaṃ siyā, yathā paṭhamajjhānassa upacāre nīvaraṇānīti? Nayidamevaṃ, nīvaraṇappahānassa viya vitakkārammaṇikanikanti vikkhambhanassa upacārena sātisayaṃ anipphajjanato. Sātisayañhi tattha nikantippahānaṃ appanāya eva hoti, tasmā yadavocumhā ‘‘upacārabhāvanāya ca taṃ pahātuṃ asamatthabhāvato’’ti, taṃ suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Vicāravippahīna’’ntiādīsupi vuttanayānusārena attho daṭṭhabbo. Dutiyajjhāneyeva pahīnassa vitakkassa idha appavattimattadassanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicāravippahīna’’nti vitakka-ggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārapītivippahīna’’ntiādīsupi.
“随其所应”的意思是:在地遍等业处中,凡所缘能于某处生起,就依该所缘而不超出它。因为在地遍和入出息念中,只有五种禅能生起;在不净业处和身至念中,只有初禅能生起;在慈、悲、喜三种梵住中,能生起除第五禅以外的其余诸禅;在舍梵住中,则能生起第五禅。巴利
Yathāsambhavanti pathavīkasiṇādīsu yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ yassa yassa sambhavati, tadanatikkamato. Kasiṇānāpānesu hi pañceva jhānāni pavattanti, asubhakāyagatāsatīsu paṭhamajjhānaṃ, anupekkhābrahmavihāresu pañcamajjhānavajjāni, upekkhābrahmavihāre pañcamajjhānanti.
在地遍等当中,这里用“等”字,应当理解为不仅包括水遍等,还包括不净观等能引生安止的业处。而且在这里,胜处与解脱的禅那只是在运作方式上有差别,但就所缘来说,它们其实就是遍处,因此已被归入遍处禅那之中。或者说,通过“随其所应……种种”这一说法,已经涵盖了色界禅那中一切可能出现的分类,所以胜处与解脱的禅那虽然没有单独列出,但它们自身的相状应当这样来理解。巴利
Pathavīkasiṇādīsūti ettha ādi-ggahaṇena kevalaṃ āpokasiṇādīnameva, atha kho asubhādīnampi appanāvahakammaṭṭhānānaṃ saṅgahoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca abhibhāyatanavimokkhajhānāni pavattākāramattato bhinnāni, ārammaṇato pana kasiṇāyatanāneva hontīti kasiṇāyatanajhāneheva tāni saṅgahitāni. ‘‘Yathāsambhavaṃ…pe… anekavidha’’nti vā vacanena rūpāvacarajjhāne sabbopi labbhamānakabhedo saṅgahitoti abhibhāyatanavimokkhajhānāni visuṃ na vuttāni, tāni pana sarūpato evaṃ veditabbāni.
在这里,对于智慧殊胜的瑜伽修行者来说,他超越地遍等所缘之后,心里想“在这里,生起安止并不困难”,于是继续用功。从相生起之后,在第二、第三速行心路,或者在第四、第五速行心路中证得的禅那,就叫作胜处。因为它能制胜所缘,所以叫“胜”;又因为它是瑜伽行者殊胜快乐的依处,或者因为它属于意处和法处,所以叫“处”,因此叫胜处。或者说,应当被制胜的所缘就是“胜”,以它为处,就是胜处。或者说,仅仅因为制胜所缘而叫“胜”,它是所缘,是它的处,所以叫胜处。又或者说,仅仅因为制胜所缘而叫“胜”,是遍作,或者是智慧,那是它的处、它的因,所以叫胜处。遍作或智慧在制胜所缘之后持续运转,从近行生起时开始,不超过第五速行心路就引发安止。但在第五速行心路之后才生起的,即使是出于想制胜的意愿而生起,也不叫胜处。一般来说,那只是遍处。正是针对这种极其迅速的运转,注释书里说:“制胜它们之后入定,在这里,与相的生起同时就生起安止。”难道注释书不应该按字面来理解吗?因为说了“与相的生起同时”,就可以知道与相同时生起的禅那就是胜处,不是吗?并不是这样,因为安止不可能与相的生起同时发生。这里说的“相的生起”,是指似相的生起,或者是指以那似相为所缘的近行定。首先,与似相生起同时生起安止是不可能的,因为没有近行定,它就不可能生起;也不可能与近行定在同一心路中生起,因为那时它还必须依靠近行修习的相续来修,所以不可能。因此,要知道注释书是为了显示它的生起不会太迟,才在近处用“近作”这种近似的说法这样讲。如果胜处是从相生起后不久就运转的,那为什么经里说它有迟通和速通的区别呢?回答说:在第四、第五速行心路中生起的,因为经过很长时间才生起,所以是迟通;在第二、第三速行心路中生起的,因为具有与之相反的特征,所以是速通。不过有些人说:“胜处只是已达到自在的,不是别的。”这只是他们自己的看法,因为已达到自在距离相的生起极其遥远,与注释书里“在这里,与相的生起同时就生起安止”这句话相违背。巴利
Tattha ñāṇuttarassa yogāvacarassa pathavīkasiṇādiārammaṇaṃ abhibhavitvā ‘‘na mettha appanānibbattane bhāro’’ti paṭipannassa nimittuppattito uddhaṃ dutiyatatiyavīthiyaṃ, catutthapañcamavīthiyaṃ vā paṭiladdhaṃ jhānaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ nāma. Tañhi ārammaṇaṃ abhibhavatīti abhibhū, yogino sukhavisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānatāya, manāyatanadhammāyatanapariyāpannatāya vā āyatananti abhibhāyatanaṃ, abhibhavitabbaṃ vā abhibhū, ālambaṇaṃ, taṃ āyatanamassāti abhibhāyatanaṃ. Atha vā ālambaṇābhibhavanatoyeva abhibhū, parikammaṃ, ñāṇaṃ vā, taṃ āyatanaṃ kāraṇamassāti abhibhāyatanaṃ. Parikammaṃ, ñāṇaṃ vā ālambaṇaṃ abhibhavitvā pavattamānaṃ upacāruppattito pañcamavīthimanatikkamitvā appanaṃ nibbatteti. Pañcamavīthito paraṃ nibbattaṃ pana abhibhavitukāmatāya nibbattitampi abhibhāyatanaṃ nāma na hoti. Sāmaññagatiyā pana kasiṇāyatanameva hoti. Imameva hi sīghatarappavattiṃ sandhāya aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tāni abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ nibbattetī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 204) vuttaṃ. Nanu ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ yathārutavaseneva attho kasmā na gayhati. ‘‘Saha nimittuppādenevā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 204) hi vuttattā nimittuppattiyā sahuppannaṃ jhānamabhibhāyatananti viññāyatīti? Nayidamevaṃ, nimittuppādena saha appanāya asambhavato. Nimittuppādoti hi idha paṭibhāganimittassa uppatti tadārammaṇassa vā upacārajjhānassa, kiṃ tāva paṭibhāganimittuppattiyā saha appanāya nibbatti upacārajjhāne asati tassā asambhavato, nāpi upacārajjhānena saha ekavīthiyaṃ nibbatti tassā upacārabhāvanāpabandhasevitabbabhāvena tadā asambhavato, tasmā nāticirāyanappavattidassanatthaṃ samīpimhi samīpakārīyūpacārena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tathā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yadi nimittuppattito nāticirappavattamabhibhāyatanaṃ, kathaṃ tassa dandhābhiññākhippābhiññābhedo pāḷiyaṃ vuttoti? Vuccate – catutthapañcamajavanavīthiyaṃ uppannaṃ cirakālanibbattitāya dandhābhiññaṃ, dutiyatatiyavīthiyaṃ uppannaṃ tabbiparītalakkhaṇatāya khippābhiññanti. Keci pana ‘‘abhibhāyatanaṃ nāma vasibhāvappattameva, netara’’nti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ, vasibhāvappattiyā nimittuppattito dūratarabhāvena ‘‘saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ nibbattetī’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanena saha virujjhanato.
不过,已经达到自在的禅那,不需要依靠制胜的因缘,单凭自在的力量就能恭敬地入定,所以它不叫胜处。因此这里应当得出结论:还没有达到自在、最初生起的禅那,才是胜处。如果是这样,那为什么在胜处的教说里说“无量而以小为所缘,无量而以无量为所缘”呢?因为达到自在的禅那才被称为无量,而这个是刚刚生起的,所以只是小,不是吗?这并没有过失。因为最初以胜处的方式证得的禅那,后来即使达到了自在,也仍然得到胜处这个名称。所以,达到自在的胜处是无量,另一个是小。巴利
Apica vasibhāvappattaṃ jhānaṃ abhibhavanakāraṇanirapekkhaṃ vasibhāvabaleneva sakkaccaṃ samāpajjituṃ na sakkāti na taṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā appattavasibhāvā paṭhamuppannāyeva abhibhāyatananti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ ‘‘appamāṇaṃ parittārammaṇaṃ, appamāṇaṃ appamāṇārammaṇa’’nti (dha. sa. 212-213) abhibhāyatanadesanāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Vasibhāvappattañhi jhānaṃ appamāṇanti vuccati. Idañca uppannamattattā parittamevāti? Nāyaṃ doso. Paṭhamaṃ abhibhāyatanavasena paṭiladdhajjhānaṃ pacchā vasibhāvappattampi abhibhāyatananāmameva labhatīti vasibhāvappattamabhibhāyatanaṃ appamāṇaṃ, itaraṃ parittaṃ.
或者,已经达到自在的境界,依最殊胜的状态来含摄,就称为“无量”。而他们以“凡是更强大的,那就是无量”作为这一含义的标示来说。以强有力的修习为因,才有无量的性质。而强有力的状态,从初安止的速行到最后安止的速行都强而有力,即使在尚未达到究竟的禅那中也可能存在,所以强大的是“无量”,其余的是“狭小”——这样,即使在尚未达到究竟的禅那中,也应知道有“无量”等的差别。或者,安止的强有力,只有在近行定强而有力时才有。那种能迅速引生安止的近行定,就是强有力的近行定。因此,速通达者的两种胜处禅那,在近行路心之后,紧接着在第二路心生起的,由于近行禅那的强有力,自身也更为强大,所以称为“无量”;越过第二路心,在第三路心生起的,因为属于另一类,所以是“狭小”。同样,迟通达者在第四路心生起的是“无量”,在第五路心生起的是“狭小”。或者,在任何安止路心中,第五个生起的安止,比起第四个生起的,其强力性更弱。依此道理,这里也应知道狭小与无量的差别。巴利
Atha vā vasibhāvappattaṃ appamāṇanti ukkaṃsagatipariggahavasena vuccati. Taṃ pana yaṃ balavataraṃ, taṃ appamāṇanti imassa atthassa upalakkhaṇaṃ katvā vadanti. Balavabhāvanibandhanaṃ appamāṇattaṃ. Balavabhāvo ca paṭhamaappanāvārato pacchimapacchimaappanāvārānaṃ balavatāya avasitāpattepi jhāne sambhavatīti balavantaṃ appamāṇaṃ, itaraṃ parittanti evaṃ avasitāpattepi jhāne appamāṇādibhāvo veditabbo. Atha vā appanāya balavabhāvo nāma upacārassa balavatāya sati hoti. Upacārañca taṃ balavaṃ, yaṃ sahasā appanaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkuṇeyya, tasmā khippābhiññānaṃ dvinnaṃ abhibhāyatanajhānānaṃ upacāravīthiyā anantaraṃ dutiyavīthiyaṃ uppannaṃ upacārajjhānassa balavatāya sayampi balavataranti appamāṇaṃ nāma hoti. Dutiyavīthimatikkamitvā tatiyavīthiyaṃ uppannaṃ taditarasabhāvatāya parittaṃ. Tathā dandhābhiññānaṃ catutthavīthiyaṃ uppannaṃ appamāṇaṃ. Pañcamavīthiyaṃ uppannaṃ parittanti. Atha vā yattha katthaci appanāvīthiyaṃ pañcamaṃ uppajjanakaappanāto catutthaṃ uppajjamānāya balavabhāvoti taṃvasenāpettha parittaappamāṇatā veditabbā.
这个呢,按数目来算有八种。就像这样说的:巴利
Taṃ panetaṃ gaṇanato aṭṭhavidhaṃ hoti. Yathāha –
内心无色想,看到外面的色,这些色是有限的,他心里这样想:我胜过它们,我知道、我看见。内心无色想,看到外面的色,这些色是有限的、有美有丑。内心无色想,看到外面的色,这些色是无量的。内心无色想,看到外面的色,这些色是无量的、有美有丑,我胜过它们,我知道、我看见。看到青色、青色的、青显的、青光的,我胜过它们,我知道、我看见。看到黄色、黄色的、黄显的、黄光的。看到红色、红色的、红显的、红光的。看到白色、白色的、白显的、白光的,我胜过它们,我知道、我看见,他心里这样想。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmi. Nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni, tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmi. Pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Lohitāni lohitavaṇṇāni lohitanidassanāni lohitanibhāsāni. Odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.173; 3.338; ma. ni. 2.249; a. ni. 1.427-434; 8.65).
在这里,“内无色想”是指:因为没有获得,或者因为没有兴趣,所以对内在的头发等所缘,没有遍作想和安止想。“在外看色”是指:因为已经在外在的八种遍处,或者只在四种大种遍处上作了遍作,所以以遍作和安止,看见外在的八种或四种遍处色。“狭小”就是不大。“胜解”就像这样:一个食量大、食物充足的人,得到只有一勺的食物,心想“这里有什么可吃的”,于是把它拢成一团,一口吞下;同样,智慧更胜、智见明净的人,心想“在这狭小的所缘上有什么可入定的?这不是我的负担”,就以遍作或以智慧胜解那些色之后而入定。按照上面所说的方式,迅速生起安止。“我知、我见”这句话说明了他先前的作意,而因为它是从那里来的,所以在定中就成为心的造作。否则,如果只说了他的作意,就没有说明由此应当成就的禅那,因为这是胜处的教说,是以禅那为对象的。然而,在诸义注中,是就出定后的前分修习,取禅那刹那中现起的胜解行相,而说现起的作意:巴利
Tattha ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññīti alābhitāya vā anatthikatāya vā ajjhattesu kesādīsu parikammaappanāsaññāvirahito. Bahiddhā rūpāni passatīti bahiddhā aṭṭhasu kasiṇesu, catūsu bhūtakasiṇesu eva vā kataparikammakatāya parikammavasena ceva appanāvasena ca tāni bahiddhā aṭṭha, cattāri vā kasiṇarūpāni passati. Parittānīti amahantāni. Abhibhuyyāti yathā mahagghaso sampannagahaṇiko puriso kaṭacchumattaṃ bhattaṃ labhitvā ‘‘kiṃ ettha bhuñjitabbaṃ bhattaṃ atthī’’ti saṅkaḍḍhitvā sabbaṃ ekakabaḷameva karoti, evameva ñāṇuttariko puggalo visadañāṇo ‘‘kiṃ ettha parittake ārammaṇe samāpajjitabbaṃ atthi, nāyaṃ mama bhāro’’ti tāni rūpāni parikammena, ñāṇena vā abhibhavitvā samāpajjati. Heṭṭhā vuttanayena sīghaṃ appanaṃ nibbatteti. ‘‘Jānāmi passāmī’’ti iminā panassa pubbābhogo kathito, tadāgamanato ca antosamāpattiyaṃ cittābhisaṅkhāro. Itarathā anena ābhogamatte kathite tena sādhitabbaṃ jhānaṃ na vuttaṃ hoti, abhibhāyatanadesanāvāyaṃ jhānavisayāti. Āgamaṭṭhakathāsu pana samāpattito vuṭṭhitassa pubbabhāgabhāvanāvasena jhānakkhaṇe pavattamabhibhavanākāraṃ gahetvā pavattamābhogaṃ sandhāya –
用这句话说明了它的作意。不过,这种作意属于已经出定的人,而不是还在定中的人——这是论书中说的。巴利
‘‘Iminā panassa ābhogo kathito. So ca kho samāpattito vuṭṭhitassa, na antosamāpattiya’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.173; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.249; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.8.65) vuttaṃ.
第二项中,美色与丑色指的是清净和不清净的颜色。因为清净的青色等颜色是美的,不清净的则是丑的,这里指的就是这个意思。巴利
Dutiye suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānīti parisuddhāparisuddhavaṇṇāni. Parisuddhāni hi nīlādīni suvaṇṇāni, aparisuddhāni dubbaṇṇānīti idha adhippetāni.
在第三项中,“无量”是指广大、宽阔的打谷场等。不过这里并不是按“扩展”的意思来取“无量”,因为在这里,遍处的扩展根本不可能发生。遍处有两种扩展的层面:近行地和安止地。其中,在近行地这里,扩展暂时还不可能发生——似相生起时,禅那几乎同时生起,哪里还有它扩展的空间呢?在安止地也不可能,因为说已扩展者成为最初生起之禅那的所缘,这不合理。所以,这里所说的“无量”,就是指所缘本身自然广大。不过有些人说:“就是按扩展的意思来取‘无量’。先在没有胜伏欲求时加以扩展,之后有胜伏欲求时,以胜伏的行相运转,在那上面生起安止。”他们说,这是获得安止之后,在已扩展的似相中,宣说了这个胜处。巴利
Tatiye appamāṇānīti vuddhippamāṇāni vipulāni khalamaṇḍalādīni. Vaḍḍhanavasena panettha appamāṇatā na gahitā kasiṇavaḍḍhanassa idha asambhavato. Kasiṇassa hi dve vaḍḍhanabhūmiyo upacārabhūmi, appanābhūmi vā. Tattha na tāva idha upacārabhūmiyaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ sambhavati. Nimittuppattiyā samakālaṃ viya uppajjamāne jhāne kuto tassa okāsoti, nāpi appanābhūmiyaṃ. Vaḍḍhitassa paṭhamuppannajhānārammaṇatā na yujjati, tasmā sabhāvamahantāneva ālambaṇāni idha appamāṇānīti adhippetāni. Keci pana ‘‘vaḍḍhitavaseneva appamāṇānīti gahetvā paṭhamaṃ abhibhavanicchāya abhāvena vaḍḍhetvā pacchā abhibhavanicchāya sati abhibhavanākārena pavatto tasmiṃ appanaṃ nibbattetīti appanaṃ paṭilabhitvā vaḍḍhitanimittesu idaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti.
第四项中,“胜解”就是制伏。就像有个食物充足、食量很大的人,得到一钵添得满满的食物,心想:“再来一钵也好,再来一钵也好,这能把我怎么样?”于是不觉得它有多大;同样,智慧超胜、智见明净的人,心想:“在这里还要入什么定呢?这无量对我成就心一境性并不是负担。”于是制伏之后而入定。完全按照前面所说的方式生起安止。巴利
Catutthe abhibhuyyāti abhibhavitvā. Yathā nāma sampannagahaṇiko mahagghaso puriso ekaṃ bhattavaḍḍhitakaṃ labhitvā ‘‘‘aññopi hotu, aññopi hotū’ti kiṃ esa mayhaṃ karissatī’’ti na taṃ mahantato passati, evameva ñāṇuttaro visadañāṇo puggalo ‘‘‘kiṃ ettha samāpajjitabbaṃ, nayidaṃ appamāṇa’nti mayhaṃ cittekaggatākaraṇe bhāro’’ti abhibhavitvā samāpajjati. Vuttanayeneva appanaṃ nibbatteti.
第五项中,从“青色的”……到“青色的光辉”这些,都是同义词。其中说“青色的”,是从总括一切的角度来说的。可是如果只这样说,由于和它相关联而用它的名称,就可能连带涉及具有这种性质的事物,为了排除这种情况,所以从颜色的角度说“青色的颜色”。即使这样,由于多财释的用法,也可能牵涉到性质,因此从所显示的角度说“青色的显示”。因为应当被显示的就是显示,也就是眼所应见的色。为了排除白色等,就和“青”这个词组成复合词,意思是说:衣不被认知为别的样子,颜色不混杂,只显现为一种青色。而“青色的光辉”这一说法,是从光耀的角度说的,意思是具有青色光耀、具有青色光芒。以此显示它们的极其清净。对于“黄色的”等等,也应当依照同样的道理来了知。在这八者当中,前者是就依制伏的方式、不带有颜色作意、以八遍中的小遍为所缘而生起的定来说的。第三者同样是就无量遍来说的。第二和第四这两者,是就带有颜色作意而生起的定来说的,而不是就依颜色遍而生起的定来说的,因为那种情况将在别处另行说明。巴利
Pañcame nīlāni…pe… nīlanibhāsānīti etāni pariyāyanāmānīti tattha ‘‘nīlānī’’ti sabbasaṅgāhakavasena vuttaṃ. Ettakeyeva pana vutte taṃyogato tabbohārena guṇayuttepi pasaṅgo siyāti tannivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘nīlavaṇṇānī’’ti vaṇṇavasena vuttaṃ. Evampi hi bahubbīhivasena guṇopi pasaṅgo hotīti ‘‘nīlanidassanānī’’ti nidassanavasena vuttaṃ . Nidassitabbañhi nidassanaṃ, cakkhunā daṭṭhabbaṃ rūpaṃ. Tato setādinivāraṇatthaṃ nīla-saddena saha samāso katoti apaññāyamānacīvarāni asambhinnavaṇṇāni ekanīlāneva hutvā dissamānānīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Nīlanibhāsānī’’ti idaṃ pana obhāsavasena vuttaṃ, nīlobhāsāni nīlappabhāyuttānīti attho. Etena tesaṃ suvisuddhattaṃ dasseti. ‘Pītānī’’tiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Aṭṭhasu cetesu purimaṃ abhibhavanākārena vaṇṇābhogarahitāni aṭṭhapi kasiṇāni parittāni ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tatiyaṃ tathā appamāṇāni. Dutiyacatutthāniyeva dve vaṇṇābhogasahitāni ārabbha uppannaṃ, na pana vaṇṇakasiṇavasena uppannaṃ tassa visuṃ vakkhamānattā.
至于第五项等胜处,则是针对那些在这方面已经修过加行的人,纯粹按照极其清净的颜色来宣说的。因为对他们来说,制伏之所以成立,并不是因为所缘小或无量,而是因为蓝色等状态极其清净。也就是说,他们确实已经在这方面修过加行。不过,难道经论和注释里不是这样说过吗:“无论颜色好看还是难看,这些胜处都是按小和无量来说的”?确实如此,但那是因为在经论中,胜处是以另一种方式出现的,所以才那样说。在那里——巴利
Pañcamādīni pana tesu katādhikāre sandhāya suvisuddhavaṇṇavaseneva desitāni. Na hi tesaṃ abhibhavanassa parittatā, appamāṇatā vā kāraṇaṃ, atha kho suvisuddhanīlādibhāvo. Tattha hi te katādhikārāti. Nanu ca āgamaṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘suvaṇṇāni vā hontu dubbaṇṇāni vā, parittaappamāṇavaseneva imāni abhibhāyatanāni desitānī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.173; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.249; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.8.65) vuttanti? Saccaṃ, taṃ pana āgame abhibhāyatanānaṃ aññathā āgatattā vuttaṃ. Tattha hi –
内在有色想的人,独自在外看到各种色,有小的、有美的丑的,有无量的、有美的丑的;内在无色想的人,独自在外看到各种色,有小的、有美的丑的,有无量的、有美的丑的。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.173; 3.338; ma. ni. 2.249; a. ni. 1.427-434; 8.65) –
这样,就只有四种胜处被传示出来。因此,在那些注释书里,无论颜色与作意存在还是不存在,都只按“有限”和“无量”这两种性质来说明这些胜处的教导。因为在这四种胜处中,有限性和无量性才是制伏的关键,不管颜色与作意存在还是不存在。难道不是处处都说“或美或丑”,所以那里取用的只是与颜色和作意相伴的吗?不是这样。没有颜色与作意的,以及有颜色与作意的,所有“有限”的合在一起,才说为“有限的,或美或丑”;同样,“无量的,或美或丑”也是这样说的。如果是这样,那么对殊胜的、没有颜色与作意的,以及有颜色与作意的,怎么会一起作意呢?并不是一起作意,而是分别对它们作意。如果是这样,分别的情况下怎么成为一体呢?因为它们在“有限”这一点上是共同的。如果是这样,“或美或丑”这个说法不就多余了吗?并不多余,因为这是一种间接教导的方式。确实有这样一种方式:不取由颜色与作意所生和未生的差别,只按“有限”这一共同性归为一体,先说“制伏有限的”,然后为了再显示其中所含的差别,以便调伏弟子,那些有时依颜色而被作意的情况,由于应当说“制伏或美或丑的”,于是把没有颜色与作意的和与颜色与作意相伴的分别作意之后,在两种情况下——制伏没有颜色与作意的有限者,以及制伏与它相伴的有限者——都取“制伏有限”这一共同性,而使它们成为一体。但在阿毗达摩中,因为是无间接方式的教导,所以没有颜色与作意的,以及有颜色与作意的,是分别说出的。因为在这两种情况下,制伏是有差别的。暂且这样吧,既然经与阿毗达摩的读法有差别,那么在注释书读法差别中,意图究竟是什么呢?回答说:在经中,把第一解脱分成两种,而说第一、第二胜处;由于这是间接教导的方式,解脱也有制伏这一说法,所以说“内具色想者”的两种胜处。巴利
Evaṃ cattāriyeva abhibhāyatanāni āgatāni, tasmā tadaṭṭhakathāsu vaṇṇābhoge vijjamāne avijjamānepi parittaappamāṇatāvaseneva imesaṃ desitabhāvo vutto. Parittaappamāṇatā hi imesu catūsu abhibhavanassa kāraṇaṃ vaṇṇābhoge vijjamāne avijjamānepīti. Nanu ca sabbattha ‘‘suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti vacanato vaṇṇābhogasahitāniyeva tattha gahitānīti? Taṃ na, vaṇṇābhogarahitāni, sahitāni ca sabbāni parittāni ekato katvā ‘‘parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti vuttāni, tathā ‘‘appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ visiṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇābhogarahitānaṃ, sahitānañca ekajjhaṃ manasikāro, na ekajjhaṃ, visuṃyeva tesaṃ manasikāro. Yadi evaṃ visuṃ kathamekattanti? Parittabhāvasāmaññato. Yadi evaṃ suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇa-ggahaṇamatiriccati avasiṭṭhoti? Nātiriccati pariyāyadesanābhāvato. Atthi hi esa pariyāyo, yadidaṃ vaṇṇābhogajanitājanitaṃ visesaṃ aggahetvā parittabhāvasāmaññena ekattaṃ netvā ‘‘parittāni abhibhuyyā’’ti vatvā puna tadantogadhameva pabhedaṃ vineyyavasena dassetuṃ tāni ca kadāci vaṇṇavasena āvajjitāni honti, ‘‘suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni abhibhuyyā’’ti vattabbatāya vaṇṇābhogarahitāni, sahitāni ca visuṃ manasi katvā ubhayatthāpi vaṇṇābhogarahitaparittābhibhavane, taṃsahitaparittābhibhavane ca parittābhibhavanasāmaññaṃ gahetvā ekattaṃ katanti. Abhidhamme pana nippariyāyadesanattā vaṇṇābhogarahitāni, sahitāni ca visuṃ vuttāni. Atthi hi ubhayatthābhibhavanavisesoti. Hotu tāva, evaṃ suttābhidhammapāṭhavisesato aṭṭhakathāya pāṭhabhede pana ko adhippāyoti? Vuccate – suttante hi paṭhamavimokkhaṃ dvedhā bhinditvā paṭhamadutiyaabhibhāyatanāni vuttāni, pariyāyadesanattā vimokkhānampi abhibhavanapariyāyo vijjatīti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’’ti abhibhāyatanadvayaṃ vuttaṃ.
在第三和第四胜处里,包含了第二解脱;在色胜处里,包含了第三解脱,这是从它们同属克服作用这一点来归纳的。但在这里,因为是无余、直接的教导,为了显示解脱和胜处互不混杂,所以把解脱放在一边,单独说胜处。而且,一切解脱的作用都已经在讲解脱时说过。由此可知:经里说的“内有色想”等两种胜处,在阿毗达摩里没有提到;而“有色,见诸色”等说法,是一切解脱作用共通的说法,因此才作出了这样的判定。这一点必须这样接受;如果不接受,就必须在经和阿毗达摩文句的差异之外,另外给出理由。那么,这里该怎么说呢?难道不是义注里已经说过:“为什么经里说‘内有色想,一人见外色少’等,而这里不那样说,却在四种胜处里都说‘内无色想’?”并且给出了“因为内色不可被克服”这个理由吗?其实那不是真正的理由说明,真正的理由说明是:无论在哪里,都不说“见内色”,而处处只说“见外色”。正因如此,无论在那里还是这里,都说“只应克服外色”。内色不可被克服,是因为内色不像外色那样清晰显现。因为如果没有清晰显现,上智就不可能克服所缘。然而,义注里不是说,经文两种读法的差异,是以教说的善巧作为理由来说的吗?确实说过,而且应当按前面所说的判定方式来理解。所谓教说的善巧,就是随顺所化众生的意乐,把确实存在的间接说法加以阐明,而不是随便什么说法都算。胜处应当这样理解。巴利
Tatiyacatutthaabhibhāyatanesu dutiyavimokkho, vaṇṇābhibhāyatanesu tatiyavimokkho ca abhibhavanappavattito saṅgahito, idha pana nippariyāyadesanattā vimokkhābhibhāyatanāni asaṅkarato dassetuṃ vimokkhe vajjetvā abhibhāyatanāni kathitāni. Sabbāni ca vimokkhakiccāni vimokkhadesanāya vuttāni, tadetaṃ ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī’’ti sutte āgatassa abhibhāyatanadvayassa abhidhamme avacanato ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnañca sabbavimokkhakiccasādhāraṇavacanabhāvato vavatthānaṃ katanti viññāyati. Avassañcetaṃ eva sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, na sampaṭicchantehi suttābhidhammapāṭhabhede aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ. Atha kimettha vattabbaṃ, nanu aṭṭhakathāyameva ‘‘kasmā pana yathā suttante ‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittānī’tiādi vuttaṃ, evaṃ avatvā idha catūsupi abhibhāyatanesu ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññitāva vuttā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ajjhattarūpānaṃ anabhibhavanīyato’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttanti? Na taṃ tassa kāraṇavacanaṃ, atha kho katthaci ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpāni passatī’’ti avatvā sabbattha yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti, tassa ca kāraṇavacanaṃ. Teneva hi tattha vā idha vā ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāniyeva abhibhavitabbānī’’ti tattheva vuttaṃ, anabhibhavanīyatā ca ajjhattarūpānaṃ bahiddhā rūpāni viya avibhūtattā. Na hi suṭṭhu vibhūtabhāvamantarena ñāṇuttarānaṃ ārammaṇābhibhavanaṃ sambhavatīti. Nanu ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pāṭhadvayavisesassa desanāvilāso kāraṇabhāvena vuttoti? Saccaṃ vutto, so ca yathāvuttavavatthānavaseneva veditabbo . Desanāvilāso hi nāma vineyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vijjamānasseva pariyāyassa vibhāvanaṃ, na yassa kassacīti. Evaṃ tāva abhibhāyatanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,“解脱”指的是已经证得禅那的人,想再次入定时,在速行心路过程刚一结束的当下,就像小孩坐在父亲腿上自然松开手脚一样,对所缘毫无迟疑与障碍,又像最初作意时那样轻快,不升起退出定境的心念,甚至不到四五个心识刹那,就随着安住所缘的力量而运转、已经达到自在的禅那——这就是它的名称。因为这种禅那是依遍处或胜处而生起的,已经很好地从敌对法中解脱出来,又因为心倾注于所缘,所以称为“解脱”。义注中也这样说:巴利
Tattha vimokkhoti paṭiladdhajjhānassa jhānaṃ samāpajjitukāmatāvasappavattajavanavīthisamanantarameva pituaṅke vissaṭṭhaaṅgapaccaṅgassa viya dārakassa ārammaṇe nirāsaṅkameva hutvā paṭhamakappanā viya ca lahuṃ avuṭṭhahitvā antamaso catupañcacittakkhaṇato anosakkitvā ārammaṇe abhirativasena pavattassa vasibhāvappattassa jhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tañhi kasiṇāyatanavasena vā abhibhāyatanavasena vā uppannaṃ paccanīkadhammehi suṭṭhu vimuttattā, ārammaṇe adhimuttatāya ca ‘‘vimokkho’’ti vuccati. Vuttampi cetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
那么,应该从什么意义上来理解“解脱”呢?从胜解的意义上。这个胜解的意义又是什么呢?就是从敌对法中善巧地解脱出来,以及以欢喜地安住于所缘的力量而善巧地胜解。巴利
‘‘Kenaṭṭhena pana vimokkho veditabboti? Adhimuccanaṭṭhena. Ko ayaṃ adhimuccanaṭṭho nāma? Paccanīkadhammehi ca suṭṭhu vimuccanaṭṭho, ārammaṇe ca abhirativasena suṭṭhu adhimuccanaṭṭho’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 248).
如果只有达到自在的禅那才算解脱,那为什么在它所缘的四种当中,经文说到了“有限”呢?未达自在的禅那被称为“有限”吗?这没有过失,因为这里是就圆满达到自在的禅那来说的,而未圆满达到自在的禅那则以其有限性在那里被意指,所以只有达到自在的禅那才叫解脱,不是另一种。另一种呢,如果是依遍处而生起的,就是遍处;如果是依胜处而生起的,就是胜处。不过有些人说:“从最初的安止到后后每一个,由于从后后的对治善得解脱,依遍处和胜处而生起的,除了初准备之外,其余都就是解脱。”巴利
Yadi vasibhāvappattameva vimokkho, kathamassa ārammaṇacatukke parittatā pāḷiyaṃ vuttā. Avasitāpattañhi jhānaṃ parittanti vuccatīti? Nāyaṃ doso, paripuṇṇavasibhāvappattaṃ sandhāya aparipuṇṇavasibhāvappattassa parittabhāvena tattha adhippetattā, tasmā vasibhāvappattameva jhānaṃ vimokkho nāma, na itaraṃ. Itaraṃ pana yadi kasiṇāyatanavasena uppannaṃ, kasiṇāyatanaṃ. Atha abhibhāyatanavasena, abhibhāyatanamevāti. Keci pana ‘‘paṭhamaappanāto pacchimapacchimāya paṭipakkhato suṭṭhu vimuttattā kasiṇāyatanavasena, abhibhāyatanavasena ca uppannaṃ paṭhamakappanaṃ ṭhapetvā sesaṃ vimokkhoyevā’’ti vadanti.
不过,这个按数目来算有三种。就像所说的:巴利
Taṃ panetaṃ gaṇanato tividhaṃ. Yathāha –
有色者见诸色,内无色想者见外诸色,唯胜解于净。巴利
‘‘Rūpī rūpāni passati, ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, subhanteva adhimutto hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.174; 3.339; paṭi. ma. 1.209).
在这里,“有色”是指在自己身体上,从头发等部位开始修起来、属于色界的禅那之色;因为具有这个色,所以叫“有色”。“见诸色”是指以禅那之眼,也能看见外在的青色遍处等色。通过这一句,说明了在以内、外为所缘的诸遍处中证得禅那。“内无色想”是指内在没有色想,意思是自己头发等部位没有修起色界禅那。通过这一句,说明了先在外在做预备修习,然后只在外在证得禅那。“净”这一句,则说明了在极其清净的青色等颜色遍处中所成就的诸禅那。在这里,虽然刚进入安止时并没有“净”这样的作意,但若有人以极其清净的净遍处为所缘而安住,由于他是以胜解“净”的方式进入初禅及第二禅等而安住,所以才这样教导。不过在《无碍解道》中,则是依“比丘以与慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”等说法,按梵住来讲净解脱。而在《法集论》中,因为梵住是另外单独出现的,所以那里不采用那种方式,义注中只按极清净的青色等遍处来讲净解脱;这里也同样是按照那里所说的方式来判定。这样,首先应当知道解脱禅那。巴利
Tattha rūpīti ajjhattaṃ kesādīsu uppāditaṃ rūpajjhānaṃ rūpaṃ, tadassa atthīti rūpī. Rūpāni passatīti bahiddhāpi nīlakasiṇādirūpāni jhānacakkhunā passati. Iminā ajjhattabahiddhavatthukesu kasiṇesu jhānapaṭilābho dassito. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññīti ajjhattaṃ narūpasaññī, attano kesādīsu anuppāditarūpāvacarajjhānoti attho. Iminā bahiddhā parikammaṃ katvā bahiddhāva paṭiladdhajjhānatā dassitā. ‘‘Subha’’nti iminā suvisuddhesu nīlādīsu vaṇṇakasiṇesu jhānāni dassitāni. Tattha kiñcāpi antoappanāyaṃ ‘‘subha’’nti ābhogo natthi, yo pana suvisuddhaṃ subhakasiṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā viharati, so yasmā ‘‘subha’’nti adhimuccanavasena paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajjitvā viharati, tathā dutiyādīni, tasmā evaṃ desanā katāti. Paṭisambhidāmagge pana ‘‘idha bhikkhu mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.212) brahmavihāravasena subhavimokkho vutto. Dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ pana brahmavihārānaṃ visuṃyeva āgatattā taṃ nayaṃ paṭikkhipitvā sunīlakādivaseneva subhavimokkho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anuññātoti idhāpi tattha vuttanayeneva vavatthānaṃ katanti evaṃ tāva vimokkhajhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“随顺相应”是指与下等、中等、上等层次相应。初禅的下等能促成投生到寿命为劫的三分之一的梵众天,中等能促成投生到寿命为半劫的梵辅天,上等能促成投生到寿命为一劫的大梵天。第二禅和第三禅也是如此:下等能促成投生到寿命为二劫的少光天,中等能促成投生到寿命为四劫的无量光天,上等能促成投生到寿命为八劫的光音天。第四禅的下等能促成投生到寿命为十六劫的少净天,中等能促成投生到寿命为三十二劫的无量净天,上等能促成投生到寿命为六十四劫的遍净天。至于第五禅,三个层次都能促成投生到寿命为五百劫的广果天;外道以离想之欲修习这同一个第五禅,则只能投生到同样寿命五百劫的无想有情天。然而,不来者无论在凡夫等阶段还是之后修习,都会随信等根的增上倾向次第,依次投生到寿命为一千劫、二千劫、四千劫、八千劫、一万六千劫的五净居天,即无烦天、无热天、善现天、善见天、阿迦腻吒天。如此,这个“随顺相应”能促成十六种色界梵天世界的投生。因此说“随顺相应……能促成……”。巴利
Yathānurūpanti hīnādianurūpaṃ. Paṭhamajjhānañhi hīnaṃ kappassa tatiyabhāgāyuke brahmapārisajje upapattiṃ nipphādeti, majjhimaṃ upaḍḍhakappāyuke brahmapurohite, paṇītaṃ ekakappāyuke mahābrahme. Tathā dutiyajjhānaṃ, tatiyajjhānañca hīnaṃ dvikappāyuke parittābhe, majjhimaṃ catukappāyuke appamāṇābhe, paṇītaṃ aṭṭhakappāyuke ābhassare. Catutthajjhānaṃ hīnaṃ soḷasakappāyuke parittāsubhe, majjhimaṃ dvattiṃsakappāyuke appamāṇasubhe, paṇītaṃ catusaṭṭhikappāyuke subhakiṇhe. Pañcamajjhānaṃ pana tividhampi pañcakappasatāyuke vehapphale upapattiṃ nipphādeti, tadeva titthiyehi saññāvirāgavasena bhāvitaṃ pañcakappasatāyukeyeva asaññasatte. Anāgāmīhi pana puthujjanādikāle pacchāpi bhāvitaṃ saddhādiindriyādhimuttatānukkamena yathākkamaṃ sahassadvisahassacatusahassaaṭṭhasahassasoḷasasahassakappāyukesu avihāatappāsudassāsudassīakaniṭṭhanāmakesu pañcasuddhāvāsesu upapattiṃ nipphādetīti evametaṃ yathānurūpaṃ soḷasarūpāvacarabrahmalokūpapattinipphādakanti āha ‘‘yathānurūpaṃ…pe… hotī’’ti.
不过,在色界有中持续存在的、能够获得的受用成就,只是欲界善业的果报,所以这里不说“成就有的受用成就”,而只说成就投生,应当这样理解。在这里,从第二禅地开始,一切处都应当按圆满大劫来划分;而初禅地则按无数劫来划分。因为在初禅地无法按其他方式来划分,即使在一劫中也不会毁坏,因为那里的寿命只安立在大劫的四分之一。巴利
Yasmā pana rūpabhavepi pavattiyaṃ labhitabbā upabhogasampatti kāmāvacarasseva phalaṃ, tasmā idha ‘‘bhavabhogasampattiṃ nipphādetī’’ti avatvā upapattinipphādanameva vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca dutiyajjhānabhūmiṃ upādāya sabbattha paripuṇṇassa mahākappassa vasena paricchedo daṭṭhabbo, paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ pana asaṅkhyeyyakappavasena. Na hi tattha itaravasena paricchedo sambhavati ekakappepi avināsābhāvena mahākappassa catutthabhāgeyeva tassa saṇṭhahanato.
无色界善法注释巴利
Arūpāvacarakusalavaṇṇanā
现在到了解说无色界善法的地方,解说的机会已经到来,所以为了解说它,就说了“于其余之中”等话。除去虚空遍,把任何一遍拆除扩展后得到的虚空,叫作“遍拆除虚空”。在那个虚空里生起的识,就叫空无边处。因为它成了第二无色界的所缘。“一切”:意思是以一切方式,也就是依见色相、拿棍棒取物等所生的过患等一切方式,对色法、对地遍等色相、以及对以那些色相为所缘的禅那,以见过患的方式;或者对那些色相,以断除贪爱、不想证入等方式。或者,“一切”是指一切种类,也就是按善等分类,没有剩余。 “色想”:是以“想”为代表来说的色界禅那以及它们的所缘。因为色界禅那也叫作“色”,就像“有色者见色”等说法里,省略了后面的词一样。它的所缘,也就是遍色,就像“由天所施”“在外见色”等说法里,省略了前面的词一样。所以在这里,对色、对色禅那,以及和它一起生起的想,就叫作“色想”,这是以想为代表来说的色界禅那的别名。“色”之想属于彼,就叫“色想”,意思是具有色之名。应当知道,这是按所取的地遍等分类,来称呼它的所缘。因为“色想”是就同一种类剩余的方式作的解说。 “超越”:就是离欲、灭尽。这话说的是什么呢?就是对这十五种按善、异熟、唯作来分的、称为禅那的色想,以及对这九种按地遍等来分的、称为所缘的色想,对这一切没有剩余,以一切方式;或者对那些色相,以断除贪爱、不想证入等方式,由于离欲、灭尽,由于厌离,也由于镇伏与它们相连的欲贪,而生起的、与空无边处想俱行的无色界善心。因为如果不彻底超越色想,就不可能生起那个心。巴利
Idāni arūpāvacarakusalassa niddesāvakāso anuppattoti tanniddesatthamāha ‘‘sesesu panā’’tiādi. Ākāsakasiṇavajjitassa yassa kassaci kasiṇassa ugghāṭanato laddhamākāsaṃ kasiṇugghāṭimākāsaṃ. Tattha pavattaṃ viññāṇanti ākāsānañcāyatanamāha. Tañhi dutiyāruppassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti. Sabbasoti sabbākārena, rūpanimittadaṇḍādānasambhavadassanādinā sabbena rūpadhammesu, pathavīkasiṇādirūpanimittesu tadārammaṇajjhānesu ca dosadassanākārena, tesu eva vā rūpanimittesu nikantippahānaasamāpajjitukāmatādinā ākārenāti attho. Atha vā sabbasoti sabbāsaṃ, kusalādibhedena anavasesānanti attho. Rūpasaññānanti saññāsīsena vuttarūpāvacarajjhānānañceva tadārammaṇānañca. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuccati uttarapadalopena ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu viya. Tadārammaṇampi kasiṇarūpaṃ purimapadalopena ‘‘devena dattoti, bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu viya, tasmā idha rūpe rūpajjhāne taṃsahagatasaññā rūpasaññāti gahitā, saññāsīsena vuttarūpāvacarajjhānānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. ‘‘Rūpa’’nti saññā assāti rūpasaññaṃ, rūpanāmavantanti attho. Taṃgahitena pathavīkasiṇādibhedassa tadārammaṇassa cetaṃ nāmanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Rūpasaññāna’’nti hi sarūpekasesavasena niddeso kato. Samatikkamāti virāgā, nirodhā ca. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Etāsaṃ kusalavipākakiriyāvasena pañcadasannaṃ jhānasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpasaññānaṃ, etesañca pathavīkasiṇādivasena navannaṃ ārammaṇasaṅkhātānaṃ rūpasaññānaṃ anavasesānaṃ sabbākārena ca, tesu eva vā nikantippahānaasamāpajjitukāmatādinā ākārena virāgā, nirodhā ca jigucchanato ceva tappaṭibandhachandarāgavikkhambhanato ca nibbattaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāya sahagataṃ arūpāvacarakusalacittaṃ. Na hi sakkā sabbaso anatikkantarūpasaññena taṃ nibbattetunti.
不只是因为超越这些(色想)才成就了它,还因为以有对想等的消亡等(为条件才成就),所以说“有对想”等。其中,由眼等诸处与色等诸所缘的抵触——即所谓相互结合的撞击——而生起的想,就是有对想,这是色想等双五想的异名。正如所说:巴利
Na kevalaṃ etāsaṃyeva samatikkamanato idaṃ nibbattaṃ, atha kho paṭighasaññādīnamatthaṅgamāditopīti āha ‘‘paṭighasaññāna’’ntiādi. Tattha cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ, rūpādīnañca ārammaṇānaṃ paṭighātena aññamaññasamodhānasaṅkhātena paṭihananena uppannā saññā paṭighasaññā, rūpasaññādidvipañcasaññānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha –
在这里,什么是有对想?色想、声想、香想、味想、触想,这些就叫作有对想。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā paṭighasaññā? Rūpasaññā saddasaññā gandhasaññā rasasaññā phoṭṭhabbasaññā, imā vuccanti paṭighasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 603).
这句话的意思是:通过让那些作为善与不善果报的法息灭、舍断、不再生起、不再运转。有人问:难道这些法在进入色界禅那的人那里也不存在吗?因为在进入初禅等状态时,心并不通过五门运转,这是对的。但就像在“由于舍断乐、舍断苦……进入并安住于第四禅”这段经文里,为了赞叹的缘故,在别处已经舍断的乐与苦,在第四禅中仍然被提到;又像在“由于舍断有身见和疑……由于贪嗔痴变薄,进入并安住于一来道”这段经文里,在初道就已经舍断的有身见等,在第二道中仍然被提到;同样地,在这个禅那中,为了激发修行者的精进,出于对这个禅那的赞叹,才说这些法在这里被舍断。应当这样理解。或者也可以说:虽然那些法在进入色界禅那的人那里也不存在,但它们并不是因为已被舍断才不存在,而是因为缺乏缘才不存在。为什么呢?因为色界修习并不导向离色,那些法的运转恰恰依赖于色。而无色界修习则导向离色,所以说“它们在这里被舍断”是合适的。正因为它们在此之前未被舍断,世尊才说“对于进入初禅的人,声音是刺”。而在这里,正因为它们已被舍断,才通过“不动行”等说法,以及“那些寂静的解脱,超越色而成为无色”等语句,宣说了无色界的不动性和寂静解脱性。巴利
Tāsaṃ kusalākusalavipākabhūtānaṃ atthaṅgamā pahānā asamuppādā appavattikaraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nanu ca etā rūpāvacarajjhānasamāpannassāpi na santi. Na hi paṭhamajjhānādisamāpannakāle pañcadvāravasena cittaṃ pavattatīti? Saccametaṃ, yathā pana ‘‘sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti ettha pasaṃsāvasena aññattha pahīnānampi sukhadukkhānaṃ catutthajjhāne, ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchānaṃ pahānā rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmimaggaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti ettha paṭhamamaggeyeva pahīnānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ dutiyamagge ca vacanaṃ, evameva imasmiṃ jhāne paṭipajjanakānaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ imassa jhānassa pasaṃsāvasena etāsaṃ ettha vacananti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā kiñcāpi tā rūpāvacarasamāpannassāpi na santi, na pana pahīnattā na santi. Kiñcarahi paccayābhāvena. Na hi rūpāvacarabhāvanā rūpavirāgāya saṃvattati, rūpāyattā eva tāsaṃ pavattīti. Arūpabhāvanā pana rūpavirāgāya saṃvattati, tasmā ‘‘tā ettha pahīnā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Tathā hi etāsaṃ ito pubbe appahīnattāyeva ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpannassa saddo kaṇṭako’’ti vutto bhagavatā. Idha ca pahīnattā eva arūpasamāpattīnaṃ āneñjābhisaṅkhāravacanādīhi, ‘‘ye te santā vimokkhā atikkamma rūpe arūpā’’tiādinā ca āneñjatā, santavimokkhatā ca vuttā.
“种种想”是指:在种种不同的所缘上生起的想,或者说,是种种不同的想,也就是前面说过的其余四十四种欲界想。这就是它的含义。因为正是这些——巴利
Nānattasaññānanti nānatte gocare pavattānaṃ, nānattānaṃ vā saññānaṃ, vuttāvasesānaṃ catucattālīsakāmāvacarasaññānanti attho. Etā eva hi –
在这里,什么是种种想?对于未入等至而具备意界或具备意识界者的想、了知、了知的状态——这些被称为种种想。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā nānattasaññā? Asamāpannassa manodhātusamaṅgissa vā manoviññāṇadhātusamaṅgissa vā saññā sañjānanā sañjānitattaṃ, imā vuccanti nānattasaññāyo’’ti (vibha. 604) –
像这样,在《分别论》中已经分别解说了。不过,那些想因为在色、声等种种不同、各有不同自性的所缘上生起,又因为可分为八种欲界善想、十二种不善想、十一种欲界善果报想、两种不善果报想、十一种欲界唯作想,这样共四十四种,自性各异,彼此不相似,所以称为“种种想”。“不作意”是指:完全不转向、不留意、不省察,或者说不让有分心在速行的推动下进入所缘,也就是除了遍作虚空之外,心不在种种所缘上造作。这样说,其实也就说明了作为种种想与作意之因的色法已被超越;但在色界禅那中,因为不存在这些,所以不说“由不作意种种想”。那么,超越等说法之间有什么差别呢?回答说:因为色想和有对想在此禅那所生的趣中也不存在,而在没有无色想修习的情况下,从死后往上,色想和有对想直到自己的果报生起之前,都处于不生起的法性,更何况在证入此禅那的时候,所以用“超越”和“灭去”两种方式都显示了它们的不存在。至于种种想,那些在该趣中不生的,是因为它们依附于色而缺乏所依处,所以不生,并不是被无色修习所阻止;而有些因为未被阻止,所以还会生起,因此对它们说“不作意”,也就是不转向、不省察、不让有分心在速行的推动下进入。即使那些想正在生起,对于证入禅那的人来说,对它们的不作意本身就是条件,否则禅那的证入就不可能。总之,用“超越色想”这一句,说明了舍弃一切色界法;用“有对想灭去、不作意种种想”这些,说明了舍弃一切欲界心和心所,也说明了不作意。通过这三者,则说明了定力的稳固。巴利
Evaṃ vibhaṅge vibhajitvā vuttā. Tā pana yasmā rūpasaddādibhede nānatte nānāsabhāve ārammaṇe pavattanti, yasmā ca aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā, dvādasa akusalasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā, dve akusalavipākasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti evaṃ catucattālīsappabhedā nānāsabhāvā, aññamaññaṃ asadisā, tasmā ‘‘nānattasaññā’’ti vuccanti. Amanasikārāti sabbaso anāvajjanā asamannāhārā apaccavekkhaṇahetu javanapaṭipādakena vā bhavaṅgacittassa anto akaraṇā ṭhapetvā kasiṇugghāṭimākāsaṃ nānārammaṇe cittassa asaṅkharaṇatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Iminā hi nānattasaññāmanasikārahetūnaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ samatikkamopi vutto, rūpajjhāne pana tadabhāvato ‘‘nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Atha samatikkamādīnaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Vuccate – yasmā rūpasaññā, paṭighasaññā ca iminā jhānena nibbattitabhavepi na vijjanti, arūpasaññāya bhāvanāya abhāve cutito uddhaṃ uppattirahānaṃ rūpasaññāpaṭighasaññānaṃ yāva attano vipākuppatti, tāva anuppattidhammataṃ āpādiyamānattā, pageva pana imaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannakāle, tasmā ‘‘samatikkamā, atthaṅgamā’’ti ubhayathāpi tāsaṃ abhāvoyeva dassito. Nānattasaññāsu pana yā tasmiṃ bhave na uppajjanti ekantarūpanissitattā, tā anokāsatāya na uppajjanti, na arūpabhāvanāya nivāritattā, anivāritattā ca kāci uppajjanti, tasmā tāsaṃ amanasikāro anāvajjanaṃ apaccavekkhaṇaṃ javanapaṭipādakena vā bhavaṅgamanassa anto akaraṇaṃ appavesanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatra pavattamānānampi hi jhānaṃ samāpannassa tāsaṃ amanasikāroyeva itarathā jhānasamāpattiyā abhāvato. Iti saṅkhepato ‘‘rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā’’ti iminā sabbarūpāvacaradhammānaṃ pahānaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā’’ti sabbesaṃ kāmāvacaracittacetasikānaṃ pahānaṃ, amanasikāro ca vutto, tīhi panetehi samādhissa thirabhāvo kathitoti.
与空无边处想同行的状态:这里,“没有边际”所以叫“无边”;无边的虚空就是“空无边”,也就是除去遍处后所显的虚空。不过,无边性应当理解为:因为没有生灭的边际,或者因为作意的方式是无边的。因为虚空不是有自性的法,所以看不出它有生的边际或灭的边际。有自性的法,因为先前没有而后生起,生起之后又坏灭,所以被生灭的边际所限定;虚空不是这样。而修行者作意它时,并不执取所谓分际的边际,只是取色的远离,以遍满无边的方式让作意运转起来,因此应当从没有生灭边际的角度,或者从作意的角度,知道这是“无边”。本来应该说“无边虚空”,但按照“无边”一词后置的用法,说成“空无边”。空无边本身就是“空无边”,把连声后的 ta 变成 ca,这同一个处,因为作为与它相应法的禅那的所缘,按住持的意义,就像天人的处所一样,所以叫“空无边处”。在那里面达到安止的想,就是“空无边处想”;与那个想同行的识,就是“与空无边处想同行”。或者,空无边是与它相应法之想的处所,所以叫“空无边处”;那就是想;与那个想同行的禅那,就是“与空无边处想同行”。巴利
Ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāsahagatanti ettha pana nāssa antoti anantaṃ, anantaṃ ākāsaṃ ākāsānantaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsaṃ, anantatā pana uppādavayantābhāvato anantamanasikāravasena vā veditabbā. Na hi etassa uppādanto, vayanto vā paññāyati asabhāvadhammattā. Sabhāvadhammo hi ahutvā sambhavanato, hutvā ca vinassanato uppādavayantaparicchinno, netaro. Na ca panetaṃ manasi karonto yogāvacaro tassa paricchedasaṅkhātamantaṃ gaṇhāti, atha kho rūpavivekamattasseva gahaṇena anantapharaṇākāreneva manasikāraṃ pavatteti, tasmā uppādavayantavirahato manasikāravasena vā etamanantanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Anantākāsa’’nti ca vattabbe ananta-saddassa paranipātavasena ‘‘ākāsānanta’’nti vuccati. Ākāsānantameva ākāsānañcaṃ saṃyogaparassa ta-kārassa ca-kāraṃ katvā, tadeva āyatanaṃ sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ārammaṇabhāvato adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena devāyatanaṃ viyāti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ, tasmiṃ appanāpattā saññā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā, tāya sahagataṃ viññāṇaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāsahagataṃ. Atha vā ākāsānañcaṃ āyatanamassā sasampayuttadhammāya saññāyāti ākāsānañcāyatanā, sāyeva saññā, tāya jhānaṃ sahagatanti ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāsahagataṃ.
识……乃至……俱行:这里说的就是第一无色界的识。因为它具有那样的自性法,所以虽然也有生起和坏灭等边际,但从以所缘为所缘的方式来看,它遍满无边虚空;或者从作意转起的方式来看,由于不执取自身的边际,因此称为“识无边”。本来应该说“viññāṇānañca”,但“viññāṇañca”这个词已经固定用来表达这个意思,也可以说是省略了ā音和na音,所以就说成“viññāṇañca”。这样处理后,接下来就会说——巴利
Viññāṇa…pe… sahagatanti yadetaṃ paṭhamāruppaviññāṇaṃ, taṃsabhāvadhammattā uppādādiantavantampi ārammaṇakaraṇavasena anantākāse pharaṇato attānaṃ ārabbha antassa aggahaṇavasena pavattamanasikārato vā anantaṃ viññāṇanti viññāṇānantaṃ, ‘‘viññāṇānañca’’nti vattabbe viññāṇañca-saddo tadatthe nirūḷho ā-kāra na-kāralopoti vā katvā ‘‘viññāṇañca’’micceva vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā vakkhati –
但此或许应当这样说:识无边。巴利
‘‘Viññāṇānantamiccevaṃ, vattabbaṃ panidaṃ siyā’’ti.
或者,应该依靠第二无色界的识,以所缘为方式而达到,所以叫识无边处。其余部分和前面一样。巴利
Atha vā dutiyāruppaviññāṇena añcitabbaṃ ārammaṇavasena pāpuṇitabbanti viññāṇañcaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.
与无所有处……中略……俱行:对于这个第一无色界识来说,没有任何“所有”,所以叫“无所有”;意思是说,连最微小的坏灭分都没有剩下。因为如果还有哪怕一点点坏灭分,它就会成为“有所有”。无所有的状态就是“无所有”,这是对空无边处识不存在的另一种说法。其余部分和前面说的一样。巴利
Ākiñcaññā…pe… sahagatanti nāssa paṭhamāruppaviññāṇassa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sati hi bhaṅgamattepi tassa sakiñcanatā siyā. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇābhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
既不是想……中略……俱行:因为没有像下地诸禅中那样的粗显之想,所以“它没有想”,这叫“非想”;又因为还有微细的想存在,所以“它并非没有想”,这叫“非非想”;它既是非想又是非非想,所以叫“非想非非想”,也就是第四无色禅那。如果是这样,那是不是应该直接说“非想非非想”呢?确实如此。不过,这是为了让言辞优美,才把音声拉长来说的。或者也可以这样理解:“它没有想,并非没有想”,把这两层意思合在一起,按照多财释的构词方式,说成“非想非非想”。那非想非非想既是处,又因为属于意处和法处的范围,所以叫“非想非非想处”;与它相应的想俱行,就是“非想非非想处想俱行”。又或者,想本身因为不能执行敏锐之想的作用,所以是“非想”;就像热水里的火界一样,因为它达到了只剩诸行、极其微细的状态,所以是“非非想”;这样合起来就是非想非非想。它本身因为是其余诸法的依止缘,或者以住处之义而属于法处,所以叫“处”,也就是“非想非非想处”;已成为非想非非想处的想俱行,所以叫“非想非非想处想俱行”。巴利
Nevasaññā…pe… sahagatanti heṭṭhimajhānesu viya oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvato nevassa saññā atthīti nevasaññaṃ, sukhumāya ca saññāya atthitāya nāssa saññā natthīti nāsaññaṃ, nevasaññañca taṃ nāsaññañceti nevasaññānāsaññaṃ, catutthāruppajjhānaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘nevasaññanāsañña’’nti vattabbaṃ? Saccametaṃ. Vacanasobhanatthaṃ pana dīghaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā nevassa saññā nāsaññāti evaṃ ekajjhaṃ bahubbīhisamāsavasena ‘‘nevasaññānāsañña’’nti vuttaṃ. Nevasaññānāsaññañca taṃ āyatanañca manāyatanadhammāyatanapariyāpannattāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ, tena sampayuttaṃ saññāsahagataṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññāsahagataṃ. Atha vā saññāyeva paṭusaññākiccakaraṇe asamatthatāya nevasaññā, uṇhodake tejodhātu viya saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattiyā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, sā eva sesadhammānaṃ nissayapaccayatāya, adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena dhammāyatanapariyāpannatāya eva vā āyatananti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanabhūtāya saññāya sahagatanti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññāsahagataṃ.
随其相应……中略……能令投生:也就是按各自相应的方式,在四种无色地中成就投生,如说“在第一无色地的是第一,在第二无色地的是第二”等等。不过要知道,其中第一无色地的寿命是两万劫,第二是四万劫,第三是六万劫,第四则是八万四千劫。巴利
Yathānurūpaṃ…pe… nipphādakanti ‘‘paṭhamāruppabhūmiyā paṭhamaṃ, dutiyāruppabhūmiyā dutiya’’ntiādinā attano anurūpavasena catūsu arūpabhūmīsu upapattisādhakaṃ. Tāsu pana paṭhamā vīsatisahassakappāyukā hoti, dutiyā cattālīsasahassakappāyukā, tatiyā saṭṭhisahassakappāyukā, catutthā pana caturāsītisahassakappāyukāti veditabbaṃ.
出世间善法注释巴利
Lokuttarakusalavaṇṇanā
像这样把三种世间善法说明完之后,现在要说明出世间善法,所以说“其他则……”等。以坏灭、崩解之义称为“世间”,它有三种:行世间、有情世间、器世间。此超越于彼,所以叫“出世间”。因为四道都以无漏性,从称为取蕴的行世间超出。在有情世间方面,入流道从凡夫世间超出,一来道从入流者世间超出,不来道从一来者世间超出,阿罗汉道从不来者世间超出。在器世间方面,初道从恶趣世间超出,一来道从欲界的一部分超出,不来道从整个欲界超出,阿罗汉道从色界、无色界超出。这样,四种道心都从三种世间超出,所以是“出世间”;又因为远离可呵责的动摇等而是“善”,因为思惟等而是“心”,所以是出世间善心。果则因为已经超出世间,所以是“出世间”。或者,两者与涅槃一起,从称为取蕴的世间超出而更为殊胜,所以是“出世间”。正如所说:“诸比丘,于一切法中,不论有为或无为,离欲被说为这些法中最上。”巴利
Evaṃ tividhampi lokiyakusalaṃ niddisitvā idāni lokuttarakusalaṃ niddisanto āha ‘‘itaraṃpanā’’tiādi. Lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, so tividho – saṅkhāraloko sattaloko bhājanalokoti. Tato idaṃ uttaratīti lokuttaraṃ. Cattāropi hi maggā upādānakkhandhasaṅkhātasaṅkhāralokato uttaranti anāsavabhāvena. Sattalokesu ca sotāpattimaggo anariyalokato uttarati, sakadāgāmimaggo sotāpannalokato, anāgāmimaggo sakadāgāmilokato, arahattamaggo anāgāmilokato uttarati. Bhājanalokesu pana paṭhamamaggo apāyalokato uttarati, sakadāgāmimaggo kāmalokekadesato, anāgāmimaggo sakalakāmalokato, arahattamaggo rūpārūpalokato uttarati. Iti catubbidhampi maggacittaṃ tividhalokato uttaratīti lokuttaraṃ, kucchitasalanādito pana kusalaṃ, cintanādito cittañcāti lokuttarakusalacittaṃ. Phalaṃ pana lokato uttiṇṇattā lokuttaraṃ, ubhayampi vā saha nibbānena upādānakkhandhasaṅkhātalokato uttaraṃ visiṭṭhataranti lokuttaraṃ. Yathāha ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90).
从“有定所依”和“无定所依”的区分来说:入流道因为离开他人的声音教法作为助缘就不能生起,所以在无色界存在中不可能出现,因此它是“有定所依”;而其余七种出世间法,即使没有他人的声音教法,单靠观的力量也能成就,因此在无色界存在中也可能出现,所以是“无定所依”。巴利
Niyatāniyatavatthukabhedatoti sotāpattimaggassa paratoghosapaccayena vinā anuppajjanato arūpabhave sambhavo natthīti taṃ niyatavatthukaṃ, itaraṃ pana sattavidhampi paratoghosaṃ vināpi vipassanābaleneva nipphajjanato tatthāpi sambhavatīti aniyatavatthukaṃ.
以三种……(中略)……有三种:因为它是出世间解脱的门径,所以要通过被称为解脱门的空随观等三种出起通达观来证得,因此这出世间善法有三种:空、无相、无愿。那么,什么是出世间解脱呢?就是九种出世间法。正如经中所说:“四圣道、四沙门果以及涅槃,这就是无漏解脱。”因为它们从杂染法中彻底解脱出来,所以称为解脱。它们各自又分为三种:空解脱、无相解脱、无愿解脱。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,有三种解脱——空解脱、无相解脱、无愿解脱。”不过在这里,因为是以善法为主,所以特指四道所摄的出世间法。巴利
Tīhi…pe… tividhanti lokuttaravimokkhānaṃ dvārabhāvato vimokkhamukhasaṅkhātāhi suññatānupassanādīhi tīhi vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāhi pattabbato idaṃ lokuttarakusalaṃ tividhaṃ suññataṃ animittaṃ appaṇihitanti. Katame pana te lokuttaravimokkhāti? Nava lokuttaradhammā. Yathāha ‘‘cattāro ca ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni nibbānañca, ayaṃ anāsavo vimokkho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.213). Imāni hi saṃkilesadhammehi suṭṭhu vimuttattā vimokkhā nāma. Tāni pana paccekaṃ suññato vimokkho, animitto vimokkho, appaṇihito vimokkhoti tividhāni. Yathāha ‘‘tayome, bhikkhave, vimokkhā – suññato vimokkho, animitto vimokkho, appaṇihito vimokkho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.209). Idha pana kusalādhikārattā catumaggasaṅkhātāyeva lokuttaradhammā adhippetā.
这些“空”等的名称,应当从它们的由来、自性和所缘这三方面来理解。所谓由来,就是道和果由此而来。这种由来有两种:道的由来和果的由来。其中,出起通达观是道的由来,圣道是果的由来。在道所来之处,就取道的由来;在果所来之处,就取果的由来。但这里因为道已经来了,所以取的是道的由来。因此,是从由来的角度得到名称。从自性方面来说,就是依其本来性质;从所缘方面来说,就是依所缘法。巴利
Suññatādināmalābho ca nesaṃ āgamanato, saguṇato, ārammaṇato ca veditabbo. Tathā hi āgacchati maggo, phalañca etenāti āgamanaṃ. Tañhi duvidhaṃ maggāgamanaṃ, phalāgamanañca. Tesu vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā maggāgamanaṃ, ariyamaggo phalāgamanaṃ. Tattha maggassa āgataṭṭhāne maggāgamanaṃ gahetabbaṃ, phalassa āgataṭṭhāne phalāgamanaṃ. Idha pana maggassa āgatattā maggāgamanaṃ gahitanti. Tato āgamanato. Saguṇatoti sabhāvato. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇadhammato.
如果有人凭借通达一切诸行的无我相而转起的无我随观证得了道,那么他的这种随观,因为镇伏了能造成非空性、以执取我为因的见等烦恼,又因为如实把握了三地诸法的我空性,所以就叫作空随观。而由这种随观所证得的道,因为是从空随观而来的,所以就叫作空。因此说:“作意无我者,以空解脱而解脱。”巴利
Yo hi sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ anattalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasappavattāya anattānupassanāya vasena maggaṃ paṭilabhati, tassa sā anupassanā asuññattakarānaṃ attābhinivesapaccayānaṃ diṭṭhekaṭṭhakilesānaṃ vikkhambhitabhāvena tebhūmakadhammānaṃ attasuññatāya yāthāvato gahaṇato suññatānupassanā nāma hoti. Tāya pana paṭiladdhamaggo suññatāya āgatattā suññato nāma. Tenāha ‘‘anattato manasikaronto suññatavimokkhena vimuccatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.227).
如果有人通过无常随观证得了道,而这种无常随观是依靠通达一切诸行的无常相而生起的,那么他的这种随观,因为镇伏了那些执取常相等的烦恼,不再执取被称为恒常性的常相等相,所以就叫作无相随观。而由这种随观所证得的道,因为是从无相随观而来的,所以就叫作无相。因此说:“作意无常者,以无相解脱而解脱。”巴利
Yo pana sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ aniccalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasappavattāya aniccānupassanāya maggaṃ paṭilabhati, tassa sā anupassanā niccanimittādigāhakarānaṃ kilesānaṃ vikkhambhitattā dhuvabhāvūpaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaniccanimittādino aggahaṇato animittānupassanā nāma. Tāya pana laddhamaggo animittāya āgatattā animitto nāma. Tenāha ‘‘aniccato manasikaronto animittavimokkhena vimuccatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.227).
如果有人依靠“苦随观”而证得道,而这种苦随观是因为通达一切行都是苦这个特征才生起的,那么他的这种随观,由于镇伏了渴爱的希求,已经离开了希求,所以就叫作“无愿随观”。而通过这种无愿随观所证得的道,因为是从无愿随观而来的,所以就叫作“无愿”。因此说:“作意苦的人,以无愿解脱而解脱。”这就是它从由来而得名的情形。巴利
Yo pana sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ dukkhalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasappavattāya dukkhānupassanāya vasena maggaṃ paṭilabhati, tassa sā anupassanā taṇhāpaṇidhānassa vikkhambhanena paṇidhivirahitattā appaṇihitānupassanā nāma. Tāya pana laddhamaggo appaṇihitāya āgatattā appaṇihito nāma. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhato manasikaronto appaṇihitavimokkhena vimuccatī’’ti. Ayaṃ tāvassa āgamanavasena nāmalābho.
不过,从它自身来说,因为远离贪等而空,因为远离常相等相而无相,因为没有渴爱的希求而无愿;从所缘来说,因为它以远离贪等而空、远离常相等相、脱离希求的涅槃为所缘,所以名为空等解脱。应当知道,这是依自性和所缘而得到名称。而且这只适用于经说的方式,不适用于阿毗达摩的方式。因为经说是方便说,另一种是非方便说。因此,依自性和所缘而得到名称,由于是一切共通的,不能作为确定的区分,所以只是依经说的方式这一方便而得到;而依由来得到名称,即使在阿毗达摩的方式中也能作为确定的区分,所以是非方便说。正因如此,那位阿阇梨才以“由三解脱门而证得,所以有三种”为核心来说,而不是说“从空等名称而有三种”。不过,这里的无相之名,从由来的角度,也只是依经说的方式而得到,因为在阿毗达摩中,对于道并没有安立无相之名。没有安立,并不是仅仅因为不应安立,而是因为在非方便说中,道不能得到这个名称。虽然这观在破除常相时生起,但由于没有舍弃行相,所以在非方便说中不能得到无相之名。至于经中所说——巴利
Attano pana rāgādīhi suññatattā, niccanimittādivirahitattā, taṇhāpaṇidhiabhāvato ca saguṇato, rāgādisuññasseva, niccanimittādivirahitassa, paṇidhivippamuttassa ca nibbānassa ārammaṇakaraṇato ārammaṇato ca suññatādivimokkho nāma hotīti evamassa saguṇārammaṇehi nāmalābho daṭṭhabbo. So ca kho suttantapariyāyeneva, no abhidhammapariyāyena. Suttantakathā hi pariyāyadesanā, itarā nippariyāyadesanā, tasmā saguṇārammaṇato nāmassa sabbasādhāraṇabhāvena avavatthānakarattā pariyāyabhāvato suttantapariyāyeneva lābho, āgamanato pana abhidhammapariyāyenapi vavatthānakarabhāvena nippariyāyattā. Teneva hi ācariyena ‘‘tīhi vimokkhamukhehi pattabbato tividha’’nti vimokkhamukhameva dhuraṃ katvā vuttaṃ, na ‘‘suññatādināmato tividha’’nti. Animittanāmaṃ panettha āgamanatopi suttantapariyāyeneva labbhati abhidhamme maggaṃ pati animittanāmassa anuddhatattā. Anuddhaṭattaṃ pana na anuddharitabbatāmattena, atha kho nippariyāyato tassa magge alabbhanato. Kiñcāpi hi ayaṃ vipassanā niccanimittaṃ ugghāṭentī pavattati, saṅkhāranimittassa pana anissajjanato na nippariyāyato animittanāmaṃ labhati. Yaṃ panetaṃ sutte –
应修习无相,断除慢随眠;
从此洞见慢,你就能寂静地生活。巴利
‘‘Animittañca bhāvehi, mānānusayamujjaha; Tato mānābhisamayā, upasanto carissasī’’ti. (su. ni. 344) –
关于道具有“无相”这一名称的说法,是依照前面所说的那种方便方式,在可以获得的意义上来取的。但在阿毗达摩中,如果某个法本身在了义上尚且得不到“无相”这个名称,它怎么能把那个名称给道呢?所以道的“无相”之名并没有被列出。如果是这样,那么“空”这个名称也是一样。因为无我随观虽然把握了补特伽罗空,但并没有把握法空,所以它本身在了义上并不叫空随观,因此也不能把“空”这个名称给道。那么,仅仅因为把握了补特伽罗空,它本身就成为空随观,从而把那个名称给道;同样,无常随观虽然在把握行相时也破除了常相等相,它本身就成为无相随观,从而把“无相”这个名称给道吗?并非如此。因为在了义上,道并不是通过破除常等相而获得无相性的,破除常等相也只是方便说法而已。难道这不是在一切情况下都一样吗?空性和无愿性在了义上也不能在道之外获得,因为把握补特伽罗空和灭尽愿求,是直接由道本身完成的。所以空随观和无愿随观也只是依方便才得到各自的名称,在了义上并不给道这些名称吗?不是的。因为由它们所证得的圣道,在了义上,正是依相应法而确实有空和无愿的名称生起。怎么说呢?除了佛陀出世之外,即使在萨罗邦伽大师等人的时代,由于无我相极其微细、难以了知,是慧的行境,所以在无我随观中,于道刹那,慧根变得极为强盛。正如所说:“作意无我者,慧根强盛。”巴利
Maggassa animittabhāvavacanaṃ, taṃ yathāvuttapariyāyavasena labbhamānaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Abhidhamme pana yā sayampi nippariyāyato animittanāmaṃ na labhati, sā kathaṃ maggassa taṃ dadeyyāti maggassa animittanāmaṃ na uddhaṭaṃ. Yadi evaṃ suññatanāmenapi idaṃ samānaṃ. Anattānupassanāpi hi kiñcāpi puggalasuññataṃ gaṇhāti, dhammasuññataṃ pana na gaṇhātīti sayaṃ nippariyāyena suññatānupassanā nāma na hotīti suññatanāmampi maggassa na dadeyya. Atha puggalasuññatāggahaṇamattena sayaṃ suññatānupassanā hutvā maggassa taṃ dadeyya, aniccānupassanāpi saṅkhāranimittassa gahaṇepi niccanimittādiugghāṭanato sayaṃ animittānupassanā hutvā maggassa animittanāmaṃ dadeyyāti? Na idamevaṃ, niccādinimittugghāṭanena animittabhāvassa nippariyāyena magge alabbhanato niccādinimittugghāṭanassapi pariyāyabhāvato. Nanu idampi sabbattha samānaṃ. Suññataappaṇihitabhāvopi hi nippariyāyena amagge na labbhati puggalasuññataggahaṇassa, paṇidhisosanassa ca ujukaṃ maggeneva nipphajjanato, tasmā suññatānupassanāpi appaṇihitānupassanāpi pariyāyeneva taṃ taṃ nāmaṃ labhantīti maggassa nippariyāyato nāmaṃ na dentīti? Na, tato laddhaariyamaggassa nippariyāyato sampayuttadhammavaseneva suññataappaṇihitanāmasambhavato. Kathaṃ? Ṭhapetvā buddhuppādaṃ sarabhaṅgasatthārādikālepi dubbijānīyabhāvena sukhumassa anattalakkhaṇassa paññāya eva gocarabhāvato anattānupassanāya anupassanato maggakkhaṇe paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘anattato manasikaroto paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hotī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.221).
而它之所以确实得到“空”这个名称,是因为它亲自断除了对“我”的执著,又属于圣道的组成部分,所以从究竟意义上说,它就是“空”。修苦随观时,与定相反的、被称为“愿求”的贪爱被耗尽,因此以这种随观修行的人,在道生起的那一刹那,定根变得特别强。正如经中所说:“作意苦的人,定根变得特别强。”而它之所以确实得到“无愿”这个名称,是因为它亲自耗尽了愿求,又属于圣道的组成部分,所以从究竟意义上说,它就是“无愿”。再者,先听闻一切行都是无常的,之后自己亲自现见,于是对世尊生起广大信心:“世尊确实把无常说为无常啊!”这样作意无常随观的人,在道生起的那一刹那,信根变得特别强。正如经中所说:“作意无常的人,信根变得特别强。”然而,它虽然自己也能从行的相状中出离,却不属于圣道的组成部分,所以从究竟意义上说,它得不到“无相”这个名称。因此,就像以身业为主的心被称为“身业”一样,以被称为“空”的慧根为主的道得到“空”这个名称,以被称为“无愿”的定根为主的道得到“无愿”这个名称,而以信根为主的道,因为信本身得不到“无相”这个名称,所以它自己也得不到这个名称。如果问:如果空等名称是依相应法而获得的,那为什么又说“由入门”呢?确实如此,虽然是依增上根而获得名称,但那也是由入门而获得的。巴利
Tañca pana sayaṃ attābhinivesasamugghāṭanato, ariyamaggapariyāpannattā ca nippariyāyatova suññatanāmaṃ labhati. Dukkhānupassanāya samādhivipaccanīkassa paṇidhisaṅkhātarāgassa sosanato tassā vasena anupassantassa maggakkhaṇe samādhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘dukkhato manasikaroto samādhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hotī’’ti. Tañca pana sayaṃ paṇidhisosanato, ariyamaggapariyāpannattā ca nippariyāyatova appaṇihitanāmaṃ labhati. Sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ pana aniccabhāvaṃ āgamanato sutvā pacchā sayaṃ paccakkhato passato ‘‘aniccameva vata so bhagavā ‘anicca’nti āhā’’ti bhagavati saddhābāhullapaṭilābhato aniccānupassanāya manasikaroto maggakkhaṇe saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘aniccato manasikaroto saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hotī’’ti. Taṃ pana sayaṃ saṅkhāranimittato vuṭṭhahantampi ariyamaggapariyāpannaṃ na hotīti nippariyāyato animittanāmaṃ na labhati, tasmā yathā kāyakammādhikaṃ cittaṃ ‘‘kāyakamma’’nti vuccati, evaṃ suññatasaṅkhātapaññindriyādhimatto maggo suññatanāmaṃ labhati, appaṇihitasaṅkhātasamādhindriyādhimatto appaṇihitanāmaṃ, saddhindriyādhimatto pana saddhāya animittanāmālābhato sayampi taṃ na labhati. Yadi sampayuttadhammavasena suññatādināmālābho, atha kathaṃ ‘‘āgamanato’’ti vuttaṃ? Saccaṃ, āgamanato adhimattassa pana indriyassa vasena laddhanāmampi āgamanatova laddhaṃ hoti.
或者,如果按照阿毗达摩的方式来理解,“空性”其实就是“人空”。这样一来,通过执取“人空”来修的无我随观,就确实可以叫做“空”。而“愿求”指的就是贪等烦恼。因此,通过枯竭贪等烦恼来修的苦随观,也确实可以叫做“无愿”。巴利
Atha vā abhidhammapariyāyenapi suññatabhāvo nāma puggalasuññatāyevāti puggalasuññataggāhitāya anattānupassanāya suññatanāmaṃ nippariyāyatova labbhati. Paṇidhi nāma rāgādikā evāti rāgādisositāya dukkhānupassanāya appaṇihitanāmampi nippariyāyatova labbhati.
关于“相”,如果抛开经教的教学方式,单从阿毗达摩的教学方式来说,它就是行相。由于执取行相,以无常随观并不能在了义上得到“无相”这个名称。因此,在了义上,以空和无愿为名的无我随观与苦随观所证得之道,因为其入门方式而得到“空”和“无愿”的名称;而“无相”这个名称,只能从经教的教学方式获得。所以这样说:“这里‘无相’这个名称,也是从入门方式、依经教的教学方式才能获得,因为在阿毗达摩中对道并没有举出无相这个名称。”这样,应当知道这三种解脱门,因为是进入解脱的入口,所以名为空随观等的无我随观等三种,依次增强力量,成为导向出起的观,就是三解脱门。对此确实这样说:巴利
Nimittanti pana ṭhapetvā suttantapariyāyaṃ abhidhammapariyāyena saṅkhāranimittaṃ hotīti saṅkhāranimittaggāhitāya aniccānupassanāya animittanāmaṃ nippariyāyato na labbhati, tasmā nippariyāyato suññataappaṇihitanāmikānaṃ anattadukkhānupassanānaṃ vasena paṭiladdhamaggo āgamanato suññataappaṇihitanāmaṃ labhati, animittanāmaṃ pana pariyāyatova labhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘animittanāmaṃ panettha āgamanatopi suttantapariyāyeneva labbhati abhidhamme maggaṃ pati animittanāmassa anuddhaṭattā’’ti. Iti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vimokkhānaṃ pavesanadvārabhāvato suññatānupassanādināmikā anattānupassanādikā tisso anukkamena balavabhāvaṃ patvā vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanābhūtā tīṇi vimokkhamukhānīti veditabbāni. Vuttañhetaṃ –
有三种解脱门能引导人出离世间:通过观察一切行都被限定、都被圈定,心就投入无相界;通过策动心意面对一切行,心就投入无愿界;通过观察一切法都是外在的、不属于自己的,心就投入空界。这三种解脱门能引导人出离世间。巴利
‘‘Tīṇi kho panimāni vimokkhamukhāni lokaniyyānāya saṃvattanti, sabbasaṅkhāre paricchedaparivaṭumato samanupassanatāya animittāya ca dhātuyā cittasampakkhandanatāya, sabbasaṅkhāresu manosamuttejanatāya appaṇihitāya ca dhātuyā cittasampakkhandanatāya, sabbadhamme parato samanupassanatāya suññatāya ca dhātuyā cittasampakkhandanatāya, imāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni lokaniyyānāya saṃvattantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.219).
在这里,“限定与周遍”是指依生起与坏灭来限定范围,并且周遍圆满地观察。因为无常随观先限定说“诸行在生起之前并不存在”,然后去探究它们的去向,发现它们灭去之后不再前往别处,就在那里消失,所以是从周遍、从边际来随观。“随观性”是指正确地随观,并与“导向”相关联。“心意激策性”是指心的警策、悚惧。因为以苦随观时,心对诸行生起悚惧。“他随观性”是指依“这不是我,这不是我的”这样以无我来随观。应当知道,这三句是依无常随观等三种而说的。也正因如此,紧接着的问答中:巴利
Ettha hi paricchedaparivaṭumatoti udayabbayavasena paricchedato ceva parivaṭumato ca. Aniccānupassanā hi ‘‘udayato pubbe saṅkhārā natthī’’ti paricchinditvā tesaṃ gatiṃ samannesamānā vayato paraṃ na gacchanti, ettheva antaradhāyantīti parivaṭumato pariyantato samanupassati. Samanupassanatāyāti sammadeva anupassanatāya saṃvattantīti sambandho. Manosamuttejanatāyāti cittasaṃvejanatāya. Dukkhānupassanena hi saṅkhāresu cittaṃ saṃvijjati. Parato samanupassanatāyāti ‘‘nāhaṃ, na mama’’nti evaṃ anattato samanupassanatāya. Iti imāni tīṇi padāni aniccānupassanādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena vuttānīti veditabbāni. Teneva ca tadanantare pañhāvissajjane –
以无常来作意时,诸行显现为坏灭;以苦来作意时,诸行显现为怖畏;以无我来作意时,诸行显现为空。巴利
‘‘Aniccato manasikaroto khayato saṅkhārā upaṭṭhahanti, dukkhato manasikaroto bhayato saṅkhārā upaṭṭhahanti, anattato manasikaroto suññato saṅkhārā upaṭṭhahantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.219) –
已说。那么这里难道不应当说:既然是在讲《入阿毗达摩论》,就应该只按阿毗达摩的方式来安立解脱门吗?确实如此。不过,为了说明以无常随观也能有道的出起,所以也依经教的方式作了一种安立。但应当知道,这样出起的道,按阿毗达摩的方式,只归入纯观行道。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Nanu cettha abhidhammāvatārassa bhāsamānattā abhidhammapariyāyeneva vimokkhamukhāni ca vavatthapetuṃ yuttanti? Saccaṃ, aniccānupassanāyapi pana maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti pakāsanatthaṃ suttantapariyāyenapi ekaṃ vavatthānaṃ kataṃ, tathā vuṭṭhito pana maggo abhidhammapariyāyena suddhikapaṭipadāyameva saṅgayhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
从“四种道结合的区别”来说,就是依照入流道等四种圣道的相应结合差别。不过,诸圣道具有正见等八支的自性,而这些八支又存在于一切出世间心中,所以即使从断除的角度看没有差别,但由于诸根的钝利不同、通达程度不同、证悟有差别,烦恼的断除也就有差别。应当依据这一点来理解四种类别。因此才说“有身见、疑”等等。在存在的、被称为五取蕴的身体上生起的见,就是有身见;或者,对自身在那里存在时生起的见,就是有身见。这是对依执取五蕴为我、我所而生起的邪见的称呼。这种见在每一个蕴上有四种执取方式,因此共有二十种。比如,有人把色观为我:“色就是我,我就是色,就像灯的光就是火焰,火焰就是光。”或者观我拥有色,像树有树影。或者观色在我中,像花有香气。或者观我在色中,像盒子里有宝珠。对受等也应当以“观受为我”等方式相应配合解释。其中,五种不离开蕴的我执,应知是断见;十五种离开蕴的我执,应知是常见。巴利
Catumaggayogabhedatoti sotāpattiādīhi catūhi ariyamaggehi sampayogappabhedato. Ariyamaggānaṃ pana sammādiṭṭhādiaṭṭhaṅgasabhāvattā, tesañca sabbalokuttare atthitāya bhaṅgavasena abhedepi indriyānaṃ apāṭavapāṭavataratamabhāvena sacchikiriyāvisesato kilesānaṃ pahānabhedo hotīti taṃvasena catubbidhatā daṭṭhabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchā’’tiādi. Sati vijjamāne pañcakkhandhasaṅkhāte kāye diṭṭhi sakkāyadiṭṭhi, sayaṃ vā tattha sati diṭṭhi sakkāyadiṭṭhi, pañcasu khandhesu attattaniyābhinivesavasena pavattāya micchādiṭṭhiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sā pana ekekasmiṃ khandhe catudhā abhinivesanavasena vīsatividhā hoti. Tathā hi koci rūpaṃ attato samanupassati ‘‘yaṃ rūpaṃ, so attā, yo attā, taṃ rūpaṃ, yathā dīpassa vaṇṇoyeva acci, acciyeva vaṇṇo’’ti. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ samanupassati, chāyāvantaṃ viya rukkhaṃ. Attani vā rūpaṃ, pupphe viya gandhaṃ. Rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ, samugge viya maṇi. Evaṃ vedanādīsupi ‘‘vedanaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Tattha yo pañcavidho abyatirittaattābhiniveso, sā ucchedadiṭṭhi. Yo pana pannarasavidho byatirittaattābhiniveso, sā sassatadiṭṭhīti veditabbaṃ.
在审察事物的自性时,因为对此感到吃力、疲惫,所以叫疑;或者因为难以救治、对治它的智慧已经不存在了,所以叫疑。而它——巴利
Sabhāvaṃ vicinanto tāya kicchati kilamatīti vicikicchā, tikicchituṃ dukkaratāya vā vigatā cikicchā ñāṇapatikāro imissāti vicikicchā. Sā pana –
对导师有疑惑、犹豫不决,对法、对僧、对学处,对过去际、对未来际、对过去未来际,对此缘性缘起诸法有疑惑、犹豫不决。巴利
‘‘Satthari kaṅkhati vicikicchati, dhamme, saṅghe, sikkhāya, pubbante, aparante, pubbantāparante, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu kaṅkhati vicikicchatī’’ti (dha. sa. 1008 thokaṃ. visadisaṃ) –
如此,以对佛等的怀疑为根据,共有八种事由。巴利
Evaṃ buddhādīsu kaṅkhāvasena aṭṭhavatthukā,
我在过去的时间里存在过吗?没有存在过吗?曾是什么?曾是怎样?曾经是什么,后来又变成了什么?在未来我会存在吗?不会存在吗?将会是什么?将会怎样?将会成为什么,然后又变成什么?或者对现在、当下的内在生起疑惑:我存在吗?我不存在吗?我是什么?我怎样?这个有情从哪里来?又将去向哪里?巴利
‘‘Ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ nu kho ahosiṃ, kathaṃ nu kho ahosiṃ , kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhānaṃ, bhavissāmi nu kho ahamanāgatamaddhānaṃ , na nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kathaṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ bhavissāmi nu kho ahamanāgatamaddhānaṃ, etarahi vā pana paccuppannamaddhānaṃ ajjhattaṃ kathaṃkathī hoti, ahaṃ nu khosmi, no nu khosmi, kiṃ nu khosmi, kathaṃ nu khosmi, ayaṃ nu kho satto kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) –
如此,以过去等为所缘而生起的方式,也说明了有十六种事。巴利
Evaṃ pubbantādayo ārabbha pavattivasena soḷasavatthukā ca niddiṭṭhā.
在这里,对导师心存疑惑的人,会怀疑导师是否真实具有色身和法身;对法心存疑惑的人,会怀疑法是被善说还是被不善说;对僧团心存疑惑的人,会怀疑僧团是修行端正还是修行不正等;对学心存疑惑的人,会怀疑学是被善制还是被不善制;对前际心存疑惑的人,依常见的方式和无因生的方式,怀疑自己过去是否存在、是否不存在;对后际心存疑惑的人,依常见的方式和断灭的方式,怀疑自己未来是否会生起、是否不会生起;对前际后际心存疑惑的人,则怀疑自己现在是有、是无。因为现在这一时段具有前分和后分,所以被称为“前际后际”。那么,针对它生起疑惑,合理吗?合理也好,不合理也好,在这里有什么好想的呢?愚痴凡夫就像疯子一样,所以他对任何事都会怀疑。正因如此,在解说以十六事为对象的疑惑时,才说了“又或者现在”等话。不过,诸位老师也说:“所谓前际后际,是把过去和未来合在一起,针对这两者生疑的人,就是对前际后际怀疑。”而对缘起、缘生诸法心存疑惑的人,则是怀疑无明等诸缘以及行等缘生法,其因与果由缘而生的关系是真实存在还是不存在。应当知道,以八事为对象的疑惑就是这样生起的。巴利
Tattha satthari kaṅkhanto tassa rūpakāyadhammakāyānaṃ vijjamānataṃ, avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati, dhamme kaṅkhanto tassa svākkhātadvākkhātabhāve kaṅkhati, saṅghe kaṅkhanto tassa suppaṭipannavippaṭipannatādibhāve kaṅkhati, sikkhāya kaṅkhanto tassā supaññattaduppaññattabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati, pubbante kaṅkhanto sassatākāraṃ, adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānataṃ, avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati, aparante kaṅkhanto sassatākāraṃ, ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano uppattiṃ, anuppattiñca kaṅkhati, pubbantāparante kaṅkhanto paccuppanne attano atthibhāvaṃ, natthibhāvañca kaṅkhati. Paccuppanno hi addhā pubbabhāgāparabhāgakoṭṭhāsavantatāya ‘‘pubbantāparanto’’ti vuccati, yuttaṃ pana taṃ ārabbha kaṅkhājanananti? Yuttaṃ, ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjano. Tasmā so yaṃ kiñci kaṅkhatiyeva. Teneva ca soḷasavatthukavicikicchāniddese ‘‘etarahi vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ācariyā pana ‘‘pubbantāparantoti atītānāgate ekajjhaṃ gahetvā tadubhayamārabbha kaṅkhanto pubbantāparante kaṅkhatī’’tipi vadanti. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu kaṅkhanto pana avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ, saṅkhārādīnañca paccayuppannānaṃ hetuhetusamuppannabhāvassa sabbhāvāsabbhāvaṃ kaṅkhatīti evaṃ tāva aṭṭhavatthukakaṅkhāya pavatti veditabbā.
关于这十六种事,有人这样怀疑:“我曾经存在过吗?……我曾经不存在吗?”就像前面说的那样,他对过去自己的存在或不存在产生怀疑。他怀疑“曾经是什么?”时,是依着生类、性别和投生处来怀疑:“我曾经是刹帝利吗?还是婆罗门等、在家众等、天众等当中的某一种?”他怀疑“曾经是怎样的?”时,是依着体态形状来怀疑:“我曾经是高的吗?还是矮的、白的、黑的等等当中的某一种?”他怀疑“我曾是以何种方式存在的?”时,是依着自在天所造等,从产生的方式上来怀疑:“我曾是以何种方式产生的?”他们这样说。他怀疑“曾是什么而变成了什么?”时,是依着生类等来怀疑自己前后相续的流转:“我曾是刹帝利而变成了婆罗门吗?……我曾是天众而变成了人吗?”他怀疑“我将来会存在吗?还是不会存在?”时,就像下面所说的那样,对未来自己的存在或不存在产生怀疑。“我将来会是什么?”等,也如前面所说的那样。他怀疑“我现在存在吗?还是不存在?”时,是对现在自己的有与无产生怀疑。其中原因已如前说。他怀疑“我现在是什么?”时,是作为刹帝利等而对自己刹帝利等的身份产生怀疑。其余诸项也是同样的道理。他怀疑“我现在是怎样的?”时,是执取“内在有所谓命我”之后,对它的高矮等产生怀疑。然而,不知道现在自己身体形态的人是没有的。应当知道,他怀疑“从哪里来、将往何处去?”时,是对自己身体的来去之处产生怀疑。巴利
Soḷasavatthukā pana ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho…pe… na nu kho ahosi’’nti kaṅkhanto vuttanayeneva atīte attano vijjamānāvijjamānataṃ kaṅkhati. Kiṃ nu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇādīsu gahaṭṭhādīsu devādīsu aññataro nu kho’’ti kaṅkhati. Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ, rassaodātakāḷādīnañca aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Issaranimmānādīni nissāya ‘‘kena nu kho pakārena ahosi’’nti nibbattanākārato kaṅkhatīti vadanti. Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā nu kho manusso ahosi’’nti attano aparāparaṃ pavattiṃ kaṅkhati. Bhavissāmi nu kho, na nu khoti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva anāgate attano vijjamānāvijjamānataṃ kaṅkhati. ‘‘Kiṃ nu kho bhavissāmī’’tiādi vuttanayameva. Ahaṃ nu khosmi, na nu khosmīti idāni attano atthibhāvaṃ, natthibhāvañca kaṅkhati. Tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyādikova samāno attano khattiyādibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Kathaṃ nu khosmīti ‘‘abbhantare jīvo nāma atthī’’ti gahetvā tassa dīghādibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Paccuppannaṃ pana attano sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Kuto āgato, kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatagataṭṭhānāni kaṅkhatīti veditabbaṃ.
戒与禁戒合起来就是“戒禁”。其中,对牛戒等不清净的修行方式,从受持的角度叫“戒”,从不违犯的角度叫“禁戒”。或者两者都可以叫“戒”,但因为被当成苦行之事来执取的缘故,所以叫“禁戒”。又或者,因为牛等本性的状态,自己执受牛等状态为“戒”,而实行“走时咀嚼、站时排泄”等牛的行为为“禁戒”。又或者,省察各自应做之事而远离恶行是“戒”,受持之后实行吃粪便等特殊行为是“禁戒”。超越自性而执取外在之物就是“执取”,对戒禁的执取就是“戒禁取”。此外,有些沙门婆罗门主张“由戒得清净、由禁戒得清净、由戒禁得清净”,像这样在不净之道上生起“这是清净之道”的邪执,就是戒禁取的名称。有身见、疑、戒禁取,也就是有身见乃至戒禁取,正是它们把众生结缚、系缚在业异熟中、在轮回中,所以叫“结”;它们被见清净等以分断的方式断除,通过证得法性而彻底断除,所以叫有身见乃至戒禁取的断除。巴利
Sīlañca vatañca sīlabbataṃ, tattha gosīlādiasuddhimaggo samādānavasena sīlaṃ, avītikkamavasena vataṃ. Ubhayathāpi vā sīlaṃ, tapokammabhāvena gahitattā vataṃ. Gavādipakatibhāvato attano vā gavādibhāvādhiṭṭhānaṃ sīlaṃ, ‘‘gacchanto bhakkheti, tiṭṭhanto muttetī’’tiādinā gavādikiriyāya karaṇaṃ vataṃ. Taṃtaṃakiccasammasato vā nivatti sīlaṃ, taṃsamādānavato vesabhojanakiccacaraṇādivisesapaṭipatti vataṃ. Sabhāvaṃ atikkamma parato āmasanaṃ gahaṇanti parāmāso, sīlabbatassa parāmāso sīlabbataparāmāso. Ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhi, sīlabbatena suddhīti evaṃ asuddhimagge ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti pavattassa micchābhinivesassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sakkāyadiṭṭhi ca vicikicchā ca sīlabbataparāmāso cāti sakkāya…pe… parāmāso, teyeva kammavipākesu, vaṭṭasmiṃ vā satte saṃyojenti bandhantīti saṃyojanāni, tesaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhiādīhi tadaṅgavasena pahīnānaṃ anuppattidhammatāpādanena accantasamucchedappahānaṃ karotīti sakkā…pe…ppahānakaraṃ.
因为从最初就流向、流注涅槃,所以圣八支道被称为流;对它的最初趣入,就是入流;它寻求涅槃,为欲求涅槃者所寻求,或说灭除烦恼而前行,所以是道;入流本身就是道,所以叫入流道。或者也可以说,从最初就趣入、证得流,所以叫入流,也就是第一位圣者;他的道就是入流道,也就是正见等八支;与这个道相应的心,就是入流道心。巴利
Nibbānaṃ pati savanato sandanato soto vuccati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgikamaggo, tassa ādito pajjanaṃ sotāpatti, nibbānaṃ maggati, nibbānatthikehi maggīyati, kilese mārento gacchatīti vā maggo, sotāpatti eva maggo sotāpattimaggo. Atha vā sotaṃ ādito pajjati adhigacchatīti sotāpatti, paṭhamo ariyapuggalo, tassa maggo sotāpattimaggo, sammādiṭṭhiādīni aṭṭhaṅgāni, tena sampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sotāpattimaggacittaṃ.
贪染、执著,所以叫“贪”;这里指对五欲对象和欲有的渴爱。违逆、恼害,所以叫“嗔”;就是以十种嗔恨事为依止的嗔恚。迷惑、愚昧,所以叫“痴”;就是对苦等八种事的无知。使这些烦恼变薄、变得轻微,就是贪……中间省略……使变薄。
其中,变薄有两个原因:因为不频繁生起,以及因为现起微弱。也就是说,一来圣者的烦恼不会像随顺轮回的凡夫大众那样频繁生起,只是偶尔以稀疏的方式生起;即使这样生起,也不会以压迫、覆盖、造成黑暗的方式生起。又因为被两种道所断除,所以生起得极其微细、极其薄弱。不过有些人说,一来圣者的烦恼虽然很久才生起,但生起时仍然粗重。他们说,就像能看到他的儿女一样。这种说法没有道理,因为即使没有从事男女之事,也仍然有入胎的可能性。所以,应当依照前面所说的方式,由这两个原因来了知它们的变薄。
那么,为什么这里说痴也变薄呢?难道不是只有第三道所断的烦恼才应当说由这个“使变薄”来说吗?否则的话,由于上道所断的烦恼也通过下三道以粗厚状态被断除,这里就应当说一切上分结都变薄;而且巴利文中也说“为了欲贪和嗔恚变薄,达到第二地”。这话是对的。不过,在经中取了上道所断烦恼变薄这一说法,说“因为贪、嗔、痴变薄,所以成为一来”,由于已经说到三种因的变薄,这里也就随顺那样说了。或者,也可以读作“欲贪和嗔恚”。因为就在这里的后面,解释第二道智时也说:“使嗔恚和欲贪变薄。”由于依结生只来这个人界一次,所以叫“一来”;他的道就是“一来道”。虽然对于住于道位的人来说,依结生而来是不可能的,只有住于果位的人才叫“一来”,但作为他来的因的那个道,为了区分其他道,依其归属于他而说为“一来道”;与它相应的心,就是“一来道心”。巴利
Rajjati abhisajjatīti rāgo, so idha pañcakāmavisayā, kāmabhavavisayā ca taṇhā. Dussatīti doso, dasavidhaāghātavatthupadaṭṭhāno byāpādo. Muyhatīti moho, dukkhādīsu aṭṭhasu aññāṇaṃ. Etesaṃ kilesānaṃ tanuttaṃ tanubhāvaṃ karotīti rāga…pe… tanuttakaraṃ. Tattha dvīhi kāraṇehi tanuttaṃ abhiṇhānuppattito, pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya cāti. Sakadāgāmissa hi vaṭṭānusārimahājanassa viya kilesā abhiṇhaṃ na uppajjanti, kadāci viraḷākārā hutvā uppajjanti, tathā uppajjantāpi maddantā chādentā andhakāraṃ karontā nuppajjanti. Dvīhi pana maggehi pahīnattā mandamandā tanukatanukā uppajjanti. Keci pana sakadāgāmissa kilesā cirena uppajjantāpi bahalāva uppajjanti. Tathā hissa puttadhītaro dissantīti vadanti. Taṃ akāraṇaṃ, vatthupaṭisevanena vināpi gabbhaggahaṇasabbhāvato, tasmā vuttanayeneva dvīhi kāraṇehi nesaṃ tanubhāvo veditabbo. Kasmā panettha mohassa tanubhāvo vutto, nanu tatiyamaggavajjhānameva iminā tanuttakaraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ, itarathā heṭṭhā tīhipi maggehi uparimaggavajjhakilesānaṃ bahalābahalāvatthāya pahīyamānattā idha sabbesameva uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanānaṃ tanubhāvo vattabbo, teneva ca pāḷiyampi ‘‘kāmarāgabyāpādānaṃ tanubhāvāya dutiyāya bhūmiyā pattiyā’’ti vuttanti. Saccametaṃ, sutte pana uparimaggavajjhānaṃ tanubhāvapariyāyaṃ gahetvā ‘‘rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttā sakadāgāmī hotī’’ti hetuttayatanubhāvassa āgatattā idhāpi tadanulomena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kāmarāgabyāpādāna’’micceva vā pāṭho. Tathā hi ettheva upari dutiyamaggañāṇaniddese ‘‘byāpādakāmarāgānaṃ, tanubhāvaṃ tu sādhaya’’nti (abhidha. 1353) vuttaṃ. Paṭisandhivasena sakideva imaṃ manussalokaṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī, tassa maggo sakadāgāmimaggo. Kiñcāpi hi maggaṭṭhassa paṭisandhivasena āgamanāsambhavato phalaṭṭhoyeva sakadāgāmī nāma hoti, tassa pana āgamanabhūto maggo maggantarāvacchedanatthaṃ tadāyattabhāvūpanayanena sakadāgāmimaggoti vuccati, taṃsampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sakadāgāmimaggacittaṃ.
在五种欲乐和欲有之中的贪,就是欲贪。心由此而被逼恼,就是嗔恚。因为结生的方式不再来到这个欲界,所以叫不来。在色有之中的欲贪,就是色贪。在无色有之中的欲贪,就是无色贪。慢,在这里是指依着证得阿拉汉果而只是生起高举。掉举也只是心以“谁来替我断除烦恼重担”这样的方式生起,只是不寂静而已。无明也只是在不乐之中颠倒地执为乐。因为远离烦恼,或者远离邪行者,或者因为贪等怨敌已被摧毁,或者因为轮回之轮的辐条已被摧毁,或者因为值得受用诸资具等,或者因为作恶时没有隐秘,所以称为“rahā”的恶法不存在;又因为善士不应舍弃、不应抛弃,或者因为所谓隐秘之行在轮回中不存在,所以是阿拉汉,即第八种圣者。他的状态就是阿拉汉果,这是对最高果位的称呼。因为“阿拉汉”这个名称和智慧的生起都以此为依据,所以说是阿拉汉的状态,因此称为阿拉汉果。作为到达此果之因的道,就是阿拉汉道;与那道相应的心,就是阿拉汉道心。巴利
Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu, kāmabhave ca rāgo kāmarāgo. Byāpajjati tena cittanti byāpādo. Paṭisandhivasena imaṃ kāmadhātuṃ na āgacchatīti anāgāmī. Rūpabhave chandarāgo rūparāgo. Arūpabhave chandarāgo arūparāgo. Māno idha arahattādhigamaṃ paṭicca uṇṇatimattaṃ. Uddhaccampi ‘‘ko me bhāro kilesasamucchedane’’ti evamākārappavattaṃ cittassa avūpasamamattaṃ. Avijjāpi asukhe sukhasaññāvipallāso. Ārakattā kilesehi, micchāpaṭipannehi vā, rāgādiarīnaṃ, saṃsāracakkassa arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, rahopi pāpākaraṇena pāpakaraṇe rahassa abhāvā, rahitabbato jahitabbato ‘‘rahā’’ti laddhanāmānaṃ vā pāpadhammānaṃ abhāvato, sādhūhi arahitabbato apariccajitabbato, rahasaṅkhātassa vā gamanassa saṃsāre abhāvato arahā, aṭṭhamo ariyapuggalo, tassa bhāvo arahattaṃ, aggaphalassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘arahā’’ti abhidhānassa, buddhiyā ca pavattinibandhanattā arahato bhāvoti katvā ‘‘arahatta’’nti vuccati, tassa āgamanabhūto maggo arahattamaggo, taṃsampayuttaṃ cittaṃ arahattamaggacittaṃ.
从“禅支与结合的差别”来说,就像色界禅那样,由五种禅支结合的差别而有不同。那么,它的差别是怎样的呢?这里首先有注释书的说法,加上三位长老的说法,一共就有四种主张。也就是说,注释书里首先这样说:“到达行舍智之后,在出起观道时,由禅支来决定。”三藏小那伽长老则说:“作为观道近依的基础禅那,来决定禅支。”摩罗瓦毕大摩诃达多长老说:“作为观之所缘的诸蕴来决定。因为入定之后出起观察那个禅那,道就会跟那个禅那相似。”三藏小阿毗长老则说:“由人的意乐来决定。就像‘愿我证得五支或四支的道’等等,随着他的意乐怎样,道也就那样生起。”巴利
Jhānaṅgayogabhedatoti rūpāvacaraṃ viya pañcahi jhānaṅgehi sampayogabhedato. Kathaṃ panassa bhedoti? Ettha tāva aṭṭhakathāvādo, tayo ca theravādāti cattāro vādā honti. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tāva ‘‘saṅkhārupekkhābhāvaṃ patvā vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāmaggassa jhānaṅgaṃ niyametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tipiṭakacūḷanāgatthero pana ‘‘maggāsannavipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pādakajjhānaṃ niyametī’’ti āha. Moravāpivāsimahādattatthero ‘‘vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā niyamenti. Yañhi jhānaṃ sammasitvā vuṭṭhāti, taṃsadisova hotī’’ti āha. Tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero pana ‘‘puggalajjhāsayo niyameti, ‘aho vata pañcaṅgikaṃ, caturaṅgikaṃ vā maggaṃ pāpuṇeyya’ntiādinā yathā yathāssa ajjhāsayo hoti, tathā tathā maggo hotī’’ti āha.
不过,因为注疏的主张是权威标准,而且那三位长老都是智者、通达之人,所以应当知道这四种主张彼此并不互相排斥。怎么说呢?
先说观照欲界法的情况:对纯观行者来说,观照后所生起的道,以及得等至者不以禅那作为基础而生起的道,按照观的法则,都属于初禅的道。如果是以某种禅那作为基础而生起的,那就依那个禅那的力量而有禅支的变化,因此这个道就与那种禅那相似。
不过在这里,观照是以欲界诸蕴为所缘而运作的,它不像在欲界法和广大法之间那样,由于修习的差别而有禅支的差别。所以,主张“作为观所缘的诸蕴起决定作用”的第二长老之说,并不进入这种主张。
如果观照的是禅那法,然后生起了道,而这时没有作为基础的禅那,那就依照所观照的禅那来决定,这个道就属于那种禅那。如果是从初禅出定后,观照第二禅等法而生起的,那就依照个人意乐的法则,与两种禅那中的某一种相似。但如果这个人没有那样的意乐,那又怎么说呢?
对此,先有一些人说:在多种转向的路途中,从作为基础的禅那退转出来,在单一转向的路途中达到种姓位之后,于退转的观中,作为所缘的诸蕴才是强有力的,因此依照所观照的诸蕴来决定,道就与那相似。
如果这样,那么主张“依照作为基础的禅那来决定”的第一长老之说,就只是针对从作为基础的禅那出定后,观照欲界诸蕴而所生起的道来说的。巴利
Yasmā pana aṭṭhakathāvādo pamāṇaṃ, tayo ca therā paṇḍitā byattā, tasmā cattāropi vādā aññamaññaṃ appaṭibāhanavasena evaṃ veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Kāmāvacaradhamme tāva sammasitvā sukkhavipassakassa uppannamaggopi samāpattilābhino jhānaṃ pādakaṃ akatvā uppāditamaggopi vipassanāniyāmena paṭhamajjhānikāva honti. Sace pana kiñci jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppādito hoti, tassa vasena aṅgapariṇāmo hotīti taṃtaṃjhānasadiso hoti. Yasmā panettha kāmāvacarakkhandhe ārabbha pavattā vipassanā kāmāvacaradhammesu ca mahaggatadhammesu viya bhāvanāvisesato jhānaṅgaviseso natthi, tasmā ‘‘vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā niyamentī’’ti evaṃ pavatto dutiyattheravādo imaṃ vādaṃ na pavisati. Jhānadhamme sammasitvā uppāditamaggo sace pādakajjhānaṃ natthi, sammasitajjhānaniyāmena taṃtaṃjhāniko hoti. Sace paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya dutiyādijhāne sammasitvā uppādito, puggalajjhāsayaniyāmena dvīsu aññatarajjhānasadiso hoti. Sace pana puggalassa tathāvidho ajjhāsayo natthi, tadā kathanti? Ettha tāva keci ‘‘nānāvajjanavīthiyameva nivattamānapādakajjhānato ekāvajjanavīthiyaṃ gotrabhubhāvaṃ patvā nivattamānāya vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhāyeva balavanto, tasmā sammasitakkhandhaniyāmena taṃsadiso maggo hotī’’ti vadanti. Evañca sati ‘‘pādakajjhānaniyāmena hotī’’ti evaṃ pavatto paṭhamattheravādo pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya kāmāvacarakkhandhe sammasitvā uppāditamaggameva sandhāya tiṭṭhatīti.
另有一些人说:基禅以根本因和近因的方式成为道的缘,而被观照的蕴只以根本因的方式成为缘,所以比起被观照的蕴,基禅的力量更强,因此道与基禅相似。但如果是这样,那么“依被观照的蕴来决定”这第二长老的主张,就只是针对不把等至作为基、仅仅观照禅那法而生起的道来说的。然而,由于从较低较底的禅那到较高较高的禅那,力量是逐步增强的,所以从较低较底的禅那出定后,观照较高较高禅那的法而生起的道,不依赖基禅,而是依所观照的禅那,成为与那种禅那相应之道。反之,从较高较高的禅那出定后,观照较低较底禅那的法而生起的道,不依赖所观照的禅那,而与基禅相似。这才是这里最核心的要点。这样一来,两位长老的主张就都成了没有遗漏、效果相同的说法。巴利
Apare pana ‘‘pādakajjhānaṃ maggassa mūlakāraṇavasena paccayo hoti āsannakāraṇavasenapi, sammasitakkhandhā pana mūlakāraṇavaseneva paccayā honti, tasmā sammasitakkhandhato pādakajjhānameva balavataranti pādakajjhānasadiso maggo hotī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sante pana ‘‘sammasitakkhandhaniyāmenā’’ti evaṃ pavatto dutiyattheravādo samāpattiṃ pādakaṃ akatvā kevalaṃ jhānadhammeyeva sammasitvā uppāditamaggameva sandhāya tiṭṭhati. Yasmā pana heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijhānaṃ balappattaṃ hoti, tasmā heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato vuṭṭhāya uparūparijhānadhamme vipassato uppannamaggo pādakajjhānaṃ anapekkhitvā sammasitajjhānavasena taṃtaṃjhāniko hoti. Uparūparijhānato pana vuṭṭhāya heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānadhamme sammasitvā uppāditamaggo sammasitajjhānaṃ anapekkhitvā pādakajjhānasadiso hotīti idamettha sārataraṃ. Evañhi sati dvinnampi therānaṃ vādā nippadesavisayā samaphalā honti.
在这里,第三长老的主张是:如果没有作为基础的禅那,或者没有经过观照的禅那,仅仅靠意乐本身是不能成立的。而在三种主张当中,除了其余禅支的转变之外,受的转变只依照观照的法则发生。应当知道,这三种长老的主张也都离不开观照的法则。有人会问:受不也是禅支吗?那么它也应该依照基础禅那的法则而转变吧?不是这样。因为如果受也依照基础禅那的法则转变,那么在不考虑观照法则的情况下,在道生起的那一刹那,当其余禅支在依照基础禅那法则转变的位置上转变时,受也应该在那里转变。但事实并非如此。因为在单一转向的心路中,受从一开始就已经转变了,所以受的法则是由在道出定心路中更接近现起的观照之力决定的。巴利
Tatiyattheravādo cettha pādakajjhānaṃ, sammasitajjhānaṃ vā vinā ajjhāsayamatteneva na ijjhati. Tīsupi vādesu ṭhapetvā sesajhānaṅgapariṇāmaṃ vedanāpariṇāmo vipassanāniyāmeneva hoti. Tayopi theravādā vipassanāniyāmena vinā na hontīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nanu ca vedanāpi jhānaṅgameva, tasmā tāyapi pādakajjhānaniyāmeneva bhavitabbanti? Taṃ na, vedanāyapi pādakajjhānaniyāmena pariṇāme sati vipassanāniyāmaṃ anapekkhitvā pādakajjhānaniyāmeneva maggakkhaṇe sesajhānaṅgāni pariṇāmaṭṭhāneyeva vedanāyapi pariṇāmo bhaveyya, tathā pana ahutvā ekāvajjanavīthiyā āditova pariṇāmanato maggavuṭṭhānavīthiyā āsannatarappavattāya vipassanāya vasena vedanāniyāmo hoti.
或者说,当作为基础的禅那和被观照的禅那都存在时,那些在这些禅那中尚未生起的受,并不会因观照而生起,所以也不能说它是依照作为基础的禅那和被观照的禅那的规律而转变的。这里可能会有人问:只要有作为基础的禅那存在,那里就由它来决定;但在没有第三禅、第四禅作为基础禅那的无色界存在中,又是什么在决定呢?在那里,同样还是基础禅那本身在决定。因为,一位获得八种等至的比丘,以初禅作为基础,证得入流道和入流果之后,在没有退失禅那的情况下命终,投生到无色界存在中,从初禅的入流果等至出定,建立观照,进而证得上面三个道果——他的这些道果就都属于初禅。第二禅等的情况也是这样。因为在无色界中,属于第三禅、第四禅的出世间禅那也能生起。因此,在这里应当知道,每一种出世间善心的禅支组合差别。巴利
Atha vā pādakajjhānasammasitajjhānānaṃ sambhave tesu anuppannā vedanā vipassanāya na hotīti pādakajjhānasammasitajjhānaniyāmena pariṇamatītipi na sakkā vattuṃ. Ettha siyā – yattha tāva pādakajjhānaṃ atthi, tattha taṃ niyameti. Yattha pana tikacatukkapādakajjhānaṃ natthi, tasmiṃ arūpabhave kiṃ niyametīti? Tatthāpi pādakajjhānameva niyameti. Yo hi bhikkhu aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī paṭhamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā sotāpattimaggaphalāni nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā arūpabhave nibbatto paṭhamajjhānikāya sotāpattiphalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhāya vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā upari tīṇi maggaphalāni nibbatteti, tassa tāni paṭhamajjhānikāneva honti. Dutiyajjhānikādīsupi eseva nayo. Arūpepi hi lokuttaraṃ tikacatukkajjhānaṃ uppajjatīti evamettha ekekassa lokuttarakusalassa jhānaṅgayogabhedo veditabboti.
道……成就:道虽于结生与转起中不感果,如同三界善法,却以生起各自相应之果而成就达到各自果位的入流者、一来者、不来者、阿拉汉这四种圣者。具体来说,它还成就了诸如“七返有”等许多入流者等圣者。巴利
Maggā…pe… nipphādetīti tebhūmakakusalaṃ viya paṭisandhippavattīsu avipaccavantampi attano attano anurūpassa phalassa nipphādanena taṃtaṃphalappatte sotāpanno sakadāgāmī anāgāmī arahāti sāmaññato cattāro ariyapuggale abhinipphādetīti. Visesato pana sattakkhattuparamatādike anekepi sotāpannādayo nipphādeti.
四地善心解说巴利
Catubhūmakakusalavaṇṇanā
28 28. 这样按各自的自相说明了四地善心之后,现在要作总结,所以说“于欲有八”等。其中,“于欲”指欲有;“于色”等也是这样。巴利
28. Evaṃ catubhūmakakusalacittaṃ sarūpato niddisitvā idāni taṃ nigamento āha ‘‘kāme aṭṭhevā’’tiādi. Tattha kāmeti kāmabhave. Tathā ‘‘rūpe’’tiādīsu.
29 已离善与不善:就是已经脱离了善业和不善业。因为从最上道生起的那一刻开始,阿拉汉的一切善业和不善业就都算被断除了,原因是缺少缘,所以没有能力再引生结生。因此,圣道智被称为“灭尽业者”。或者说,由于没有无因无缘的清净,所以是靠能断除烦恼的善道,远离了不善。于善而善巧:就是对于被称为善的修行——比如舍断卑劣等——在教导、生起等方面都很善巧。牟尼:因为具足能了知两个世间的最上果智,或者具足一切知智,所以是牟尼。因此说:巴利
29.Kusalākusalāpagatenāti kusalākusalakammato apagatena. Aggamaggassa hi uppannakālato paṭṭhāya arahato sabbāni kusalākusalakammāni pahīnāni nāma honti paccayavekallena paṭisandhidāne asamatthabhāvato. Yato ca ariyamaggañāṇaṃ ‘‘kammakkhayakara’’nti vuccati. Atha vā ahetuapaccayavisujjhanassa abhāvato kilesasamucchedakena maggakusalena akusalehi apagatena. Kusale kusalenāti kucchitānaṃ salanādīhi kusalasaṅkhātāya paṭipattiyaṃ desanuppādanādīsu chekena. Munināti ubhayalokamunanakena aggaphalañāṇena, sabbaññutaññāṇena vā samannāgatattā muninā. Tenāha –
凡是能了知此世与他世这两个世间的人,就因此被称为牟尼。巴利
‘‘Yo munāti ubho loke, muni tena pavuccatī’’ti.
被称为“自在者”,是因为他具足了由六神通所成的最殊胜心自在,并且由于在禅那等方面具备五种自在的本质,所以成为自在者,达到自在状态,诸根也已进入自在的境界。巴利
Vasināti chaḷabhiññatāya paramena cittavasibhāvena samannāgatattā, jhānādīsu pañcavidhavasisabbhāvato ca vasibhūtena vasibhāvūpagatindriyena.
到这里,已经按善法自身的样貌说明了“善、不善、无记三种生类差别”中所说的善法。现在要说明紧接着列出的不善法,所以说“不善呢”等等。为了确定并显示“从地来说是一种”这个说法的含义,所以说“唯是欲界”。然而,其他部派认为色界、无色界也有不善,为了否定他们的主张,就作了这个限定。因为这种不善即使生起于广大地,即使在色界中能产生转起果报,它也绝对只属于欲界。那么,这个断定是从哪里来的呢?因为它是欲爱所缘的对象。欲爱所缘就是欲界属性的原因,正如色爱、无色爱所缘是色界、无色界属性的原因。这一点应当决定性地接受。否则,遍满的特征就不成立了。因为如果按所缘的法来安立地,那么没有所缘的法就无法被包含;如果按产生果报来安立,那么没有果报的法也无法被包含。所以,对于属于三界的法,应当只按所缘的法来安立;而对于不属于三界的法,应当知道,因为它超越了世间,所以是出世间,因为它没有更上的,所以是无上。巴利
Ettāvatā ca yaṃ ‘‘kusalākusalābyākatajātibhedato tividha’’nti ettha vuttaṃ kusalaṃ, taṃ sarūpato niddisitvā idāni tadanantaruddiṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ niddisanto āha ‘‘akusalaṃ panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Bhūmito ekavidha’’nti vuttamatthaṃ niyametvā dassento āha ‘‘kāmāvacaramevā’’ti. Nikāyantarikā pana rūpārūpāvacarampi akusalaṃ icchantīti tesaṃ matinisedhanatthaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ kataṃ. Mahaggatabhūmiyaṃ uppajjantampi hetaṃ tattha rūpadhātuyaṃ pavattivipākaṃ dentampi ekantena kāmāvacaramevāti. Kuto panesa niyamoti? Kāmataṇhāvisayabhāvato. Kāmataṇhāvisayatā hi kāmāvacarabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ yathā rūpārūpataṇhāvisayatā rūpārūpabhāvassa. Ekaṃsena cetaṃ evaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Itarathā byāpitalakkhaṇaṃ na siyā. Yadi hi ālambitabbadhammavasena bhūmivavatthānaṃ kareyya, evaṃ sati anārammaṇānaṃ saṅgaho na siyā. Atha vipākadānavasena, evampi avipākānaṃ saṅgaho na siyā, tasmā ālambaṇadhammavaseneva pariyāpannānaṃ sā kātabbā. Apariyāpannānaṃ pana lokato uttiṇṇatāya lokuttaratā, uttaritarābhāvato anuttaratā ca veditabbāti.
由于忧受没有“无覆”的状态,与它相应的心只会在欲界生起,所以它的所依是固定的;其余的心即使在无色界也能生起,所以它们的所依是不固定的,因此说“固定……两种”。因为疑和掉举相应的心只有痴这一个因,其余不善心则依贪痴、嗔痴而有两个因,所以说“单因、双因”。因为前十一不善心能引生结生,而掉举相应心不能,所以说“能引结生、不能引结生”。因为掉举相应心虽然能产生转起果报,却不能引生结生。正如接下来要说:巴利
Domanassassa anīvaraṇāvatthāya abhāvena taṃsahagatacittuppādo kāmabhūmiyaṃyeva pavattatīti so niyatavatthuko, itare arūpabhūmiyampi pavattanato aniyatavatthukāti āha ‘‘niyatā…pe… duvidha’’nti. Vicikicchuddhaccasahagatānaṃ mohekahetukattā, itaresampi lobhamohadosamohavasena dvihetukattā āha ‘‘ekahetukaduhetukato’’ti. Ādito ekādasannaṃ akusalacittānaṃ paṭisandhijananato, uddhaccasahagatassa tadabhāvato āha ‘‘paṭisandhijanakājanakato’’ti. Uddhaccasahagatañhi pavattivipākaṃ dentampi paṭisandhiṃ nākaḍḍhati. Yato vakkhati –
不过,除了掉举相应心之外,还有十一种。
结生也有十一种。巴利
‘‘Ekādasavidhānaṃ tu, hitvā uddhaccamānasaṃ; Ekādasavidhā ceva, bhavanti paṭisandhiyo’’ti. (abhidha. 536);
至于它为什么不牵引结生,我们会在讲结生决断论的地方,也就是注释这首偈颂时再说明。以三受,就是指乐受、苦受、舍受这三种受。正如经中所说:比丘们,有三种受。哪三种?乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受。不过,在某些经中说:比丘们,有两种受,乐受和苦受。应当知道,那是方便说法,是把属于善这边的舍受归入乐受,把属于不善这边的舍受归入苦受。因为它是善安住状态的原因,就像树根一样,所以叫根;贪是它的根,所以叫贪根。虽然痴也存在于贪根心中,但它因为遍通一切不善,不能起区分作用,所以依不共法的角度只说贪根,就像说鼓声、麦芽一样。嗔根也是这样。由于没有别的根,只有痴才是它的根,不是别的,所以叫痴根。巴利
Yena pana kāraṇena taṃ paṭisandhiṃ nākaḍḍhati, taṃ paṭisandhivinicchayakathāhi imissā gāthāya vaṇṇanāpadeseyeva vakkhāma . Tīhi vedanāhīti sukhadukkhopekkhāsaṅkhātāhi tīhi vedanāhi. Yathāha – ‘‘tisso imā, bhikkhave, vedanā. Katamā tisso? Sukhā dukkhā adukkhamasukhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.249). Yaṃ pana katthaci sutte ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, vedanā sukhā dukkhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.267) vacanaṃ, taṃ kusalapakkhikaṃ upekkhaṃ sukhe, akusalapakkhikañca dukkhe pakkhipitvā pariyāyena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Suppatiṭṭhitabhāvakāraṇattā mūlamivāti mūlaṃ, lobho mūlaṃ etassāti lobhamūlaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi mohopi lobhamūlesu atthi, so pana sabbākusalasādhāraṇattā vavatthānakaro na hotīti asādhāraṇadhammavasena ‘‘lobhamūla’’ntveva vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘bherisaddo yavaṅkuro’’ti. Tathā ‘‘dosamūla’’nti etthāpi. Mūlantaravirahato moho eva mūlaṃ imassa, nāññanti mohamūlaṃ.
以邪见的方式去看,就叫“见”;这个见本身就是“见取”,就像说“住于虚空”“住于力”那样。或者,被颠倒执取的见所到达的状态,而这里并没有一个像那样真实存在的、该被到达的对象,所以叫“见取”;又或者,它被包含在六十二见之中,所以叫“见取”。与它相应、以各种方式结合在一起的,就是“见取相应”。巴利
Micchāvasena dassanaṃ diṭṭhi, diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ yathā ‘‘ākāsagataṃ thāmagata’’nti. Atha vā vipariyesaggāhikāya diṭṭhiyā gatameva, na ettha gantabbavatthu tathāsabhāvanti diṭṭhigataṃ, dvāsaṭṭhiyā vā diṭṭhīsu antogadhanti diṭṭhigataṃ, tena samaṃ pakārehi yuttanti diṭṭhigatasampayuttaṃ.
“当……时”这一段,是在说明贪根心生起的方式。邪见,就是断灭见等错误见解。因为心被邪见颠倒之后,从以嗔怒为对象开始,一直到以根境为范围,都否定他世,执取“诸欲中没有过患”。通过“等”这个字——巴利
‘‘Yadā hī’’tiādi lobhamūlacittānaṃ pavattiākāradassanaṃ. Micchādiṭṭhinti ucchedadiṭṭhiādiṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ. Tāya hi vipallattacittā tāva kodhavisayo, yāva indriyagocaroti paralokaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘natthi kāmesu ādīnavo’’ti gaṇhanti. Ādi-saddena –
这条通往天界的路是虚妄的,
有儿子的人和无忧的人,凭借它而前行。
畜生和飞鸟都看见了它,
因此,他们连母亲也当作行淫的对象。巴利
‘‘Esa panthovitatho devayāne, Yena yanti puttavanto visokā; Taṃ passanti pasavo pakkhino ca, Tena te mātaripi mithunaṃ carantī’’ti. –
以“见儿子面孔就是生天与解脱之道”这类说法开头,把诸如此类的邪见都收摄进来。在“对诸欲”这一句里,“或”字表示不确定的意思。借着这个“或”字,也把下面这类邪执收摄进来:比如“婆罗门偷金子才算犯不与取,别的就不算犯;为了师长、牛、自己的性命和婚事而说妄语不算犯,别的就算犯;为了师长等的利益而说离间语不算犯,别的就算犯;讲婆罗多战争、抢走悉多之类的故事能止息罪恶”。像这样一类邪执都包括在内。“见吉祥等”指的是所见、所闻、所觉的吉祥。“执为真实”是说,不把它当作增长的前兆来看,而是认为“这就是增长的原因”,这样以真实之义来执取。“以自性猛利”是说,由于贪或邪执本身的性质,就是猛利、粗重的。“以迟钝”是说缓慢、不猛利。不过,那样的心是由自己或他人激励才生起的,所以说“受激励的”。“或偷取他人之物”这里,借着“或”字应当知道,也收摄了同样情况下生起的妄语等。“对诸欲”指的是正在享受的欲乐对象。借着“或”字,还收摄了因为对他人之物不如理作意,而认为“得到的东西就该拿”之类的执取行为。巴利
Ādinā nayena puttamukhadassanaṃ saggamokkhamaggoti evamādikaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kāme vāti ettha vā-saddo aniyamattho. Tena ‘‘brāhmaṇānaṃ suvaṇṇaharaṇameva adinnādāne sāvajjaṃ, itaraṃ anavajjaṃ, gurūnaṃ, gunnaṃ, attano jīvitassa, vivāhassa ca atthāya musāvādo anavajjo, itaro sāvajjo, guruādīnaṃ atthāya pesuññakaraṇaṃ anavajjaṃ, itaraṃ sāvajjaṃ, bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādikathā pāpavūpasamāya hotī’’ti evamādike micchāgāhe saṅgaṇhāti. Diṭṭhamaṅgalādīnīti diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalāni. Sārato paccetīti vuḍḍhiyā pubbanimittabhāvena aggahetvā ‘‘idameva vuḍḍhikāraṇa’’nti evaṃ sāravasena gaṇhāti. Sabhāvatikkhenevāti lobhassa, micchābhinivesassa vā vasena saraseneva tikhiṇena kururena. Mandenāti dandhena atikhiṇena. Tādisaṃ pana attano, parassa vā samussāhanena pavattatīti āha ‘‘samussāhitenā’’ti. Parassa bhaṇḍaṃ vā haratīti vā-saddena tathāpavattanakamusāvādādīnampi saṅgaho veditabbo. Kāmānaṃ vāti anubhuyyamānānaṃ kāmaguṇānaṃ. Vā-saddena parasantakassa ayathādhippetatāya yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ gahetabbanti gahaṇādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
与嗔相应的诸法并没有差别,所以嗔根心只按无行和有行分成两种。既然这样,为什么又说“与忧俱行、与嗔相应”呢?这是为了用不共的法来标示这种心。杀生,就是极度地、或者越过界限地让有情丧命。用“等”这个字,还包括了不与取、妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语和嗔恚。因为在十不善业道里,邪淫、贪欲、邪见这三种业道,并不通过这种心来成立。当心以自身本性锐利地生起时,就是无行;另一种则是有行——这是就“在锐利和微弱生起的时候”来说的。不过,心微弱地生起时,并不能一概断定就是有行。应当知道:凡是靠加行、靠刻意努力才生起的心,那它就是微弱的,所以才那样说。巴利
Sampayuttadhammavasena bhedābhāvato dosamūlaṃ asaṅkhārikasasaṅkhārikabhedato duvidhaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘domanassasahagataṃ paṭighasampayutta’’nti vuttaṃ? Asādhāraṇadhammehi tassa cittassa upalakkhaṇatthaṃ. Pāṇassa atīva, atikkamitvā vā pātanaṃ pāṇātipāto. Ādi-saddena adinnādānamusāvādapesuññapharusasamphappalāpabyāpāde saṅgaṇhāti. Dasaakusalakammapathesu hi kāmesumicchācāraabhijjhāmicchādiṭṭhisaṅkhātā tayova kammapathā iminā na sijjhanti. Sabhāvatikkhaṃ hutvā pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ asaṅkhārameva hoti, itaraṃ sasaṅkhāranti adhippāyenāha ‘‘tikkhamandappavattikāle’’ti. Mandaṃ pana hutvā pavattamānaṃ ekaṃsena sasaṅkhāramevāti na sakkāva viññātuṃ. Yaṃ sasaṅkhārena sappayogena pavattati, taṃ mandameva hotīti katvā tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
痴根心因为没有其他根配合,所以极度愚钝;又因为和疑、掉举相应,所以摇摆不定,因此它只与舍受相伴,任何时候都不具有自性锐利的特质。因为对于这两种心——它们在所缘上到处游移、散乱地生起——在那样的情况下,哪里谈得上自性锐利或者需要被激励呢?所以,在这里并没有行蕴上的差别。有人会问:掉举不是和一切不善心都共通的吗?那为什么偏偏只把这种心特别标为“掉举俱”呢?因为掉举在这种心里特别强。这个掉举在这种心中力量强大,所以在相应的心所法中成为主导而运作,因此只有这种心才用掉举来特别标明。也正因为如此,在经典中,其余不善心里的掉举是以附带提及的方式出现的,而在这里则是直接按其本身的面貌来说明。应当这样理解:依照不共的主导法,痴根心分为疑相应和掉举相应两种。未决断,就是疑;散乱,就是不寂静、迷乱的意思。其中应当知道:疑俱心在未决断的时候生起,掉举俱心在散乱的时候生起。巴利
Mohamūlaṃ cittaṃ mūlantaravirahato atimūḷhaṃ vicikicchuddhaccayogato cañcalañcāti upekkhāsahagatameva hoti, na tassa kadācipi sabhāvatikkhatā atthi. Ārammaṇe hi saṃsappanavasena, vikkhipanavasena ca pavattamānassa cittadvayassa kiṃ tādise kicce sabhāvatikkhatāya, ussāhetabbatāya vā bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā na tattha saṅkhārabhedo atthi. Nanu ca uddhaccaṃ sabbākusalasādhāraṇaṃ, kasmā pana etameva tena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘uddhaccasahagata’’nti. Visesato balavabhāvato. Idañhi etasmiṃ citte balavaṃ, tasmā sampayuttadhammesu padhānaṃ hutvā pavattatīti idameva tena visesitabbaṃ. Teneva hi pāḷiyaṃ sesākusalesu uddhaccaṃ yevāpanakavasena āgataṃ, idha pana sarūpatoyeva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Evaṃ asādhāraṇappadhānadhammavasena mohamūlaṃ vicikicchāsampayuttaṃ uddhaccasampayuttanti duvidhaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Asanniṭṭhānaṃ saṃsayo, vikkhepo avūpasamo, bhantatāti attho. Tattha vicikicchāsahagatassa asanniṭṭhānakāle, uddhaccasahagatassa vikkhepakāle ca pavatti veditabbā.
“随顺”是指随顺能结生的业与不能结生的业,以及随顺是否构成业道。或者说,“随顺”是指随顺各自的因。因为大多数情况下,以贪为根的(业)会让人投生在饿鬼界,那里不断遭受饥渴等苦;以嗔为根的(业),就像嗔怒一样,由于性情暴恶,会投生到与它相似的地狱;以痴为根的(业),由于长久愚痴,会投生到畜生趣。因此,随顺贪等因,就在各处恶趣中产生投生,所以说“随顺……投生”。由于不善异熟以苦为主,所以说为“苦的差别”。巴利
Yathānurūpanti paṭisandhijanakājanakassa, kammapathabhāvappattāpattassa ca anurūpato. Atha vā yathānurūpanti yo yassa hetu, tadanurūpato. Yebhuyyena hi lobhamūlakena khuppipāsādinirantarapetavisaye uppajjanti, dosamūlakena doso viya caṇḍajātatāya taṃsarikkhake niraye, mohamūlakena niccasammūḷhāya tiracchānayoniyaṃ, tasmā lobhādihetuanurūpato tattha tattha apāye upapattiṃ nipphādetīti āha ‘‘yathānurūpaṃ…pe…upapattiyā’’ti . Akusalavipākānaṃ dukkhappadhānatāya ‘‘dukkhavisesassā’’ti vuttaṃ.
31 31. 以无恶、无垢、已断恶与恶者,在恶与恶者之心意中,所说的恶心意——这是这样连接的。或者,以无恶、已断恶与恶者,在恶与恶者之人中,所说的恶心意——这是另一种连接。再者,以恶、恶心意、恶行、已断恶与恶者,在恶与恶者之心意中,所说的恶心意——这是(另一种)搭配。然而这里的意思是:非正自觉者因为法性难以了知,可能把善说成不善,把不善说成善;而世尊因为连同习气彻底摧毁了不善,并以尽业智使善业因缘缺失而断除,且因为是正自觉者,所以绝对只从不善法的角度来宣说不善。巴利
31.Apāpena alāmakena pāpāpāpappahīnena pāpāpāpesu mānasesu yaṃ pāpamānasaṃ vuttaṃ, pāpāpāpesu puggalesu apāpena pāpāpāpappahīnena yaṃ pāpamānasaṃ vuttanti vā sambandho. Atha vā pāpāpāpesu mānasesu pāpena pāpamānasena pāpavasena pāpāpāpappahīnena yaṃ pāpamānasaṃ vuttanti yojanā. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – asammāsambuddhena tāva dhammasabhāvassa dubbijānīyattā kusalampi akusalato, akusalampi kusalato vucceyya, bhagavato pana saha vāsanāhi viddhaṃsitākusalassa kammakkhayakarañāṇena paccayavekallato viddhaṃsitakusalakammassa ca sammāsambuddhabhāvato ekanteneva akusaladesanā akusaladhammavasenevāti.
彼此不同的善与不善的成熟,称为异熟;这是对那些已经达到异熟状态的非色法的称呼。就像在世间,稻种等长出的果实与种子相似,被称为异熟,也得到了异熟这个名字,而根、芽、叶、茎、秆等则不是这样。同样地,善与不善的果报,因为是非色法、因为有所缘,与那些善不善法相似,已经达到了异熟的状态,所以得到异熟这个名字;而由业所生的色法则不是这样,因为色法与业不相似。作为异熟的心就是异熟心。唯作仅仅是一种作用,因为它不能给出果报;它不能给出果报的理由,前面已经说过了。作为唯作的心就是唯作心。异熟的欲界等层次,应该按照善心那里所说的方法,随相应的情况来了知。与无贪等相应的因一起生起,所以是有因;没有这些因,所以是无因。这一有因无因的分别虽然依据能生的因也成立,但只依据相应因才被称为有因或无因,否则就无法确定。巴利
Aññamaññavisiṭṭhānaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ pākanti vipākaṃ, vipakkabhāvamāpannānamarūpadhammānametamadhivacanaṃ. Yathā hi loke sālibījādīnaṃ phalāni taṃsadisāni nibbattāni vipakkāni nāma honti, vipākaniruttiñca labhanti, na mūlaṅkurapattadaṇḍanaḷādīni, evaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ phalāni arūpadhammabhāvena, sārammaṇabhāvena ca taṃsadisāni vipakkabhāvamāpannānīti vipākaniruttiṃ labhanti, na pana kammābhinibbattāpi rūpadhammā kammavisadisattā. Vipākameva cittaṃ vipākacittaṃ. Karaṇamattaṃ kiriyā phaladānāsambhavato. Yena pana kāraṇena tassa phaladānaṃ na sambhavati, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Kiriyā eva cittaṃ kiriyacittaṃ. Vipākassa kāmāvacarādibhāvo kusale vuttanayena yathāsambhavaṃ veditabbo. Alobhādisampayuttahetūhi saha vattanato sahetukaṃ. Tadabhāvato ahetukaṃ. Nibbattakahetuvasena sijjhamānampi hetaṃ sampayuttahetuvaseneva ‘‘sahetukamahetuka’’nti vuccati, itarathā vavatthānābhāvato.
“如同自己的善”是指像能生起自己的欲界善那样。因为按照能生与所生的关系,每一种善就成了每一种异熟的“自己的”名称。巴利
Sakakusalaṃ viyāti attano janakaṃ kāmāvacarakusalaṃ viya. Janakajanitabbasambandhavasena hi taṃ taṃ kusalaṃ tassa tassa vipākassa sakaṃ nāmaṃ hoti.
因为前面说“像自己的善一样”,所以有人可能会认为它在生起方式和所缘等方面也会变得跟那善一样;为了遮止这种看法,才说“然而,就像……”等。在六种所缘中:就是在按小、大等,过去、未来等,内、外等区分的六种色等所缘中。因为连接到来世,所以叫结生。因为以不断绝生起为因,作为有的支分,所以叫有分。因为完全取着已生起的有,并且是死的因,所以叫死。在小法所摄中:就是在欲界法所摄中。欲界法因为在镇伏烦恼等方面没有能力,所以是小威力;或者因为被粗重的欲贪等完全包住,所以叫“小”。异熟不会先思量再取所缘,只是随业而生起,所以小业的异熟只应当在小所缘中生起,不可能在大所缘和无量所缘中生起,因此说“在小法所摄中”。如果是这样,那大异熟也只应当在大所缘中生起吗?不是。因为所缘取决于想,以定为主的业达到安止时,它的异熟也必然是这样。因为不取色相、特征等,只是随顺世间想而取地等,由遍作想所生起的似相所缘是随想而转、依于想的,所以以它为所缘、以定为主、达到安止的业,其异熟也必定和以定为主、达到安止的业一样,毫无差别地依于想而取所缘。不过,小异熟也可以由以大、无量、概念为所缘的业所生起,这将在后面说到。巴利
‘‘Sakakusalaṃ viyā’’ti vuttattā pavattākāraārammaṇādito cassa taṃsadisatā āpajjeyyāti taṃnivāraṇatthamāha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Chasu ārammaṇesūti parittādiatītādiajjhattādibhedesu chasu rūpādiārammaṇesu. Bhavantarapaṭisandhānato paṭisandhi. Avicchedappavattihetubhāvena bhavassa aṅganti bhavaṅgaṃ. Nibbattitabhavato parigaññatāya cutihetutāya cuti. Parittadhammapariyāpannesūti kāmāvacaradhammapariyāpannesu. Kāmāvacaradhammā hi kilesavikkhambhanādīsu asamatthabhāvena parittānubhāvatāya, oḷārikāhi vā kāmataṇhādīhi parito gahitattā ‘‘parittā’’ti vuccanti. Vipākassa saṅkappetvā ārammaṇaggahaṇābhāvato kammānurūpameva pavattatīti parittakammavipāko parittārammaṇeyeva pavattitumarahati, na mahaggataappamāṇārammaṇeti vuttaṃ ‘‘parittadhammapariyāpannesū’’ti. Yadi evaṃ mahaggatavipākopi mahaggatārammaṇeyeva āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, saññāyattārammaṇassa samādhippadhānassa kammassa appanāpattassa tādiseneva vipākena bhavitabbattā. Vaṇṇalakkhaṇādikañhi aggahetvā lokasaññānurodheneva gahite pathavādike parikammasaññāya samuppāditaṃ paṭibhāganimittasaṅkhātamārammaṇaṃ saññāvasaṃ saññāyattaṃ hoti, tasmā tadārammaṇassa samādhippadhānassa appanāpattassa kammassa vipākena samādhippadhānaappanāpattehi viya saññāyattārammaṇatāya nibbiseseneva bhavitabbaṃ. Parittavipāko pana mahaggataappamāṇapaññattārammaṇakammanibbattopi hoti, so parato āgamissati.
就像面容的相一样:是依于面容而生起的相。就像那没有主动作用的面容之相,不能生起另一个面容之相,也不能靠自己的力量做任何其他事;同样地,这个异熟在生起异熟等事上也不努力。因此说“无努力”。这里所说的努力,是指在无明、爱、慢随眠尚未断除的相续中,能生起异熟的能力,名为习行缘力,以及能生起身表和语表的作用。这种努力在异熟中并不存在,因为异熟被业的冲力抛出,如同掉落一般转起,纯粹是羸弱的,所以它是无努力的。巴利
Mukhanimittaṃ viyāti mukhaṃ paṭicca uppannanimittaṃ viya. Yathā hi taṃ nirīhaṃ aparaṃ mukhanimittaṃ uppādetuṃ, aññaṃ vā kiñci attano balena kātuṃ na sakkoti, evametampi vipākuppādanādīsu na ussahati. Tenāha ‘‘nirussāha’’nti. Ussāhoti cettha anupacchinnāvijjātaṇhāmānānusayasmiṃ santāne vipākuppādanasamatthatāsaṅkhāto, āsevanapaccayabhāvasaṅkhāto, viññattijanakatāsaṅkhāto ca byāpāro. So vipāke natthi kammavegukkhittattā patitaṃ viya hutvā pavattamānassa tassa ekantena dubbalabhāvatoti taṃ nirussāhaṃ.
“异熟处”是指依异熟而转起的地方,也就是结生、有分、死、彼所缘这四种作用生起的场所。其中,死与有分之间的间隙是结生作用的位置;结生与转向之间、彼所缘与转向之间、速行与转向之间、确定与转向之间的间隙,是有分作用的位置;彼所缘与结生之间、速行与结生之间、有分与结生之间的间隙,是死作用的位置;速行与有分之间的间隙,是彼所缘作用的位置,应当这样理解。然而,这个处所是依诸法各自的作用而显现出来的,因此为了说明“处所应当了知”,就举出处所,并依所显现的作用来阐明它,所以说“这些……”等。或者,作用也可以作为具有作用者的转起处所而被理解,因此举出“处所”就是举出作用;为了显示它的自相,所以说“这些……”等。巴利
Vipaccanaṭṭhānanti vipaccanavasena pavattanaṭṭhānaṃ, paṭisandhibhavaṅgacutitadārammaṇavasena catukiccānametesaṃ pavattiokāsoti attho. Tattha cutibhavaṅgānaṃ antarāḷaṃ paṭisandhikiccānaṃ ṭhānaṃ, paṭisandhiāvajjanānaṃ, tadārammaṇāvajjanānaṃ, javanāvajjanānaṃ, voṭṭhabbanāvajjanānañca antarāḷaṃ bhavaṅgakiccānaṃ ṭhānaṃ, tadārammaṇapaṭisandhīnaṃ, javanapaṭisandhīnaṃ, bhavaṅgapaṭisandhīnaṃ vā antarāḷaṃ cutikiccānaṃ ṭhānaṃ, javanabhavaṅgānaṃ antarāḷaṃ tadārammaṇakiccānaṃ ṭhānanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā panetaṃ ṭhānaṃ dhammānaṃ taṃtaṃkiccavasena pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmā ṭhānaṃ veditabbanti ṭhānaṃ uddharitvā pākaṭakiccavaseneva taṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘imānihī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā kiccampi kiccavantānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānabhāvena gayhatīti ṭhānantipi kiccameva uddhaṭanti taṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘imāni hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
32 32. 对于卵生、胎生的人类和堕苦处的阿修罗,因为他们也有无因结生,所以世尊说“二因、三因”。与结生识相应的无贪等两个因,具备这些因的就是二因;三因也是如此类推。其中,二因者有四种智不相应的结生,三因者有四种智相应的结生,有分和死也同样如此。因为以哪种心结生,那种心也同样以有分和死的方式运作。不过,彼所缘应当不加区分地看待,因为二因者也被认可有三因的彼所缘。难道这不是未经审察的说法吗?因为阿阇梨自己就已经否定了它。正如他将要说:巴利
32. Aṇḍajajalābujayonisambhavānaṃ manussānaṃ, vinipātikāsurānañca ahetukapaṭisandhiyāpi sabbhāvato āha ‘‘duhetukatihetūna’’nti. Paṭisandhiviññāṇasampayuttā dve alobhādayo hetū yesaṃ te duhetukā. Esa nayo tihetukesupi. Tattha duhetukānaṃ ñāṇavippayuttāni cattāri, tihetukānaṃ ñāṇasampayuttāni cattāri paṭisandhiyo honti, tathā bhavaṅgacutiyopi. Yena yena hi cittena paṭisandhi hoti, taṃ tadeva bhavaṅgacutivasenapi pavattati. Tadārammaṇaṃ pana avisesena daṭṭhabbaṃ duhetukānampi tihetukatadārammaṇassa icchitattā. Nanu cetaṃ asamapekkhitābhidhānaṃ ācariyeneva imassa paṭisiddhattā. Tathā hi vakkhati –
无因结生者,没有彼所缘。
二因或三因,二因结生者的。巴利
‘‘Ahetupaṭisandhissa, na tadārammaṇaṃ bhave; Duhetukaṃ tihetuṃ vā, duhetupaṭisandhino’’ti. (abhidha. 443);
这句话并不是在说“无因心不能生起有因的彼所缘”这种未经审察的说法,因为它否定的是就“能导致结生的业”来说的情况。因为,凡是某一种业带来了某一种结生,那种业就不会在生命活动过程中,让比那种结生更强的彼所缘生起。但是,如果还有别的某种业在当时得到了机会,那么它并不是不会在那里产生比结生更强的果报——这种情况是存在的。因为《发趣论》中说:“有因的有分,是无因的有分的无间缘。”依据《发趣论》的这句话,即使是无因者,在善趣中,也承认可以由种种不同的业而拥有有因的彼所缘。因此,老师们说——巴利
Nayidamasamapekkhitābhidhānaṃ paṭisandhijanakakammaṃ sandhāya tattha paṭisiddhattā. Yena hi kammena yā paṭisandhi ādinnā, na taṃ tato adhikataraṃ tadārammaṇaṃ pavatte abhinipphādeti. Yaṃ pana aññampi kiñci kammaṃ tadāladdhāvakāsaṃ siyā, na taṃ tattha tato adhikatarampi vipākaṃ na nibbattetīti atthi. ‘‘Sahetukaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ ahetukassa bhavaṅgassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.1.102) hi paṭṭhānavacanena ahetukassāpi nānākammena sugatiyaṃ sahetukatadārammaṇamanuññātaṃ. Tenāhu ācariyā –
有因的(心)能由另一种业而存在,无因的(心)则不能。巴利
‘‘Hoti aññena kammena, sahetukaṃ ahetuna’’nti.
就像无因心可以以有因法为所缘,同样,二因心也可以以三因法为所缘,这一点他们也是承认的。不过,觉护长老因为“有因”这个词是没有区分地说的,所以主张无因心也能以三因法为所缘。他确实说过:按照“有因”这一不加区分的教导,应当同时取二因和三因。正如注释书里说:“无因心以三因法为所缘这一点也被提到了,而且在义摄中说无因心能给出三因的果报。”这怎么可能呢?应该去问那位作者。另一些人则说:“由于在根结合处的迟钝,它确实得不到三因所缘。”巴利
Yathā ca ahetukassa sahetukaṃ, evaṃ duhetukassa tihetukampi icchanti. Ācariyajotipālatthero pana ‘‘sahetuka’’nti avisesena vuttattā ahetukānampi tihetukatadārammaṇaṃ icchati. Vuttañhi tena ‘‘sahetuka’’nti avisesopadesena duhetukaṃ, tihetukañca gahetabbaṃ. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ahetukassāpi tihetukatadārammaṇamabhihitaṃ, yañcarahi atthasamāse ahetukānaṃ tihetukaphalāni detī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ? So eva pucchitabbo, yo tassa kattāti. Apare pana ‘‘mūlasandhiyā jaḷattā tassa tihetukatadālambaṇaṃ na labbhatiyevā’’ti vadanti.
33-4 从结生之后,也就是从第二个心识开始。虽然中间有路心间断生起,但在路心结束时生起的彼所缘,因为直到寿尽都不会退转,所以说“直至寿尽”。在强力所缘中,也就是极大、极明显的所缘中。因为在五门中,只有对极大所缘,在意门中,只有对极明显所缘,彼所缘才会生起,其他情况下不会生起。在总说中,为了显示结生等三者是在同一所缘转起中的同一处所,把彼所缘作为终结;但在这里,应当理解为按转起的次第,以死心作为终结。巴利
33-4.Tatoti paṭisandhito paraṃ, dutiyacittato paṭṭhāya. Satipi antarantarā vīthicittuppāde tadavasāne uppajjamānassa yāvatāyukaṃ anivattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvatāyuka’’nti. Balavārammaṇeti atimahantavibhūtārammaṇe. Pañcadvāre hi atimahantārammaṇe manodvāre vibhūtārammaṇe tadārammaṇamuppajjati, na aññesu. Ekārammaṇappavattiyā paṭisandhādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi ekaṭṭhāne dassanatthaṃ uddese tadārammaṇassa avasānakaraṇaṃ, idha pana pavattikkamavasena cutiyā avasānakaraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
35-6 35-6. “业门”是说:它不作为身业门和语业门的生起因,所以不依它们而转起。其中,“身”指身表;“业”是令它生起的思,以身所造之业就是身业。虽然身对于业的二十四缘中,不以任何缘作为缘,但因为它是那业生起的原因,在它存在时就有身业等的施设,所以说“以此身而作”。作为身业转起处所的门,就是身业门。如果这样理解,业门的安立就不成立了。因为以身门成就的业称为“身业”,但依照“业行于门”的说法,那业也可以在语门成就,所以不能以门来安立业;同样,语业也可以在身门成就,所以也不能以业来安门。然而并非如此,因为这是依照业多行于此门、多数行于此门来安立的。身业确实多以身门转起,少以语门转起,因此,由于多以身门转起,它的身业性得以成立,就像林居者等人因为多住在林中,而得到林居者等名称。同样,身业确实多数以身门转起,而非其他门,因此,由于它多数在此转起,这个门的身业门性得以成立,就像婆罗门村等因为婆罗门多数居住,而得到婆罗门村等名称。所以,在业门的安立中没有任何障碍。语业门也应随其所宜,依照同样的道理来理解。巴利
35-6.Kammadvāranti kāyavacīkammadvārassa janakavasena na pavattantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kāyoti kāyaviññatti. Kammanti taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā, kāyena kataṃ kammaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi kāyo kammassa catuvīsatiyā paccayesu na kenaci paccayena paccayo hoti, tathāpi taṃsamuṭṭhānassa tassa sabbhāveyeva kāyakammādivohāroti taṃ tena katanti vuccati. Kāyakammassa pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ dvāraṃ kāyakammadvāraṃ. Yadi evaṃ kammadvāravavatthānaṃ na siyā . Kāyadvārena hi siddhaṃ kammaṃ ‘‘kāyakamma’’nti vuccati. Taṃ pana ‘‘dvāre caranti kammānī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1 kāyakammadvāra) vacanato vacīdvārepi sijjhatīti dvārena kammavavatthānaṃ na siyā, tathā vacīkammaṃ kāyadvārepi sijjhatīti kammena dvāravavatthānampi na siyāti? Taṃ na, tabbahulavuttiyā ceva yebhuyyena vuttiyā ca vavatthitattā. Kāyakammañhi kāyadvāreyeva bahulaṃ pavattati, appaṃ vacīdvāre, tasmā kāyadvāre bahulappavattanato etassa kāyakammabhāvo siddho vanacarakādīnaṃ vanacarakādibhāvo viya. Tathā kāyakammameva yebhuyyena kāyadvāre pavattati, na itaraṃ, tasmā kāyakammassa yebhuyyena ettheva pavattito assa kāyakammadvārabhāvo siddho brāhmaṇagāmādīnaṃ brāhmaṇagāmādibhāvo viyāti nettha kammadvāravavatthāne koci vibandhoti. Vacīkammadvārepi esa pabandho yathāsambhavaṃ daṭṭhabbo.
不过,意业门本身就是意,因为它作为与自身俱行的思、无贪等业的转起之门,所以得到“意门”这个名称,因此不能把它理解为心的生起之门。因为意并不是自己使自己转起。如果认为与心相应的诸法才是业门,那么它们的业门性就不能安立在意上,而应像相应诸法以心为主那样,安立在心上,所以说心称为“意业门”。但从自性来说,业门就是相应诸法本身,因此心从它们转起,就是依意业门而转起。至于作为无间缘的心,它的意业门性则根本无从说起。在这里,通过“非表生故”这句话,已经成立它不依身业门和语业门转起,所以并没有取意业门。因为“非表生故”这个理由,并不能成立它也不依意业门转起。或者,通过“非异熟性故”这句话,也就成立了它不依意业门转起。在“业门”一词中,“业”指的是异刹那的业,所以应知道它也包含在内。总之,是为了说明:善心在这称为身业门、语业门的二门中,或者连同意业门在内的三门中,随宜转起,而异熟心并非如此;善心以造作身业、语业、意业的方式,依布施等福德行事而转起,这个异熟心也并非如此。而这个异熟心既不依身业门和语业门转起,因为它没有表生的作用;也不依业的方式转起,也不依意业门转起,因为它没有产生异熟的作用;它不依福德行事转起,因为它不依布施等而转起。为了说明这一点,所以说“业门……非是”。以上就是依布施等而说。巴利
Manokammadvāraṃ pana sayaṃ manoyeva samānaṃ attanā sahagatacetanāanabhijjhādikammānaṃ pavattidvārabhāvena manodvārasaṅkhaṃ labhatīti na taṃ cittassa uppattidvāravasena gaṇhāti. Na hi sayaṃ attatova pavattati. Yadi pana cittasampayuttā kammadvārabhāvena adhippetā, tadā tesaṃ kammadvārabhāvo manasmiṃ na upacārīyatīti sampayuttadhammānaṃ cittādhipatibhāvo citte viyāti cittaṃ ‘‘manokammadvāra’’nti vuccati. Sabhāvato pana kammadvāraṃ nāma sampayuttadhammāyevāti cittaṃ tato pavattanato manokammadvāravasena pavattati. Anantarapaccayabhūtassa pana manokammadvārabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Idha pana ‘‘aviññattijanattā’’ti vacanena kāyavacīkammadvāravaseneva appavattiyā sādhitattā manokammadvāraṃ na gahitameva. Na hi ‘‘aviññattijanattā’’ti kāraṇaṃ manokammadvāravasenapi appavattiṃ sādheti. Atha vā ‘‘avipākasabhāvato’’ti vacanena manokammadvāravasenapi appavatti sādhitā hoti. ‘‘Kammadvāra’’nti ettha kammaggahanena nānakkhaṇikakammassa adhippetattā tassāpi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iti imesu kāyavacīkammadvārasaṅkhātesu dvīsu dvāresu, manokammadvārena saha tīsu eva vā yathā kusalaṃ pavattati, na evaṃ vipāko, yathā ca kusalaṃ kāyavacīmanokammassa āyūhanavasena dānādipuññakiriyavatthuvasena pavattati, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana neva kāyavacīkammadvāresu pavattati viññattisamuṭṭhāpakattābhāvato, na kammavasena, manokammadvāravasenāpi ca pavattati vipākuppādanabhāvābhāvato, na puññakiriyavasena pavattati dānādivasena appavattanatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘kammadvārañca…pe… no samā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evanti dānādivasena.
37 “以小所缘”等,是依相应法来显示差别。因为这些都是以小[法]为所缘,而悲和喜是以施设为所缘,因为在有情施设中转起,所以不能以一颗心生起两种所缘为境,因此悲和喜任何时候都不会在这些[无量心]中生起。这是这里第一偈的意趣。巴利
37.‘‘Parittārammaṇattā’’tiādi sampayuttadhammavasena visesadassanaṃ. Yasmā ete parittārammaṇā, karuṇāmuditā ca paññattārammaṇā sattapaññattiyaṃ pavattanato, tasmā dvinnamālambaṇānaṃ ekacittassa visayabhāvānanugamanato na tesu karuṇāmuditā kadācipi jāyantīti ayamettha paṭhamagāthāya adhippāyo.
38 第二偈中,“hi”这个词的意思是“因为”。因为世尊说“五学处是善”(《分别论》715),所以是这个意思。这里说的是:世尊在“学处分别”中,以“五学处是善”(《分别论》715)这样的话语,说明了“离杀生”等五学处的善性。而这五学处,其本质就是远离:前三学处的自性就是远离,最后一个学处的自性是正业,另一个学处的自性是正语;而且这五者都是因为远离以邪命为根源的五种恶行而转起,所以都含摄在正命之中。因此,这些学处对于一向是善的法来说,有时也会在无记心中生起;如果不是这样,那就应该像信、念等法那样,被说成“可能是善,可能是无记”。如果真是这样,那么出世间果中的八支道或七支道不就得不到了吗?并非得不到。因为这里说的只是世间远离的一向善性;而出世间的远离,由于果是道的映现、与道相似,所以应当是八支或七支,不应该用“一向是善”来判定它。这样说来,上文在出世间果中也举出了八支性等差别之道。巴利
38. Dutiyagāthāya pana hi-saddo yasmāti imassa atthe. Yasmā ‘‘pañca sikkhāpadā kusalā’’ti (vibha. 715) vuttā, tasmāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhagavatā hi sikkhāpadavibhaṅge ‘‘pañca sikkhāpadā kusalā’’ti (vibha. 715) evaṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’tiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ kusalabhāvo vutto, te ca viratisabhāvā eva ādito tiṇṇaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ, pacchimassa ca sammākammante, itarassa sammāvācāyaṃ, pañcannampi micchājīvahetukapañcaduccaritato viramaṇavasena pavattānaṃ sammāājīve ca antobhāvato, tasmā tā ekantakusalabhūtānaṃ kadāci abyākate labhanti, itarathā saddhāsatiādayo viya ‘‘siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā’’ti vucceyyunti. Yadi evaṃ lokuttaraphalesu aṭṭha, satta vā maggaṅgā na labbhantīti? No na labbhanti lokiyaviratīnameva tattha ekantakusalabhāvassa vuttattā, lokuttaraviratiyo pana phalassa maggapaṭibimbabhūtattā maggasadisato aṭṭhaṅgikatāya, sattaṅgikatāya ca bhavitabbanti na ca ekantakusalabhāvena vavatthāpetuṃ yuttā. Evañca katvā upari lokuttaraphalesupi aṭṭhaṅgikatādibhedo maggo uddhaṭoti.
39 “以增上为主导”等这些话,是从增上的角度显示其差别。因为一切三地善法,造业的时候和感果的时候是分开的,所以它们不能让自身的果报执取增上,因此它们不是以欲等为主导而运作。而出世间善法,因为造业的时候和感果的时候之间没有间隔,在自身欲等的力量还没有消退的时候就已经产生了果报,所以能作为无间缘,让果报执取增上。这样说来,下文就会讲到出世间果报与增上相应的情况。巴利
39.‘‘Tathādhipatino’’tiādi adhipativasena visesadassanaṃ. Sabbesampi hi tebhūmakakusalānaṃ añño āyūhanakālo, añño vipaccanakālo, tasmā na tāni attano vipākehi adhipatiṃ gāhāpetuṃ sakkontīti na te chandādīni dhuraṃ katvā pavattanti. Lokuttarakusalāni ca pana āyūhanakālassa, vipaccanakālassa ca antarābhāvato attano chandādīnaṃ balassa avūpasantakāleyeva vipākaṃ nibbattentīti anantarapaccayā hutvā vipākehi adhipatiṃ gāhāpetuṃ sakkontīti. Evañca katvā upari lokuttaravipākānaṃ adhipatiyogaṃ vakkhati.
40 40. 因为孔雀池住者大授长老主张,无行与有行的区别是依据异熟的到来而成立;三藏小那伽长老则主张,这是依据缘而成立。所以,为了展示他们两人的见解,才说了“无行与有行的安立”等话。前一位长老说:就像嘴在动的时候,镜中的嘴像也跟着动一样,无行善的异熟就是无行,有行善的异熟就是有行。因此,为了显示他的见解,说了“无行……从福……”等话。后一位长老则说:在无行等当中,不论以哪一种心造了业,临近死亡的人在自己或他人的努力之外,没有行、没有加行,而在业、业相、趣相现前时生起的结生,就是无行;任何人如果有行、有加行,而在业等现前时生起,就是有行。有分和死心也是这样。至于彼所缘,则依据气候、食物等的优劣,或者依据刚刚灭去的善心或不善心,而成为无行或有行。他就是像这样依据缘来说明无行等的安立。因此,为了显示他的见解,说了“亦应依缘而了知”。而这一点,正是诸位阿阇梨所赞叹的。巴利
40. Yasmā moravāpivāsimahādattattherena vipākānaṃ āgamanato asaṅkhārikasasaṅkhārikabhāvo icchito, tipiṭakacūḷanāgattherena paccayato, tasmā ubhinnampi matidassanatthamāha ‘‘asaṅkhārasasaṅkhāravidhāna’’ntiādi. Purimatthero hi yathā mukhe calite ādāsatale mukhanimittaṃ calati , evaṃ asaṅkhārikassa kusalassa vipāko asaṅkhāriko, sasaṅkhārikassa vipāko sasaṅkhārikoti āha, tasmā tassa matidassanatthaṃ ‘‘asaṅkhāra…pe… puññato’’ti vuttaṃ. Dutiyatthero pana asaṅkhārikādīsu yena kenacipi cittena kamme āyūhite āsannamaraṇassa attano, paresaṃ vā payogena vinā asaṅkhārena appayogena kammakammanimittagatinimittapaccupaṭṭhāne paṭisandhi uppajjamānā asaṅkhārikā. Yassa kassaci sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kammādipaccupaṭṭhāne sasaṅkhārikā. Tathā bhavaṅgacutiyopi. Tadārammaṇañca paṇītāpaṇītautubhojanādipaccayavasena, anantaraniruddhakusalākusalassa vasena vā asaṅkhārasasaṅkhāranti evaṃ paccayato asaṅkhārikādividhānatamāha, tasmā tassa matidassanatthaṃ ‘‘ñeyyaṃ paccayato cevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idameva ca pana ācariyā pasaṃsanti.
41-2 因为即使没有与增上缘相应,劣、中、胜的善法仍然是劣等者的异熟性。由此,从到来的角度说明劣等的状态。以清除所教化众生相续中的烦恼垢秽而净化它,其言语之声就是说福德,或者按照所说的方式宣说福德,所以说福德者;由那位说福德者所说。虽然说了“一向有依处”,但色界中的生起并未被遮止,因此说“于欲界”。而“不在别处生起”这句话,则是通过排除其他处所来显示所得到的含义。巴利
41-2.Hīnādīnaṃ vipākattāti adhipatiyogābhāvepi hīnamajjhimapaṇītānaṃ kusalānaṃ vipākattā. Etena āgamanato hīnādibhāvaṃ vibhāveti. Vineyyasantānagatakilesamalavidhamanena tassa punanato puñño vādo vacīghoso etassa, vuttanayeneva puññaṃ vadatīti vā puññavādī, tena puññavādinā. ‘‘Ekantena savatthuka’’nti vuttepi rūpaloke pavatti anivāritāti āha ‘‘kāmalokasmi’’nti . ‘‘Na panaññattha jāyate’’ti iminā pana byatirekato laddhamatthaṃ dassetīti.
先这样说明了有因的果报之后,现在为了说明无因的果报,就说“无因的果报心则……”等等。那么,为什么有因的业会有无因的果报呢?回答说:首先,眼识等五种识仅仅是对所缘的撞击,所以不可能与无贪等相应;同样,在作用更微弱的领受和推度里也是如此。因此,由于这些因不可能生起,就应该知道它们是无因的。至于与舍受等相应的情况:眼识等四种识,即使对可意所缘生起,也因为依处与所缘的撞击力弱,所以是舍俱;身识则因为那种撞击力强,所以是乐俱。领受因为具有与所缘撞击相应的粗重性,而且已经过了四个心刹那而成为旧的,所以自身是弱的;它又依靠与自己不同种类的眼等依处,由眼识等生起而获得无间缘,并且依靠之前没有的依处,所以对享受所缘滋味的力量微弱,因此对可意等所缘只是舍俱。推度则与上述情况相反,对可意所缘是乐俱,对可意中性所缘是舍俱。意界:虽然像意识界一样是识,但因为不做意识特有的殊胜意作用,仅仅是“意”,而且以无有情、无命我等意义称为“界”,所以是意界。它虽然是识,但因为不做意识特有的殊胜意作用,所以仅仅是“意”。反过来,既是意又是识,所以是意识;它依据前面所说的意义而成为界,因此是意识界。巴利
Evaṃ tāva sahetukavipāke niddisitvā idāni ahetuke niddisituṃ ‘‘ahetukavipākacittaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kasmā pana sahetukassa kammassa ahetukavipāko hotīti? Vuccate – cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ tāva pañcannaṃ ārammaṇābhinipātamattattā alobhādisampayogo na sambhavati, tathā mandatarakiccesu sampaṭicchanasantīraṇesūti evaṃ hetūnaṃ uppattiyā asambhavato ca nesaṃ ahetukatā daṭṭhabbā. Upekkhādiyoge pana cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ tāva catunnaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇepi pavattamānānaṃ vatthārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanāya dubbalabhāvato upekkhāsahagatatā, kāyaviññāṇassa ca tāya balavabhāvato sukhasahagatatā hoti. Sampaṭicchanaṃ pana ārammaṇaghaṭṭanayogyabhāvena oḷārikattā, catucittakkhaṇātītavasena cirajātattā ca dubbalamattano nissayena saha asamānajātikañca cakkhādivatthuṃ nissāya uppannehi cakkhuviññāṇādīhi laddhānantarapaccayatāya, apubbanissayatāya ca ārammaṇarasassāde dubbalanti iṭṭhādīsu ārammaṇesu upekkhāsahagatameva. Santīraṇaṃ pana vuttaviparītato iṭṭhārammaṇe sukhasahagataṃ, iṭṭhamajjhatte ca upekkhāsahagatanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Manoviññāṇadhātu viya visiṭṭhamananakiccābhāvato manomattā nissattanijjīvādiatthehi dhātu cāti manodhātu. Sā hi satipi viññāṇabhāve manoviññāṇato sambhavassa visiṭṭhamananakiccassa akaraṇato mananamattāyeva hoti. Vuttalakkhaṇaviparītato pana mano ca taṃ viññāṇañcāti manoviññāṇaṃ, tadeva yathāvuttaṭṭhena dhātūti manoviññāṇadhātu.
五识的所缘是固定的,因为它们依次只以色等各自一种为所缘。其余三种的所缘不固定,因为它们具有以五种或六种为所缘的性质。巴利
Viññāṇapañcakaṃ niyatārammaṇaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpādiekekasseva ārammaṇakaraṇato. Sesattayamaniyatārammaṇaṃ pañcārammaṇikachaḷārammaṇikabhāvato.
因为可以被看见,所以叫“所见”,也就是色处。因为可以被听到,所以叫“所闻”,也就是声处。因为可以被觉知到,所以叫“所觉”,意思是只有实际接触到了才能执取,这是香、味、触这三处的名称。因为不依靠眼等,而仅仅靠意就能被了知,所以叫“所知”,也就是法处。又因为是不区分接触时间的用语,所以过去和未来的色等也用“所见”等词来称呼。正因如此,才通过“因为可以被看见”等说法,按时间的共通性来说明它们的词源。以所见为所缘的,就叫“所见所缘”。所闻所缘等也是这样。巴利
Daṭṭhabbatāya diṭṭhaṃ, rūpāyatanaṃ. Sotabbatāya sutaṃ, saddāyatanaṃ. Munitabbatāya mutaṃ, sampattasseva gahetabbatāyāti attho, gandhādittayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Cakkhādīhi vinā kevalaṃ manasā eva vijānitabbatāya viññātaṃ, dhammāyatanaṃ. Anāmaṭṭhakālavisesavacanattā ca nesaṃ atītānāgatāpi rūpādayo diṭṭhādisaddehi vuccanti. Teneva hi ‘‘daṭṭhabbatāyā’’tiādinā kālasāmaññena nesaṃ nibbacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ yassa taṃ diṭṭhārammaṇaṃ. Evaṃ sutārammaṇādīsu.
从眼转起,意思是只从眼门转起,因为这是对一切此类语句的限定之义。由此,意界等就被排除在眼识之外,因为它们也可能从其他门转起。或者,“从眼转起”是就生起式的转起而说的,不是就流动式的转起。因此,不像水从瓮口以流动的方式流出那样,这里取的不是那种转起;而是像水从月光石以生起的方式流出那样,这里取的正是这种转起,所以说“从眼转起”。打个比方:从腹中生起的胆汁、痰、血等,即使从口中流出来,也不叫“口流”;只有从口生起、再从那里流出的唾液,才叫“口流”。同样,依止于心所依处生起之后,从眼转起的识,不叫眼识;只有从眼本身生起、再从那里转起的识,才叫眼识。如果有人不这样审察义理,只死抠字面,就可能认为从那个门转起的其他识也是眼识。为了遮止这一点,论师用另一种方式说明其含义,所以说“依止于眼”。就像从眼转起、或依止于眼的识叫眼识,耳识等也应照此理解——“从耳转起、依止于耳的识叫耳识”等等,因此论师说“耳识等也是如此”。巴利
Cakkhuto pavattanti cakkhudvāratova pavattaṃ sabbavākyānaṃ avadhāraṇaphalattā. Tena manodhātuādīnaṃ cakkhuviññāṇabhāvo nivārito hoti tesaṃ dvārantaratopi pavattisambhavato. Atha vā ‘‘cakkhuto pavatta’’nti idaṃ sañjātippavattiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sañcaraṇappavattiṃ, tasmā yathā kuṇḍamukhato udakaṃ sañcaraṇavasena pavattati, na evaṃ pavattamidha gahitaṃ. Yathā pana candakantapāsāṇato udakaṃ sañjātivasena pavattati, evaṃ pavattameva cakkhuto pavattanti gahitaṃ. Yathā ca kiṃ? Yathā kucchito samuṭṭhitaṃ pittasemharuhirādi mukhato sandantampi ‘‘mukhassavo’’ti na vuccati, mukhatoyeva pana samuṭṭhahitvā tato savantaṃ kheḷaṃ ‘‘mukhassavo’’ti vuccati, evaṃ hadayavatthusannissayato samuṭṭhahitvā cakkhuto pavattamānaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nāma na hoti. Cakkhutoyeva pana samuṭṭhahitvā tato pavattamānaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nāmāti. Yo pana imamatthaṃ asallakkhetvā byañjanamattasseva abhinivisitvā taṃdvārappavattānaṃ sesānampi cakkhuviññāṇabhāvaṃ maññeyya, taṃ nivāretuṃ pakārantarenapi viggahaṃ dassento āha ‘‘cakkhumhi sannissita’’nti. Yathā cakkhuto pavattaṃ, cakkhusannissitaṃ vā viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, evaṃ sotaviññāṇādīsupi ‘‘sotato pavattaṃ, sotasmiṃ sannissitaṃ vā viññāṇaṃ sotaviññāṇa’’ntiādinā yojanaṃ atidisanto āha ‘‘tathā sotaviññāṇādīnī’’ti.
依止于眼,其特相是识知色,所以这是“依止于眼而识知色”的特相。其中,用“依止于眼”这个说法,排除了天眼等其它以色为所缘的识;用“识知”这个说法,排除了依止于眼的触等诸法;用“眼与色”这个说法,从所依和所缘两方面把心说明清楚,因为心是依靠这两者才能生起的。如果根本没有眼,那么盲人也应该能看见色,但盲人确实看不见。如果根本没有青等色,那么就不应该有方位等方面的限定,但实际上确实有这种限定。又说心是绝对以所缘为条件的,如果没有所缘,心也能以青等色显现的方式生起,这种说法应当被认为是邪说。所以世尊说:“缘于眼与色,生起眼识”等等。这里可能有疑问:那么,这眼与色作为识的缘,是单一的缘还是众多的缘?眼是单一的,色则是众多聚合而成的。什么原因?因为缘的状态有差别。眼作为眼识的所依缘、前生缘、根缘、不相应缘,是以“有”的状态为缘,有它时识才有,没有它时识就没有。因此说它是“有缘”等,而这种缘的状态并非在单一法上不成立,所以眼是眼识的单一缘。色虽然也像眼一样作为前生缘、有缘等,因为它是先已生起、在存在的刹那提供帮助,但作为所缘,它是由众多聚合而成为缘的。因为那所缘对识来说,是依照它可被取的方式而成为所缘缘,而识是依靠根才能生起的,它对所缘的取知并不是以单一极微或两三个极微聚的色来取知,也不是以少数极微聚的色来取知,而是随着作意,以呈现于面前的色来取知,所以是众多的色共同协作而成为识的缘。正是为了说明这个差别,在巴利文中才有了“缘于眼与色”这样不同的说法。耳识等也应按照各自的情况如此说明。至于鼻识等,因为它们是取已达到范围的所缘,是连同自己的所依一起执取的,所以即使是单一极微聚的香等,也能成为它们生起的缘。巴利
Cakkhusannissitaṃ hutvā rūpassa vijānanalakkhaṇametassāti cakkhusannissitarūpavijānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Tattha cakkhusannissitavacanena dibbacakkhādikaṃ aññaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ nivatteti . Vijānana-ggahaṇena cakkhusannissite phassādidhamme nivatteti. Cakkhurūpa-ggahaṇena nissayato, ārammaṇato ca cittaṃ vibhāveti ubhayādhīnavuttikattā. Yadi hi cakkhu nāma na siyā, andhāpi rūpaṃ passeyyuṃ, na ca passanti. Yadi ca nīlādirūpaṃ nāma na siyā, desādiniyamena na bhavitabbaṃ, attheva ca niyamo. Ekantasārammaṇatā ca cittassa vuttāti ārammaṇena vinā nīlādiābhāsaṃ cittaṃ pavattatīti evaṃ pavatto vādo micchāvādoti gahetabbo. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425; saṃ. ni. 4.60; kathā. 465). Ettha siyā – kiṃ panetaṃ cakkhu, rūpañca viññāṇassa paccayo hontaṃ ekameva paccayo hoti, udāhu anekanti? Cakkhu tāva ekampi, rūpaṃ pana anekameva saṅgataṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Paccayabhāvavisesato. Cakkhu hi cakkhuviññāṇassa nissayapurejātaindriyavippayuttapaccayehi paccayo hontaṃ atthibhāveneva hoti tasmiṃ sati tassa bhāvato, asati abhāvato. Yato taṃ atthiavigatapaccayehissa paccayoti vuttaṃ, svāyaṃ paccayabhāvo na ekasmiṃ na sambhavatīti ekampi cakkhuviññāṇassa paccayo hoti. Rūpaṃ pana yadipi cakkhu viya purejātaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti puretaraṃ uppannaṃ hutvā vijjamānakkhaṇeyeva upakārakattā, tathāpi anekameva saṅgataṃ hutvā paccayo hoti ārammaṇabhāvato. Yañhi taṃ ārammaṇaṃ tassa yathā tathā upalabbhanīyavaseneva ārammaṇapaccayabhāvo, viññāṇassa ca indriyādhīnavuttikassa ārammaṇasabhāvūpaladdhi na ekadvikalāpagatavaṇṇavasena hoti, nāpi katipayakalāpagatavaṇṇavasena, atha kho ābhogānurūpaṃ āpāthagatavaṇṇavasenāti anekameva rūpaṃ saṃhaccakāritāya viññāṇassa paccayo hotīti. Amumeva hi visesaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe cā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425; saṃ. ni. 4.60; kathā. 465) pāḷiyaṃ vacanabhedo katoti. Evaṃ sotaviññāṇepi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Ghānaviññāṇādīnaṃ pana sampattaggāhatāya attano nissayena saha allīnasseva gahaṇato ekakalāpagatampi gandhādikaṃ tesaṃ uppattiyā paccayo hoti.
以色为唯一所缘的作用,就是只把色处当作所缘来执取。“唯一”这个词,就像它排除其他所缘那样,也排除色处中存在的某些差别。因为眼识不能从单纯的色中执取任何青等差别。所以世尊说:“五识不能了知任何法,只有现前接触的那一点而已。”眼识生起时只以色为所缘而生起,以面向那个色的方式执取,所以说“表现为面向色的状态”。为了说明:对于紧接着自己之后生起的无色法,它通过给予无间、等无间、无有、离去等缘,作为生起的机会来帮助,就像依止和所缘法作为邻近的因一样,所以说“以离去缘为色的唯作意界的足处”。耳识等也应按同样的道理理解。因为唯作意界在所缘上有差别,自性不同,所以说“唯作意界等”。眼识等所取的色等所缘,紧接着无间断地被领受、执取,所以说“以领受色等为作用”。它以这样的领受状态呈现,所以以这样的状态为表现。巴利
Rūpamattārammaṇarasanti rūpāyatanamattasseva ārammaṇakaraṇarasaṃ. Matta-saddena yathā ārammaṇantaraṃ nivatteti, evaṃ rūpāyatanepi labbhamāne ekacce visese nivatteti. Na hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ vaṇṇamattato aññaṃ kiñci nīlādivisesaṃ tattha gahetuṃ sakkoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kiñci dhammaṃ paṭivijānāti aññatra abhinipātamattā’’ti. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ rūpārammaṇe eva uppajjanato tadabhimukhabhāvena gaṇhātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāna’’nti. Attano anantaraṃ uppajjamānānaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ samanantaravigatā arūpadhammā pavattiokāsadānena anantarasamanantaranatthivigatapaccayehi upakārakā, nissayārammaṇā dhammā viya āsannakāraṇāti dassento āha ‘‘rūpārammaṇāya kiriyāmanodhātuyā apagamapadaṭṭhāna’’nti. Sotaviññāṇādīsupi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Kiriyāmanodhātuyā ārammaṇabhedato bhinnasabhāvattā āha ‘‘kiriyāmanodhātūna’’nti. Cakkhuviññāṇādīhi gahitaṃ rūpādiārammaṇaṃ tadanantarameva aparipatantaṃ katvā sampaṭicchantaṃ gaṇhantaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpādisampaṭicchanarasa’’nti. Tathābhāvena sampaṭicchanabhāvena paccupaṭṭhātīti tathābhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.
在六种所缘里,有时因为生盲等人只有五种所缘,有时甚至比五种更少;在梵天界则只有两种识知的自性,但也被说成具有“识知六种所缘”的特相,因为不超出其自性,或者因为其余所缘都已被含摄在这六种所缘之中。“审查等之味”:是指随情况而有的审查、彼所缘等作用,意思是审查、彼所缘、结生、有分、死亡等作用。“以心所依处为足处”:这是为了说明这两种意识界没有固定的处所,所以说出它们固定的因。按照前面所说的方式,也应该可以说“以那那无间过去识的离去为足处”。因为无因心的特相等已经各别说明过了,由此可以知道,其余有因心的特相等也是同样的。这一点在前面已经解释过了。巴利
Chasu ārammaṇesu kadāci pañcannaṃ jaccandhādivasena tatopi ūnānaṃ, brahmaloke ca dvinnameva vijānanasabhāvāpi chaḷārammaṇavijānanalakkhaṇā vuttā taṃsabhāvānativattanato, chasveva vā itaresaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ antogadhattā. Santīraṇādirasāti yathāsambhavaṃ santīraṇatadārammaṇādikiccā, santīraṇatadārammaṇapaṭisandhibhavaṅgacutikiccāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Hadayavatthupadaṭṭhānā’’ti idaṃ imāsaṃ dvinnaṃ manoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ anibaddhaṭṭhānatāya nibaddhakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttanayena pana ‘‘taṃtaṃanantarātītaviññāṇāpagamapadaṭṭhāna’’ntipi vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Ahetukacittānaṃ visuṃ visuṃ lakkhaṇādikassa dassitattā parisesato sahetukacittānaṃ ekasadisameva lakkhaṇādikanti viññāyati. Taṃ pana heṭṭhā vibhāvitameva.
现在,为了说明这些心依照所缘等而有的分类,所以说了“其中,第一”等话。“纯粹是可爱所缘”的意思是,纯粹只以极可爱的所缘为对象,也就是最可爱的所缘。“在五处”是指:在有因异熟心所说的四处之外,再加上领受和推度之间那个称为中间的推度处,一共五处;也可以说,就是在五种作用中。对于喜俱结生的人,在忧俱速行结束时,如果没有彼所缘生起,就会缘着过去曾经熟悉过的任何一种微小所缘,生起舍俱推度心,这是被认可的;但这样生起只是偶尔才有,所以按照大多数情况,不立六处,只说五处。或者应当这样理解:这种心生起时,就是在彼所缘处生起的,因此以这一点为根据,那个处也被包含在内了。由于招感无眼的业所生,生来就瞎,叫生盲。虽然在结生那一刹那,卵生和胎生的一切众生都没有眼,若按有没有眼来讨论盲与不盲也可以成立;但即使在眼应当生起的时候,因为障碍眼根的业——不论是结生业还是别的业——已经破坏了它的功能,使眼不能被执取,所以这个众生被称为“生盲”。或者,“生盲”的意思是出生时就是盲的,也就是在母胎里就已经盲了然后出生。由此可以成立:二因者和三因者在母胎中时,眼根也不会损坏。对生聋等也应照相应情况这样说。“生愚”就是生来无知。虽然二因结生者在结生时也是无知的,但他在生命过程中智慧还可能生起;按前面所说的道理,因为大多数情况下在生命过程中智慧也不生起,所以应知为生愚。“生狂”是指由饮酒等导致狂乱的业所熏习、由这种业执取结生者。“黄门”是指由邪淫等业所熏习、由这种业执取结生者。它有五种:被洒黄门、嫉妒黄门、半月黄门、手术黄门、无性黄门。这里因为手术黄门即使有因也可能存在,而无性者又单独列出,所以指的是三种黄门。“等”字包括生哑、生跛、生痴等。有人说:“有些无因结生者虽然诸根具足,但也有少许思辨能力,所以这类人也应当用‘等’字包含进去。”在这里,不应理解为唯有生盲等者是以这个心结生;而应理解为,生盲等者是以这个心结生。巴利
Idāni imāsaṃ ārammaṇādito bhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha paṭhamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekantamiṭṭhārammaṇeti ekanteneva iṭṭhārammaṇe, atiiṭṭhārammaṇeti attho. Pañcasu ṭhānesūti sahetukavipākānaṃ vuttesu catūsu, sampaṭicchanavoṭṭhabbanānaṃ antarāḷasaṅkhātasantīraṇaṭṭhāne cāti pañcasu ṭhānesu, pañcasu kiccesūti vā attho. Kiñcāpi somanassapaṭisandhikassa domanassajavanāvasāne tadārammaṇasambhave asati yaṃ kiñci paricitapubbaṃ parittārammaṇamārabbha upekkhāsahagatasantīraṇamuppajjatīti icchitaṃ, tathā pana uppajjamānassa kadāciyeva sambhavato yebhuyyappavattiṃ gahetvā cha ṭhānāni avatvā pañceva vuttāni. Atha vā taṃ uppajjamānaṃ tadārammaṇaṭṭhāneyeva nibbattatīti taṃvaseneva tassāpi ṭhānaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Acakkhusaṃvattanikakammanibbattatāya jātiyā andho jaccandho. Kiñcāpi hi jātikkhaṇe aṇḍajajalābujānaṃ sabbesampi cakkhu natthi, yassa bhāvābhāvato andhānandhavicāraṇā bhaveyya, tathāpi cakkhussa uppajjamānārahakālepi cakkhuvipattivibandhakena kammunā paṭihatasāmatthiyena paṭisandhidāyakena itarenāpi vā kammena tassa anupādiyamānattā satto ‘‘jaccandho’’ti vuccati. Atha vā jaccandhoti pasūtiyaṃyeva andho, mātukucchiyaṃyeva andho hutvā nikkhantoti attho. Tena duhetukatihetukānaṃ mātukucchigatakālepi cakkhussa avipajjanaṃ siddhaṃ hoti, evaṃ jātibadhirādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Jaccajaḷoti jātiyā aññāṇako . Kiñcāpi duhetukapaṭisandhikopi jātiyaṃ aññāṇako, tassa pana pavattiyaṃ paññā sambhavatīti vuttanayena yebhuyyato pavattiyampi paññāyāsambhavato jaccajaḷo veditabbo. Jaccummattako surāmerayapānādiummattakabhāvasaṃvattanikakammaparibhāvitena kammena gahitapaṭisandhiko. Paṇḍakoti paradāragamanādikammaparibhāvitena kammunā gahitapaṭisandhiko. So pañcavidho āsittapaṇḍako usūyapaṇḍako pakkhapaṇḍako opakkamikapaṇḍako napuṃsakapaṇḍakoti. Idha pana opakkamikapaṇḍakassa sahetukassāpi bhāvato, napuṃsakassa ca visuṃ gahaṇato tayo paṇḍakā adhippetā. Ādi-saddena jātimūgajātipaṅgulamammanādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Keci pana ‘‘ekacce ahetukapaṭisandhikā avikalindriyā hutvā thokaṃ vicāraṇapakatikāpi honti, tasmā tādisānampi idha ādi-saddena saṅgaho’’ti vadanti. Ettha ca jaccandhādīnameva ayaṃ paṭisandhīti na gahetabbā. Jaccandhādayo pana iminā paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantīti gahetabbaṃ.
43 “三因殊胜福”,是指三因者当中殊胜的福。而二因业,无论如何都不可能产生十六种异熟,为了排除这种可能,所以对思不加区分地说成“三因殊胜福”。巴利
43.Tihetukapuññassāti tihetukassapi ukkaṭṭhapuññassa. Duhetukammassa pana sabbathāpi soḷasannaṃ vipākānaṃ asambhavato tappaṭikkhepaparattā cetanāya ‘‘tihetukapuññassā’’ti avisesato vuttaṃ.
色界与无色界果报的解说巴利
Rūpāvacarārūpāvacaravipākavaṇṇanā
广大异熟心的禅支缺失,只是按照各自相应的善心生起的方式而说,并不是因为修习上的差别,所以那些所断的禅支并没有被列出。“于生有”,意思是在生有之中。巴利
Mahaggatavipākānaṃ taṃtaṃkusalāgamanavaseneva jhānaṅgahāni, na pana bhāvanāvisesenāti tesaṃ pahānaṅgāni anuddhaṭāni. Upapattiyanti upapattibhave.
说的是“无色界异熟心”。这就是(前后文的)连接关系。巴利
Arūpāvacaravipākacittāni vuccantīti sambandho.
44 把“随顺善而作”理解为:做成与善相应、和善相似。有人解释说,它的意思是:欲界异熟即使和善不相似,也照样被分别说明;但这里不是那样做,而是把它做成和善相似。不过,在义注里,则是针对“在善之后,分别说明广大异熟”的巴利经文,才说“随顺善而作、已分别说明”。因为在巴利经文里——巴利
44.Kusalānugataṃ katvāti kusalānurūpaṃ kusalasadisaṃ katvā. Yathā kāmāvacaravipākaṃ kusalato visadisampi katvā vibhattaṃ, evamakatvā kusalasadisameva katvāti atthaṃ vadanti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana kusalānantaraṃ katvā mahaggatavipākānaṃ bhājitapāḷiṃ sandhāya ‘‘kusalānugataṃ katvā bhājita’’nti vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyañhi –
哪些法是无记?当欲界善业已作、已积集,其异熟眼识生起时……等等。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā abyākatā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacarassa kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā vipākaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 431) –
把欲界异熟分别讲完之后,接着要分别讲广大异熟时——巴利
Kāmāvacaravipākaṃ vibhajitvā mahaggatavipākaṃ vibhajantena –
哪些法是无记的?当有人为了投生色界而修习道,确实远离诸欲……成就初禅而住于地遍,那时有触……有不动摇,这些法是善的;正是由于那已作、已积集的色界善业,其异熟确实远离诸欲……成就初禅而住于地遍……这些法是无记的。巴利
‘‘Katame dhammā abyākatā? Yasmiṃ samaye rūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti, vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati pathavīkasiṇaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti…pe… avikkhepo hoti, ime dhammā kusalā, tasseva rūpāvacarassa kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā vipākaṃ vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati pathavīkasiṇaṃ…pe… ime dhammā abyākatā’’ti (dha. sa. 498).
像这样先标举出善法之后,紧接着就分析了广大异熟。因此,并不像分析欲界异熟那样不加区分,而是紧接在善法之后来分析它。为了说明这个意思,注疏里说“随顺善法而作”。而且这位阿阇梨以遮遣的方式,为了表达接下来要说的特殊义理,在那里正是按照所说的方式提出了质难。因为这样一来,“果报就在善法之后立刻生起”这一说明就非常合理了——这就是我们阿阇梨在此处的思路。巴利
Evaṃ kusalaṃ uddisitvā tadanantaraṃ katvā mahaggataṃ vipākaṃ vibhattaṃ, tasmā yathā kāmāvacaravipākaṃ, evaṃ avibhajitvā idaṃ kusalānantaraṃ katvā vibhattanti imamatthaṃ jotetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kusalānugataṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imināpi ca ācariyena parihāramukhena vakkhamānaatthavisesavacanicchāya tattha vuttanayeneva codanā katā. Evañhi sati kusalānantaraṃyeva phalaṃ uppajjatīti ñāpanaṃ suṭṭhūpapannaṃ hotīti ayamettha amhākaṃ ācariyassa maggo.
“广大”是指广大的异熟,因为在这里它已经被证得了。“欲界……等等……由于”的意思是:欲界的善业由于能产生三因善业的二因与无因异熟,以及二因善业的无因异熟,所以它的果报与因并不相同;但这个广大善业不是这样,它一向只产生相似的异熟,所以果报是相同的。这就是其中的含义。这里虽然没有明说“善”,但因为已经用“欲界福”来作譬喻,所譬喻的广大的善法性质也就能够被领会了。为什么这个广大善业有相似的果报,而不像欲界善业那样也有不相似的果报呢?回答说:造作欲界福业的时候,是依止于色爱等各种不同所依的欲爱而累积的,所以依止于它的善业,也随顺它而产生种种不同所依的果报。而造作广大善业的时候,则是纯粹依于单一所依的有爱而累积,所以随顺于它,不产生种种不同所依,只产生单一所依的果报。巴利
Mahaggatanti mahaggatavipākaṃ. Tañhi idha adhigataṃ. Kāmā…pe… yatoti yasmā kāmāvacarakusalaṃ asamānaphalaṃ hoti tihetukassa duhetukāhetukavipākānaṃ, duhetukassa ca ahetukavipākānampi jananato, na evamidaṃ, idaṃ pana ekanteneva sadisavipākajananato samānaphalameva, tasmāti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘kusala’’nti avuttepi kāmāvacarapuññaṃvāti upamitattā upameyyassapi kusalabhāvo viññāyati. Kasmā panetaṃ sadisavipākaṃ, na kāmāvacaraṃ viya visadisavipākampīti? Vuccate – kāmāvacarapuññañhi ācinanto rūpataṇhādinānāvatthukakāmataṇhūpanissayato ācinati, tasmā tadūpanissayakusalaṃ tadanurūpato nānāvatthukaṃ vipākaṃ janeti. Mahaggataṃ pana ācinanto ekavatthukāyeva bhavataṇhāya vasena ācinatīti tadanurūpato taṃ nānāvatthuṃ ajanetvā ekavatthumeva janetīti.
45-6 “完全地”是从法、所缘和行道等方面来说的。就像触等这些法在善心里能得到,在异熟心里也能得到;善心在什么所缘上生起,这个异熟心也在同一个所缘上生起。善心的行道等怎样,这个异熟心的行道等也怎样。当然,任何人的影子都跟各自的事物相似,但大善果报应该用大的比喻来说明,所以说了“如象等”这样的话。在后后的一生中存在的受,就叫“后后受”。如果没有后后受,那这个果报又怎么能生起呢?因此说了“于禅那未退失者”等话。巴利
45-6.Sabbathāti dhammato ārammaṇato paṭipadādito ca. Tathā hi ye phassādayo kusale ca labbhanti, te vipākepi labbhanti, yasmiñca ārammaṇe kusalaṃ pavattati, tattheva idaṃ vipākampi. Yāva paṭipadādayo kusalassa labbhanti, tāva imassa vipākassapīti. Kāmaṃ yassa kassaci chāyā taṃtaṃvatthusadisāva, mahantassa pana kusalavipākassa mahantāhiyeva upamāhi bhavitabbanti ‘‘gajādīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Apare apare attabhāve bhavaṃ vedanamassāti aparāpariyavedanaṃ. Yadi aparāpariyavedanaṃ na hoti, kathañcarahi imassa phaluppattīti āha ‘‘jhānā aparihīnassā’’tiādi.
47 “善之后”是指善有的之后。因为那个善业是在哪一个有中造作的,这里就用“善”这个词来指代它,这是由于业并不能立刻产生果报。它不像出世间善那样能立刻产生果报,而是像某些欲界善业那样,并非在后后受报;即使存在许多欲界业,它也会像大洪水淹没少量水一样,以自己的果报之力,决定性地只在紧接着的有中产生果报。难道不是连没有退失禅那的人,也会因为欲贪之力而在欲有中结生吗?据说,大梵天提萨为了投生到上梵天界而修习道,应比丘们请求,从那里死后,在目犍连婆罗门家中结生,这又怎么说呢?因为欲贪之力,禅那退失了,所以说他是从退失禅那的状态中产生的。另有一些老师则说:“应当审察,在无盖障的状态下,欲贪是否导致禅那退失,然后再取此说。”他们还这样说:“当没有能障碍广大业果报的微小业存在时,依据‘诸比丘,持戒者之心愿因清净而成就’这句话,在欲有中的心愿会障碍广大业的果报,而为微小业的果报提供机会。”这种说法是合理的。这是为了说明这个道理,这就是它们的关联。巴利
47.Kusalānantaranti kusalabhavānantaraṃ. Yasmiñhi bhave taṃ kusalaṃ kataṃ, so idha kusala-saddena upacārato gahito kammānantaraṃyeva phalassa asambhavato. Na hi taṃ lokuttarakusalaṃ viya anantaraphalanipphādakaṃ, atha kho ekaccakāmāvacarakusalaṃ viya aparāpariyavedanaṃ ahutvā satipi anekeyeva kāmāvacarakamme mahogho viya parittaṃ udakaṃ tamajjhottharitvā attanoyeva vipākadānena ekantena anantarabhaveyeva phalaṃ nibbatteti. Nanu ca aparihīnajjhānasseva kassaci nikantivasena kāmabhave paṭisandhi hoti. Tathā hi tissamahābrahmā uparibrahmalokūpapattiyā bhāvitamaggo bhikkhūhi yācito tato cavitvā moggalibrāhmaṇassa gehe paṭisandhiṃ aggahesīti vuttanti taṃ kathanti? Nikantibaleneva jhānaṃ parihāyatīti tato parihīnajjhāno nibbattatīti vadanti. Apare pana ācariyā ‘‘anīvaraṇāvatthāya nikantiyā jhānassa parihāni vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbā’’ti vatvā ‘‘satipi mahaggatakammuno vipākaṃ paṭibāhanasamatthasseva parittakammassa abhāve ‘ijjhati, bhikkhave, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’ti (a. ni. 8.35) vacanato kāmabhave cetopaṇidhi mahaggatakammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā parittakammuno vipākassa okāsaṃ karotī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ. Etassāti imassatthassa ñāpanatthanti sambandho.
48-9 48-9. 这样,先笼统地说明了它与善的相似之处,现在为了显示其中的差别,所以说“行道次第”等。就像生起苦行道、迟通达的禅那之后,反复入定的人,那禅那就成了那样的行道;同样,在那些没有退失的禅那中,各自的果报生起时,也应当成为各自的行道。不过,欲增上等状态,是在那一刹那存在的欲等作为增上缘时才有的,并不是依照来由而有的。因为同一个禅那在不同刹那可以有不同的增上,所以果报并不是依照来由而取得欲增上等性质。因此说“没有增上者”。正因为没有它们,从自性上说,那禅那的低下等性质就不可能存在,所以那也是依照禅那的来由而说的。巴利
48-9. Evaṃ avisesena kusalasadisataṃ atidisitvā idāni visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭipadākkamocevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā hi dukkhapaṭipadaṃ dandhābhiññaṃ jhānaṃ uppādetvā punappunaṃ samāpajjantassa taṃ jhānaṃ taṃpaṭipadameva hoti, evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ aparihīne tassa tassa vipāko nibbattamāno taṃtaṃpaṭipadova bhavituṃ arahati. Chandādhipateyyādibhāvo pana tasmiṃ khaṇe vijjamānānaṃ chandādīnaṃ adhipatipaccayabhāvena hoti, na āgamanavasena. Tathā hi ekameva jhānaṃ nānakkhaṇesu nānādhipateyyaṃ hoti, tasmā vipākassa āgamanavasena chandādhipateyyāditā na gahitā. Tenāha ‘‘abhāvodhipatīna’’nti. Tadabhāvatova sarasato tassa hīnāditā na sambhavatīti sāpi jhānāgamanatova vuttā.
出世间果报的注释巴利
Lokuttaravipākavaṇṇanā
果心不像道心那样,不会因为与道结合而有分类,所以不说“与四道结合”,而说“与四道相应之心的果故”;意思是:因为是与四圣道相应的善心的果,所以是与四种沙门果相应的心。入流道的果心,就是入流道果心。其余也这样类推。在道心路中,果等至虽然可以生起两次、三次乃至无数次,但因为它只在两种情况中生起,所以只有两种。因此说“依道心路与果等至而转起,故为两种”。巴利
Maggacittassa viya phalacittassa maggayogato bhedābhāvena ‘‘catumaggayogato’’ti avatvā ‘‘catumaggasampayuttacittaphalattā’’ti vuttaṃ, catūhi ariyamaggehi sampayuttakusalacittassa phalattā catubbidhasāmaññaphalasampayuttacittabhāvatoti attho. Sotāpattimaggassa phalaṃ cittaṃ sotāpattimaggaphalacittaṃ. Evaṃ sesesu. Maggavīthiyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ, tikkhattuṃ vā phalasamāpattiyā aparicchinnaparimāṇaṃ pavattamānampi dvīsveva ṭhānesu pavattiyā duvidhameva hotīti āha ‘‘maggavīthiphalasamāpattivasena pavattito duvidha’’nti.
50-1 在道之后,果是依道的来由而获得名称的,这是本意。因为道依来由而得到“空”这个名字,又依有德所缘而得到“无相、无愿”的名字,所以也给予果这三种名称。同样地,无愿道依来由而有,又依有德所缘而为无相、空、无愿之名,所以也给予果这三种名称。这样,在阿毗达摩中,每一果各说了三种名称。难道在阿毗达摩中不是说“依有德所缘,名称非所意许”吗?确实说了,但那是就名称的获得而言,不是就名称的给予而言。因为在那里,由于没有安立之事,所以如此非所意许,并非不可得。而在这里,每一果得三种名称,因无安立之用,所以意许依有德所缘而给予所得的名称,因此给予三种名称。这一点必须如此接受,否则,观照也不会给予由观照所得名称之道那个名称。于后分,指于后时。于转起果中,指于依等至而应体验的果中。为了遮止“于转起果中,依道之来由”之说,而说“唯依观照”等。因为转起果唯依各别观照而生起,所以它依此而得名。若如此,岂非如道一样,不得无相之名?不然,正如道后之果以及转起果等至,依道之来由而有禅那行道之别,同样也得无相之名。巴利
50-1.Maggassānantare phale labbhanti maggāgamanatoti adhippāyo. Maggo hi āgamanato ‘‘suññato’’ti laddhanāmo saguṇālambaṇavasena animittaappaṇihitanāmampi labhatīti phalassa nāmattayampi deti, tathā āgamanato appaṇihito maggo saguṇārammaṇavasena animittasuññataappaṇihitanāmakoti phalassa nāmattayampi deti. Evañca katvā abhidhamme ekekassa phalassa tīṇi tīṇi nāmāni vuttāni. Nanu ca abhidhamme ‘‘saguṇārammaṇato nāmaṃ anadhippeta’’nti vuttaṃ? Saccaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ pana nāmalābhaṃ sandhāya, na nāmadānaṃ. Tattha hi vavatthānakarattābhāvato tathā anadhippetaṃ, na alabbhanato. Idha pana ekekassa phalaṃ nāmattayampi labhatīti vavatthānappayojanābhāvato saguṇārammaṇehi laddhanāmadānassa adhippetattā tividhampi nāmaṃ deti. Ekantena cetaṃ evaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, itarathā vipassanāpi vipassato laddhanāmamaggassa taṃ na dadeyyāti. Parabhāgasminti aparabhāge. Vaḷañjanaphalesūti samāpajjanavasena anubhavitabbaphalesu. ‘‘Vaḷañjanaphalesu nā’’ti maggāgamanaṃ sandhāya paṭikkhittanti āha ‘‘vipassanāvasenevā’’tiādi. Vaḷañjanaphalañhi visuṃ vipassanāvaseneva nibbattatīti tassa taṃvasena nāmalābho. Yadi evaṃ maggassa viya animittanāmalābho na siyā? Taṃ na, yathā maggānantarassa phalassa viya vaḷañjanakaphalasamāpattiyāpi maggāgamanato ca jhānapaṭipadābhedo hoti, evaṃ animittanāmampi labbhatīti.
52-3 “有增上者”这些,理由前面已经说过。所谓“以道性”,就是以十六种行相通达四谛的道性;或者因为能断烦恼而称为行,或者因为这是希求涅槃的人应当修习的状态而称为道,所以叫道性。果……称为……:果本身虽然是果,但因为是道的果,或者因为与道相似,所以就依着道而称为“道”,比如“道支”“道所属”等说法,这就是这里的意旨。巴利
52-3.Honti sādhipatīnevāti ettha kāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Maggabhāvenāti soḷasahi ākārehi catusaccapaṭivedhakamaggabhāvena, kilesamāraṇavasena gamanasaṅkhātena, nibbānatthikehi maggitabbabhāvasaṅkhātena vā maggabhāvena. Phalaṃ…pe… vuccatīti sayaṃ phalabhāvampi maggassa phalattā, taṃsadisatāya vā tamupādāya maggoti vuccati ‘‘maggaṅgaṃ maggapariyāpanna’’ntiādīsūti adhippāyo.
不善果报的解释巴利
Akusalavipākavaṇṇanā
就像在极可意、可意和中等所缘中,因为受有差别,善异熟意识界有两种:与喜相应的,和与舍相应的;同样,在极不可意、不可意和中等所缘中,受没有差别,所以不善异熟意识界只有一种,因此说“七种不善异熟”。因为如果那里受有差别,那么在极不可意中就应该生起与忧相应的受,而忧不可能离开嗔恨而生起。身识的苦俱,应当按与善异熟中所说相反的方式理解。在这里,不善异熟中,舍受虽然不像所生起的苦受那样极其酷烈,但由于是极端低劣之不善的异熟之故,其本质就是苦,所以是低劣的。不善异熟不可能不苦,但它呈现为舍的状态,应当看作像一个被强力压迫、无力反击的弱者,对施加于他的压迫表现出忍受的样子。这些……心:这七种是每一种不善的异熟心,而不像善异熟那样,因为三因等功德差别而有不同。即使在转起中,与掉举相应的也只有这七种异熟。那么,为什么在这里不像善异熟那样,把不善异熟也列为有因呢?因为没有因。贪等纯粹是有过失的,以不如理作意为因,所以没有异熟性;无贪等纯粹是无过失的本质,又因为与彼相距甚远,所以绝无不善异熟性。无贪等之对立者贪等不会产生它们,因此,在一切情况下,有因的转起都不可能,所以唯是无因。巴利
Yathā atiiṭṭhe iṭṭhamajjhatte ca ārammaṇe vedanābhedasambhavato kusalavipākamanoviññāṇadhātu duvidhā hoti somanassasahagatā, upekkhāsahagatāti, evaṃ atianiṭṭhe aniṭṭhamajjhatte ca ārammaṇe vedanābhedo natthīti akusalavipākamanoviññāṇadhātu ekavidhāvāti ‘‘sattākusalavipākānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sati hi tattha vedanābhede atianiṭṭhe domanassena bhavitabbaṃ, na ca paṭighena vinā domanassaṃ uppajjatīti. Kāyaviññāṇassa dukkhasahagatā kusalavipāke vuttavipariyāyena veditabbā. Ettha ca akusalavipākesu labbhamānadukkhaṃ viya nātikaṭukāpi upekkhā ekantanihīnassa akusalassa vipākabhāvato dukkhasabhāvattā hīnā eva. Na hi akusalassa vipāko adukkho hoti, upekkhābhāvo panassa balavatā bādhiyamānassa paṭipaharituṃ asakkontassa dubbalapurisassa tena kariyamānabādhassa upekkhanā viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imāni…pe… cittānīti imāni satta ekekassa akusalassa vipākacittāni, na pana kusalavipāke viya tihetukādipuññavisesena. Uddhaccasahagatassapi hi pavattiyaṃ satteva vipākā labbhanti. Kasmā panettha yathā kusalavipākaṃ sahetukampi uddhaṭaṃ, na evaṃ akusalavipākanti? Hetūnaṃ asambhavato. Lobhādīnañhi ekantasāvajjatāya ayonisomanasikārahetukānaṃ natthi vipākabhāvo, alobhādīnampi ekantamanavajjasabhāvānaṃ vā kāraṇassa tabbidūratāya nattheva akusalavipākabhāvo. Na hi alobhādīnaṃ paṭipakkhalobhādayo te abhinipphādenti, tasmā idaṃ sabbathā sahetuppavattiyā asambhavato ahetukamevāti.
在业、业相、趣相中:这里,在过去世造作、将在之后或来生受报的业,就叫作业。造业时以思心所执取的所缘,叫作业相。属于将要投生的那个存在、在地狱等中出现的火焰网等色相,叫作趣相。巴利
Kammakammanimittagatinimittesūti ettha atītabhave āyūhitaṃ aparāpariyavedanīyaṃ, upapajjavedanīyaṃ vā kammaṃ kammaṃ nāma . Kammakaraṇakāle cetanāya gahitamārammaṇaṃ kammanimittaṃ nāma. Upapajjitabbabhavapariyāpanno narakādīsu aggijālādivaṇṇo gatinimittaṃ nāma.
54 这些是不善异熟。由于已经说明了它们在不可意、不可意中舍的所缘上生起,反过来也就自然成立:善异熟在可意、可意中舍的所缘上生起,所以没有另外单独说明。与乐等三者相应,就是与乐、喜、舍相应。巴利
54.Imeti akusalavipākā. Tesaṃ aniṭṭhāniṭṭhamajjhattavisayesu pavattivacanena tabbipariyāyena kusalavipākānaṃ iṭṭhaiṭṭhamajjhattavisayesu pavatti atthato āpannāti sā visuṃ na vuttā. Sukhādittayayuttāti sukhasomanassupekkhāyuttā.
“如是”这些词,是对前面所说的那些异熟的总结。巴利
‘‘Eva’’ntiādi yathāvuttavipākānaṃ nigamanaṃ.
果报心的解说巴利
Vipākacittavaṇṇanā
55 帝释天王被称为“教诫波迦者”:因为他教诫波迦阿修罗少女们,使她们胎中的胎儿成熟,或者使她们毁灭;又或者因为他使名为“波迦”的阿修罗毁灭。被这位天王所崇敬的,就是“教诫波迦者所崇敬”。或者,他们心中教法已经成熟、圆满,所以叫“教法已成熟者”,也就是诸漏尽者;被他们所崇敬的,就是“教法已成熟者所崇敬”。巴利
55. Pākassa asurakaññānaṃ gabbhaparipākassa sāsanato vināsanato, pākasaṅkhātassa vā asurassa vināsanato pākasāsano vuccati sakko devarājā, tena pūjito pākasāsanapūjito. Pākaṃ vā paripakkaṃ sāsanametesūti pākasāsanā, khīṇāsavā, tehi pūjitoti pākasāsanapūjito.
所谓“依布施等而转”,只是从它生起的方式来说,是依布施等而转,而不是从福德行事处来说的,因为漏尽者的心相续中并没有福德行事性——这就是这里所说的意思。巴利
Dānādivasenāti pavattākāramattato dānādivasena, na pana puññakiriyavatthuvasena khīṇāsavasantānagatassa puññakiriyabhāvābhāvatoti vuttovāyamattho.
“转向”就是转向,意思是先受用、转向、改变或阻止。因为它首先受用来到面前的所缘,让眼识等路心转向来到面前的所缘,或者让心相续从先前的状态转变为另一种状态,或者不让不断转起的有分心相续继续转起,也不让来到面前的所缘去往别处,所以阻止了它们。笑由此生起,或者笑依此而生起,所以叫“笑生”,那本身就是心,所以叫“笑生心”。“确定”就是确定。那么,为什么在这里转向和确定是舍俱,而笑生是喜俱呢?回答说:首先,转向只对未曾有过的所缘生起一次,以截断相续的方式转起,或者因为有分羸弱为缘,所以完全不能领受所缘的滋味,因此在可意等一切情况下都只是舍俱。确定则与上述相反,虽然可以有感受上的差别,但因为截断了异熟相续,生起不相似的心相续,只致力于相续转变这一别别作用,就像异熟一样,不能领受所缘的滋味,所以在一切处都只是舍俱。而笑生则依相反的道理,只在已断颠倒的漏尽者相续中,于可意所缘生起,所以在一切情况下都只是喜俱。巴利
Āvajjatīti āvajjanaṃ, ābhuñjati oṇojeti pariṇāmeti vāretīti vā attho. Tañhi āpāthagataṃ ārammaṇaṃ paṭhamamābhuñjati, cakkhuviññāṇādīni vīthicittāni āpāthagatārammaṇābhimukhaṃ oṇojeti, cittasantānaṃ vā purimākārato aññathā pariṇāmeti, anuppabandhato pavattanakaṃ bhavaṅgacittasantānaṃ parato pavattituṃ adatvā āpāthagataṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ aññattha gantuṃ adatvā vāreti. Hasitaṃ uppajjati, uppādīyati vā etenāti hasituppādaṃ, tadeva cittanti hasituppādacittaṃ. Voṭṭhapetīti voṭṭhabbanaṃ. Kasmā panettha āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanāni upekkhāsahagatāni, hasituppādañca somanassasahagatanti? Vuccate – āvajjanaṃ tāva apubbārammaṇe sakideva ca pavattamānasantativicchedavasena pavattanato, dubbalabhavaṅgapaccayaṃ vā sabbathā visayarasamanubhavituṃ na sakkotīti iṭṭhādīsu sabbattha upekkhāyuttameva hoti. Voṭṭhabbanañca vuttavipariyāyena vedanābhedārahampi samānaṃ vipākappabandhaṃ vicchinditvā visadisacittappabandhassa nibbattanato santatipariṇāmaneyeva kiccantare byāvaṭattā vipākaṃ viya ārammaṇarasassāde asamatthamevāti sabbattha upekkhāsahagatameva. Hasituppādaṃ pana vuttaviparītato parihīnavipallāsānaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ santāne iṭṭhārammaṇeyeva uppajjanato sabbathā somanassasahagatamevāti.
从特相等来说,这三者当中,第一是眼识等的先行者,以了知色等为特相,以转向为作用,以那种状态为现起,以有分的断裂为近因。第二以了知六种所缘为特相,以让阿罗汉在不粗重的事物上生起笑为作用,以那种状态为现起,完全以心所依处为近因。第三也以了知六种所缘为特相,以在五门和意门中确定与转向为作用,以那种状态为现起,以无因异熟意识界和有分中任意一个的离去为近因。巴利
Lakkhaṇādito panetāsu purimaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ purecaraṃ rūpādivijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, āvajjanarasaṃ , tathābhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, bhavaṅgavicchedapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Dutiyaṃ chaḷārammaṇavijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, arahataṃ anoḷārikesu vatthūsu hasituppādarasaṃ, tathābhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ekantato hadayavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ. Tatiyampi chaḷārammaṇavijānanalakkhaṇaṃ, pañcadvāramanodvāresu voṭṭhabbanāvajjanarasaṃ, tathābhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, ahetukavipākamanoviññāṇadhātubhavaṅgānaṃ aññatarāpagamapadaṭṭhānanti.
让有分流转动:就像在让有分的相续转动一样。共通的:是有学、无学与凡夫所共通的。不共通的:只属于无学者的独特之法。因此说“漏尽者的”。在六门……诸所缘中:即在眼等六门中,在适合精勤的处所等所摄的色等六种所缘中。因为,看到适合精勤的处所后,为了现法乐住而想“我已得到这个适合的处所”并感到满足的人,在眼门以颜色为所缘;在分配物品的地方听到大声音后,想“像这样的贪欲已经被我断除”并感到满足的人,在耳门以声音为所缘;用香或花供养塔庙时,想“我确实用这样的妙香供养了世尊”并感到满足的人,在鼻门以香为所缘;与同梵行者一起分配并受用味道美好的钵食时,想“和合敬法确实已被我圆满”并感到满足的人,在舌门以味道为所缘;履行正行仪轨时,想“我正以身完成进退的仪轨”并感到满足的人,在身门以触为所缘。如此,它在五门的五种所缘中生起。巴利
Bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭayamānāti bhavaṅgasantānaṃ āvaṭṭayantī viya. Sādhāraṇāti sekkhāsekkhaputhujjanānaṃ sādhāraṇā. Asādhāraṇāti asekkhānaṃyeva āveṇikā. Tenāha ‘‘khīṇāsavassā’’ti. Chasu dvāresu…pe…ārammaṇesūti cakkhādīsu chasu dvāresu, padhānasāruppaṭṭhānādigatesu chasu rūpādiārammaṇesu. Padhānasāruppañhi ṭhānaṃ disvā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthāya ‘‘sāruppamidaṃ ṭhānaṃ mayā laddha’’nti tusantassa cakkhudvāre rūpārammaṇe, bhaṇḍabhājanaṭṭhāne mahāsaddaṃ sutvā ‘‘evarūpā loluppataṇhā me pahīnā’’ti tusantassa sotadvāre saddārammaṇe, gandhehi vā pupphehi vā cetiyapūjanakāle ‘‘evarūpena vata sugandhena bhagavantaṃ pūjemī’’ti tusantassa ghānadvāre gandhārammaṇe, rasasampannaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ sabrahmacārīhi saha bhājetvā paribhuñjanakāle ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammo vata me pūrito’’ti tusantassa jivhādvāre rasārammaṇe, ābhisamācārikavattapūraṇakāle ‘‘kāyena vattapaṭivattaṃ pūremī’’ti tusantassa kāyadvāre phoṭṭhabbārammaṇeti evaṃ pañcadvāresu pañcārammaṇesu pavattati.
不过,在意门,对于上面所说的五种现在所缘,就像《陶匠经》等(中部2.282等)里那样,以及对于以宿住智已完全了知的过去所缘,就像“将有一位名叫阿提萨拉的独觉佛”(法句经注1.16提婆达多事)等所提到的场合那样,还有对于以未来分智已确定的未来所缘——如此,应当知道,世尊是在这六种所缘上生起微笑的。难道不是说,在讲了对于过去等所缘无障碍的无碍智之后,由于“具足这三种法的佛陀、世尊,一切身业都以智为先导、以智为随转”这句话,这种没有考察慧的情况怎么能与世尊的生起相应呢?即使是由令笑生起的心在运转,世尊的微笑造作,也因为随顺宿住智、未来分智和一切知智,所以确实是以智为随转的。既然是这样以智为随转,就没有任何与圣典相违的地方。正因如此,注释书里说:“此心是在那些智的惯行终了时生起的。”这也必定应当这样接受,否则,其他能引发表色的无因心在世尊身上生起也就不合理了。因为,能引发表色的心,并不妨碍由它所生起的表色成为身业等。因此,应当知道在五门,此心只是生起喜悦,而不是生起笑,因为五门心不能引发表色。而在意门,则是生起笑。正因如此,注释书在五门只说“成为喜悦者”(法集论注568),在意门则说“笑着”。不过这里说“有令笑生起的作用”,应当知道这是就五门中令喜悦生起的心也有成为意门中令笑生起的助缘这一点来说的。所谓“有令笑生起的作用”,就是令笑生起的作用。正因如此,它被称为“令笑生起”,而不是因为没有其他令笑生起的心。正如后文将说:“从善的四种”等等。巴利
Manodvāre pana yathāvuttesveva pañcasu paccuppannārammaṇesu ghaṭikārasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 2.282 ādayo) viya bhagavato pubbenivāsañāṇena pariññāte atītārammaṇe, ‘‘aṭṭhissaro nāma paccekabuddho bhavissatī’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.16 devadattavatthu) āgataṭṭhānādīsu viya anāgataṃsañāṇena paricchinne anāgatārammaṇe cāti evaṃ chasvevārammaṇesu hasitaṃ uppādetīti veditabbaṃ. Nanu ca atītaṃsādīsu appaṭihatādīsu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘imehi tīhi dhammehi samannāgatassa buddhassa bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivatta’’nti vacanato vicāraṇapaññārahitāya etāya kathaṃ bhagavato uppatti yujjeyyāti? Hasituppādacittena pavattiyamānampi bhagavato sitakaraṇaṃ pubbenivāsaanāgataṃsasabbaññutaññāṇānaṃ anuvattakattā ñāṇānuparivattiyeva, evaṃ pana ñāṇānuparivattibhāve sati na koci pāḷivirodho. Evañca katvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ ciṇṇapariyante idaṃ cittaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avassañcetaṃ evaṃ icchitabbaṃ, itarathā aññassāpi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakassa ahetukacittassa bhagavato uppatti na yujjeyya. Na hi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakassa taṃsamuṭṭhitāya viññattiyā kāyakammādibhāvaṃ āpajjanabhāvo vibandhatīti. Evañca katvā pañcadvāre iminā cittena somanassuppādanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na hāsuppādanaṃ pañcadvārikacittānaṃ aviññattijanakattā. Manodvāre pana hāsuppādanaṃ. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pañcadvāre ‘‘somanassito hotī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 568) ettakameva vuttaṃ, manodvāre ca ‘‘hāsayamāna’’nti. Idha pana ‘‘hasituppādakiccā’’ti avisesavacanaṃ pañcadvāre somanassakaraṇavasena pavattassapi manodvāre hāsajananassa paccayabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Hasituppādakiccāti hasitasseva uppādanakiccā. Teneva hi taṃ ‘‘hasituppāda’’nti vuccati, na pana aññesaṃ hasituppādacittānaṃ abhāvato. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘kusalato catūhī’’tiādi.
六种不共智:意乐与随眠智、根上下智、双神变智、大悲定智、一切知智、无障智。这六种智是独觉佛等所不共有的。难道一切知智不就是无障智吗?不然的话,一切知智和无障智就会变成不是一切知、有障碍的智了。因为,如果有一种不同于一切知智的无障智,那么由于它(一切知智)有障碍,而在有障碍的境界中无法通达自性,一切知性就成立不了;再说,无障智不以一切法为所缘,那么在它不运作的地方就有障碍存在,这样无障性也成立不了。这是对的。那唯一的智,因为以无余的有为法、无为法和假名法为所缘,所以是一切知智;而在那里没有障碍,所以依无滞碍门,称为无障智。这样,为了显示依所缘和运作的不同而对他者不共的状态,就说成两种。正如所说:巴利
Cha asādhāraṇañāṇānīti āsayānusayañāṇaṃ, indriyaparopariyañāṇaṃ, yamakapāṭihāriyañāṇaṃ, mahākaruṇāsamāpattiñāṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, anāvaraṇañāṇanti imāni cha paccekabuddhādīhi asādhāraṇāni ñāṇāni. Nanu ca sabbaññutaññāṇameva anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, itarathā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇānaṃ asabbaññutasāvaraṇañāṇatā ca āpajjeyya, tathā hi yadi sabbaññutaññāṇato aññamanāvaraṇañāṇaṃ siyā, tassa sāvaraṇattā sāvaraṇe ca visaye sabhāvapaṭivedhābhāvato sabbaññubhāvaṃ na sijjheyya, anāvaraṇañāṇassa ca asabbadhammārammaṇabhāvena yattha taṃ na pavattati, tatthāvaraṇasambhavato anāvaraṇabhāvopi na siyāti? Saccametaṃ, ekameva taṃ ñāṇaṃ anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammavisayattā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha ca āvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgavāramupādāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti evaṃ visayapavattibhedena aññehi asādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ dvedhā vuttanti. Yathāha –
了知一切有为与无为、毫无遗漏,这就是一切知智;在那里面没有任何障碍,就是无障智。巴利
‘‘Sabbaṃ saṅkhatamasaṅkhataṃ anavasesaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.119).
在这里站住,是指站在那个被称为“笑之生起”的心生起的地方。应当把握,是指应当辨别之后再去把握。虽然色界唯作心的禅支舍断,就像在异熟心里那样,是依等流而来、并非真实存在,也像在善心里那样,只是依修习的差别而显现为生起的方式而已;但是,初禅因为没有舍断支存在的缘故,所以只依一支来说明,对其余诸禅则没有说舍断支,而在这些禅那中只显示了相应支。巴利
Idha ṭhatvāti hasitassa uppādanato hasitassa uppādananti vuttacittassa āgataṭṭhāne ṭhatvā. Pariggaṇhitabbānīti paricchinditvā gaṇhitabbāni. Kiñcāpi rūpāvacarakiriyānaṃ jhānaṅgappahānaṃ vipāke viya āgamanato ahutvā kusale viya bhāvanāvisesena pavattākāramattaṃva hoti, paṭhamajjhānassa pana pahānaṅgasambhavābhāvato ekassa vaseneva niddisituṃ sesānampi pahānaṅgaṃ avatvā sampayogaṅgameva tesu dassitanti.
57 因为除了依修习而现起的行相本身之外,并没有应当通过修习来完成的舍断盖等作用,所以不能直接就叫作“修习”;因此才取了“依修习的方式而现起的”这一说法,也就是把“方式”提出来说了。巴利
57. Yasmā pana bhāvanāvasena pavattākāramattaṃ vinā bhāvanāya kātabbassa nīvaraṇappahānādikiccassa abhāvato ujukaṃ bhāvanā nāma na hoti, tasmā ‘‘bhāvanākāravasappavattānī’’ti ākāra-ggahaṇaṃ katanti.
58-9 “那个”指的是前面所说的色界与无色界的等至。关于“已入定者,若有所作”这一句:虽然同一个等至不可能被再次进入,因为已灭去的不能再现起;但它是和已获得该等至的人想要入定的意愿一起才得以进入的。再者,因为仅仅获得初禅等之后,不可能进入第二禅等;因为那是像先前已证得的等至那样再次进入,所以此处所说的等至,就等同于凡夫时期所生起的等至。巴利
58-9.Nanti taṃ yathāvuttarūpārūpasamāpattiṃ. Samāpannā sace kriyāti ettha kiñcāpi sā eva samāpatti samāpajjituṃ na sakkā, niruddhānaṃ anuppannato, paṭiladdhasamāpattikasseva samāpajjitukāmatāya saddhiṃyeva samāpajjanato, paṭhamajjhānādikameva paṭilabhitvā dutiyajjhānādikaṃ samāpajjituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvato ca, pubbe paṭiladdhasamāpattisadisaṃ puna samāpajjanato puthujjanakālasmiṃ abhinibbattitasamāpattisadisā ettha sā eva tathā vuttā.
61 61. “只有一个心刹那”是指它只在一个心刹那中生起。如果它一再地生起,那么对阿罗汉来说,生起时就应当被承认为唯作心了。然而它只生起一次,因为通达四圣谛的作用一次就已完成,离开这个作用,它便不可得。因此说:“不会两次到达彼岸。”(《经集》719)所以,不存在出世间的唯作心,这就是此处的要义。巴利
61.Ekacittakkhaṇattāti ekacittakkhaṇeyeva pavattanato. Yadi hi so punappunaṃ uppajjeyya, tadāssa arahato uppattiyā kiriyabhāvo icchitabbo siyā. Sakiṃyeva pana pavattati catusaccapaṭivedhakiccassa ekavāreneva pariniṭṭhānato, takkiccena ca vinā tassa anupalabbhanīyattā. Tenāha – ‘‘na pāraṃ diguṇaṃ yantī’’ti (su. ni. 719), tasmā natthi lokuttaraṃ kiriyacittanti ayamettha adhippāyo.
62 62. “唯作……乃至……解说者”:如果比丘通过身和语做了不该做的事而犯戒,那些罪就是“作罪”;如果通过身和语该做的事没有做而犯戒,那些罪就是“不作罪”。“作与不作”就是作罪和不作罪;这些作与不作又是应当犯的罪,所以叫“作不作罪”;他解说它们的分别,就是“唯作……乃至……解说者”。另一种说法:属于唯作禅那的定是“作定”,属于善的定是“不作定”;他解说它们的分别,就是“唯作……乃至……解说者”。“那作与不作之心”是关联句。因为战胜了五种魔,所以是胜者。“利与不利”是指有意义和无意义。那位胜者就是“他”。“乐于作与不作”:热衷于为一切众生做有利的事,不做不利的事。另一种说法:因为决定带来可爱的果报,所以“利”是善法的代名词;因为与它相反,所以“不利”是不善法的代名词。按照顺序,他乐于对它们的作与不作,就是“乐于利与不利……乃至……”。另一种说法:“利与不利”就是善与不善;他想对它们只作“作与不作”、不产生果报,就是“乐于利与不利……乃至……”。另一种说法:对于有利和不利的众生,乐于、欢喜于亲自作与不作各自应做的事,即在此世和来世成办各自的作用,就是“乐于利与不利……乃至……”。巴利
62.Kriyā…pe… desakoti yā āpattiyo kāyavācāhi akātabbaṃ katvā āpajjati, tā kiriyā, yā pana āpattiyo kāyavācāhi kātabbaṃ akaronto āpajjati, tā akiriyā, kiriyā ca akiriyā cāti kiriyākiriyā, kiriyākiriyā ca tā āpajjitabbato āpattiyo cāti kiriyākiriyāpattiyo, tāsaṃ vibhāgaṃ desetīti kiriyā…pe… desako. Atha vā kiriyājhānabhūtā samāpattiyo kiriyāpattiyo, kusalabhūtā pana samāpattiyo akiriyāpattiyo, tāsaṃ vibhāgaṃ desetīti kriyā…pe… desako. Yaṃ kiriyākiriyaṃ cittanti sambandho. Pañcannaṃ mārānaṃ jitattā jino. Hitāhitānanti atthānatthānaṃ. Sāti so jino. Kriyākriyāratoti sabbasattānaṃ hitassa karaṇe, ahitassa ca akaraṇe nirato. Atha vā ekantamiṭṭhavipākattā hitāti kusalānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Tappaṭipakkhattā ahitāti akusalānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathākkamaṃ tesaṃ kiriyāyaṃ, akiriyāyañca ratoti hitāhitānaṃ…pe… rato. Atha vā hitāhitāti kusalākusalā eva, tesaṃ kiriyākiriyāmattamavipākabhāvaṃ kātuṃ icchatīti hitāhitānaṃ…pe… rato. Atha vā hitāhitānaṃ puggalānaṃ sakiriyākiriyāya attano attano kiccassa idhalokaparalokanipphādanassa karaṇe rato abhiratoti hitāhitānaṃ…pe… rato.
64-6 把一切出世间心算作八种之后,所说的八十九种心生起,这些心是我已经指明的——这就是它们之间的关联。pāṭavaṃ atthenti 是渴望精通的意思;或者,以“精通”为所求之义的人,就是 pāṭavatthino。应受持,意思是应当通过听闻和提问来受持;而说“应反复思惟”,是为了表明不应只停留在受持上——因为仅仅靠受持,在这里不可能完全确定下来,这是其意趣。阿毗达摩大海洋,指以《法集论》等七部论典构成的阿毗达摩藏大海洋,或者指以蕴、处等安立的胜义大海洋。渡越,指以通达义理而越过,或者指以闻所成智为基础的修所成智而深入。此世,指现在这一生。彼世,指未来一生。渡越,就是超越。在这里的世间,通过断除欲贪而渡越此世;在未来,通过以灭尽业的智慧摧毁能导致再生的业而渡越彼世;以无执取般涅槃而般涅槃,这就是其含义。巴利
64-6. Sabbe lokuttare aṭṭha katvā ye ekūnanavuti cittuppādā vuttā, tāni cittāni mayā niddiṭṭhānīti sambandho. Pāṭavaṃ atthenti patthenti, pāṭavasaṅkhāto vā attho etesanti pāṭavatthino. Uggahetabboti savanapaṭipucchāvasena uggahitabbo, uggaṇhitvā pana na kevalaṃ uggahaṇamatteyeva ṭhātabbanti dassento āha ‘‘cintetabbo punappuna’’nti, na hi sakkā uggahaṇamattenevettha sabbathā sanniṭṭhānaṃ gantunti adhippāyo. Abhidhammamahodadhinti dhammasaṅgaṇīādisattappakaraṇavasena ṭhitamabhidhammapiṭakamahaṇṇavaṃ, khandhāyatanādivasena ṭhitaṃ paramatthamahaṇṇavaṃ vā. Tarantīti atthaggahaṇavasena uttaranti, sutamayañāṇamūlakena vā bhāvanāñāṇena otarantīti attho. Imaṃ lokanti paccuppannabhavaṃ. Paraṃ lokanti anāgatabhavaṃ. Tarantīti atikkamanti. Idha lokasmiñhi chandarāgappahānavasena imaṃ lokaṃ taranti, āyatiṃ bhavūpapādakassa kammassa kammakkhayakarañāṇena vināsanato paralokaṃ taranti, anupādāparinibbānavasena parinibbāyantīti attho.